Annexure F Tech Specs

TECHNICAL SPECFICATION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NAME OF WORK : CONSTRUCTION OF MEDICAL CENTRE
CLIENT : M/S.BANGALORE INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LIMITED

(BIAL) DEVANAHALLI , BANGALORE.
1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CIVIL WORKS
2
GENERAL CIVIL WORK & SPECIAL ITEMS OF CIVIL WORKS
CONTENTS
CHAPTER: 1 GENERAL
CHAPTER: 2 EARTHWORK
CHAPTER: 3 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT
CHAPTER: 4 PLAIN & REINFORCED CONCRETE
CHAPTER: 5 FORMWORK
CHAPTER: 6 REINFORCEMENT
CHAPTER: 9 PRECAST CONCRETE BLOCK
CHAPTER: 12 WOOD WORK
CHAPTER: 13 STEEL WORK
CHAPTER: 14 FLOORING WORK
CHAPTER: 15 ROOFING WORK
CHAPTER: 16 FINISHING WORK
CHAPTER: 17 ALUMINUM WORK
CHAPTER: 18 ROAD WORK
CHAPTER: 19 MISCELLANEOUS & SPECIALIZED ITEMS
CHAPTER: 20 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
APPENDIX: A SCHEDULE OF WORKS.
3
APPENDIX: B LIST OF APPROVED MAKES & MOCKUP

SAMPLES
4
CHAPTER : 1 GENERAL
THIS TECHINCAL SPECIFICATION SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH PARTICULAR

SPECIFICATION OF WORKS ATTACHED AS APPENDIX A, and DRAWINGS LISTED IN LIST
OF DRAWINGS. PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION OF WORKS SHALL BE FOLLOWED FOR
SPECIFIC PROVISIONS and REQUIREMENTS FOR THE WORK TO BE EXECUTED.THIS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION IS INTENDED FOR THE EXCUTION OF WORK AS PER CODE
OF PRACTICES, SOUND ENGINEERING PRACTICES, QUALITY CONTROL OF THE
MATERIALS TO BE INCORPORATED IN THE WORK AND WORKMANSHIP WITH ALL
MANDATORY FIELD TESTS AND MANUFACTURERES TESTS.
Besides adhering to the attached usual specifications laid down, following important instructions
must be specially adhered to:
1. GENERAL
These general specifications shall be applicable to all sections to the extent the context
permits and are intended to supplement the provision in particular sections. In case of any
discrepancy/deviation the provisions in the particular section shall take precedence.
2. RATE
The rates for all items of work unless clearly specified otherwise shall include cost of all
labor, materials and other inputs involved.
3. INTERPRETATION
The President (E&M office) shall be the sole deciding authority as to the meaning,
interpretations and implications for various provisions of the standard specifications. His
decision in writing shall be final and binding on all concerned.
4. GENERAL DEFINITIONS:
4.1 CONTRACTOR:
The individual or firm or company whether incorporated or not, undertaking the
works and shall include the legal personal representatives of such individual or the
persons composing such firms or company, or the successors of such individual or
firm or company and the permitted assignees of such individual or firm or company.
4.2 ENGINEER IN-CHARGE/ EIC:

The engineer officer who shall supervise and be in charge of the work and also who
signs the contract on behalf of the client
4.3 SITE:
The Site shall mean the land / or other places on, in, into or through which the
work is to be executed under the contract or any adjacent land, path or street which
may be allotted or used for the purpose of carrying out the contract.
4.4 DEPARTMENT:
Shall mean BIAL
5
5. INDIAN STANDARDS (IS):

The Indian Standard means the standard issued by the Bureau of Indian Standards.
Wherever any reference is made to IS in the specifications it shall be taken as reference to
the latest edition with all amendments issued thereto. In the event of any variation between
the NCBS specifications and that in I.S the former shall take precedence over the latter.
6. STORES:
When used in connection with the materials included in the appropriate schedule of the
contract for issue by department, the place of issue mentioned in that schedule.
7. DIAMETER:
Diameter for PVC pipes, brass tubes and steel conduits is the external diameter. In other
cases it will be the nominal diameter of the bore.
8. MATERIALS TO BE APPROVED:
8.1
All materials shall be in accordance with the specification and shall be got approved by the
Engineer In-Charge well in time before use in the works. Where materials are specified to
comply with IS, the contractor shall if required furnish the manufacturers certificate that the
materials satisfy the requirements of IS. Approved samples duly authenticated and sealed
shall be kept in the custody of the Engineer In-Charge till the completion of work. All
materials shall be brand new and as per approved samples.
8.2 STANDARD MARK OF BIS FOR MATERIALS:
Materials listed in Appendix A to this booklet wherever used on work shall bear IS Mark
invariably. For other materials also wherever brands with IS marks are available the same
shall be used. The contractor shall ascertain the source where materials with IS mark is
available and procure the same. Documentary proof for procurement of all materials
conforming to above shall be submitted by contractor to EIC as and when brought to site of
works. Materials procured shall bear IS mark and those for which IS mark is not available
shall be of acceptable standard.
8.3
Engineer In-Charge may insist testing of samples of materials even with IS mark.
8.4
Materials procured by contractors from the approved source are also to be subjected to
mandatory tests Material not meeting the specification requirements shall not be permitted
to be used in the work irrespective of source of procurement and no claim whatsoever shall
be considered on this behalf.
8.5
Materials supplied by the Department are supplied after requisite testing. Thus they shall be
complying with the specification requirements.
6
8.6
Materials stored at site shall be properly protected against deterioration due to
atmospheric effects or from any other harmful cause, fire hazard etc. The contractors shall
also ensure security of materials stored and their safety etc. The rate quoted by contractor
shall include the expenditure towards the above.
8.7
Samples of materials, fittings etc shall be submitted by the contractor for approval of
Engineer In-Charge before bulk supplies are brought on the site of works.
8.8
Samples whether submitted to govern bulk supplies or required for testing before use,
suitable packages to contain them shall be provided free of charge by the contractor.
Materials rejected by Engineer In-Charge shall be removed forthwith by the contractor off
the premises.
9. TESTING OF MATERIALS, QUALITY CONTROL TESTS ETC.

All arrangements required for taking samples, conveyance, packaging etc shall be made by
the contractor. Testing charges if any shall be borne by the Department.
10. MEASUREMENT:
10.1
In recording measurements the order shall be consistent and in the sequence of length,
width and height / depth / thickness
10.2 ROUNDING OFF:
Rounding off where required shall be done in accordance with IS. The number of significant
places rounded in the round off value should be as specified.
11. SCHEDULE / SCOPE OF WORK

11.1
The specifications furnished hereunder cover the general requirements of items of work as
per appendix A and the details shown on drawings. These specifications shall be read in
conjunction with the schedule of works as per Appendix A and drawings listed in list of
drawings for execution and to complete the works in all respects within the intent and
purpose of items of works indicated.
11.2
The lump sum to be quoted for the work unless otherwise stated shall include all relevant
details in these specifications and also shall include all minor details of construction which
are obviously and fairly intended and which may not have been referred to in the works
schedule but which are essential for the completion of work in all respects in accordance
with standard engineering practice and the amount shall include the cost of all materials,
labor involved in all the operations described in the item, including all leads, lifts incidental
expenditure, contingencies etc for execution of work in a workman like manner and
complete the same.
11.3
No extra payment will be admissible for staging in all centering and form work at all heights
and levels, i.e., above finished floor level / ground level up to top most member of the
structure and also for works below ground level at all depths and levels. Rates for items
shall include cost towards above component irrespective of whether a specific mention is
made or not in any item.
7
12. WATER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY for construction purposes will be as indicated in
the relevant contract documents.
13. BRAND NAMES OF MATERIALS / EQUIVALENT:

Wherever brand names of materials stipulated, the materials of brand names only shall be
incorporated in the work in the order of their indication in the list that is the second brand
indicated in the list shall be considered only if the first brand in the list is not available in
the market and the E I C approves the second brand and so on . If equivalent materials are
stipulated, the same shall be permitted only on production of documentary evidence to the
satisfaction of Engineer In-Charge that the material of stipulated brand is not under
production/ not available.
14. LEAD:
All leads shall be the shortest practical route and not necessary the route actually taken.
15. Under earth work measurements, no working space shall be considered beyond the width
of the foundation concrete (mud mat) shown in the drawings. The contractor shall consider
working space as required while quoting the rate. The quoted rate shall include the
quantity of earthwork to be done for working space if required and also for refilling such
excavation in foundation. For payment, the measurement shall be restricted only to the
foundation width shown in the drawings. No extra shall be permitted and measured for
payment on account of working space / battering / benching for excavation and refilling
around foundation.
16. Only Coarse Sand shall be used for all Plain & Reinforced Concrete works.
17. All form work items to include staging as may be necessary from FFL (Finished Floor
Level) of ground floor (in case of basement from FFL of basement) or NGL (Natural Ground
Level) as the case may be.
18. Lump sum quoted shall be inclusive of finishing the items in a workman like manner,
inclusive of all leads, lifts, incidental charges, contingent expenditure etc.
19. The centering (Vertical props, bracing etc., ) shall be of steel tubes, built-up sections of
rolled steel etc., as per design requirements for centering for form work. For minor RCC
elements like lintels, chajjas and like, within 2.5m height from firm base, wooden bullies
may be used with the approval of Engineer-In-Charge.
20. For cement concrete works M20 and above, design mix shall be adopted. Unless otherwise
specified. It is the responsibility of construction agency to furnish the design mix details well
in time to Engineer-In-Charge and ensure that the program of work is not hampered on
account of this.
21. The Indian Standards (IS) means the standards issued by Bureau of Indian Standards.
Wherever IS is referred in this document it shall be taken as latest IS, irrespective of
mention or otherwise of the year of the IS in the reference.
8
22. All measurements shall be as per relevant IS 1200 for all the items unless specifically
indicated otherwise. Where there is no IS mode of measurement, the quantum shall be as
per actual physical measurement of the item.
23. The lump sum quoted shall be inclusive of charges for attending to all safety requirements
during construction as per codal stipulations. Construction agency has to strictly follow
safety code and safety practices for various items of work.
24. The construction agency has to execute the work in coordination with other agencies like
Civil, Plumbing, Electrical, Air Conditioning etc., who are also entrusted works in the project
/ building and extend reasonable assistance, cooperation for smooth and timely execution
of the work
25. The authority / responsibility exercised by the Engineer-In-Charge and his representatives
are all as delegated to them. Thus the Contract administration vested with and exercised by
Engineer-In-Charge and others authorized shall be construed as exercised by the BIAL
26. The Engineer in charge reserves the right to select any of the makes/brands indicated in the
list of approved brand/make. The tenderer shall quote his rate on the basis of the price for
the best quality product of the brand/make stipulated for the item of work in the schedule of
quantity/specification/list of approved brand/ make. No claim whatsoever shall be
entertained if the Engineer In Charge changes the brand/make of any material within the
approved list, while communicating the approval for procurement of a material. In the event
for whatsoever reason, the Engineer In Charge approves equivalent material of brand/make
not covered in the item/specification / list of approved brand/make, price variation if any
shall be made for the same based on then prevailing market rates.
9
CHAPTER : 2 EARTHWORK AND EXCAVATION
1. SCOPE:
1.1
The scope of work includes excavation for foundations pits backfilling, disposal of surplus
earth, including all leads and lifts as required including dewatering, shoring and strutting.
1.2
Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, equipment, operations and incidentals
necessary and required for completion of all aspects of work covered in these
specifications.
2. TYPES OF SOIL:
Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the type of soil in excavation by an
inspection of the nature of ground at site and scrutiny of the soil investigation details
available with the BIAL
All soils shall be taken as hard soil unless hard rock or old masonry or concrete or such
hard materials are met with.
3. SETTING OUT:
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to install substantial reference marks; bench
marks etc. and maintain them as long as required by the Engineer-in-Charge. The
contractor will assume full responsibility for proper setting out, alignment, excavation and
dimension of each and all parts of the work.
4. EXCAVATION AND PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR CONCRETING:
4.1 The foundation pits shall be dug to the dimensions as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The excavated material shall be staked at least
one and half meter or half the depth of excavation away from the edge of the
excavated pit, whichever is more, so as to not to endanger the stability of the sides.
4.2 The contractor shall, at his own expense and without any extra charge, make
provision for all shoring and strutting, pumping, dredging or bailing out water, and
the excavation shall be kept free from water when the foundation work is in
progress.
4.3 If excavation is carried out to greater width, length or depth than specified, extra
depth shall be made up by filling in lean concrete and extra length or width by filling
in with earth rammed hard or by masonry as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Cost of such extra excavation and of the filling required therein as specified above
shall be borne in full by the contractor.
4.4 If required to protect the sides of pits and trenches, timber shoring and strutting
shall be erected. The timbering shall be closed or open depending on the nature of
10
the soil and work, and the arrangement of timbering including sizes and spacing of
members used shall be as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. No extra charges
shall be admissible on this account unless admitted as a separate item in the
schedule.
4.5 The bottom of all excavation shall be rammed and wetted before deposition of
concrete.
4.6 The contractors shall report to the Engineer-in-charge when the excavations are
ready to receive concrete. No concrete shall be placed in foundations until the
contractor has obtained the approval of Engineer-in-charge. In case, the
excavation is done through different strata and the same is payable as per
provision in the schedule of quantities, the contractor shall get the dimension of the
different strata payable, decided from the Engineer-in-charge.
If no specific provision is made in the schedule of quantities it will be presumed that
excavation shall be in all types of soil (hard soil) and the Contractors rate shall
cover for the same.
4.7 After the excavation is passed by the Engineer-in-charge and before laying the
concrete, the Contractor shall get the depth and dimensions of the excavation and
levels (and nature of strata if applicable as per schedule of quantities like hard rock,
soft rock etc.) are measured and recorded, got checked by the Engineer-in-charge.
5. PROTECTION:
The basement pits and similar excavations shall be strong fenced and marked with red
lights at night and placed in charge of watchman to avoid accidents. Adequate protective
measures shall be taken with respect to the excavation, the people working in and near the
basement pits, property and the people in the vicinity, by the contractor at his own cost.
The Contractor is entirely responsible for any injury to the persons and damage to property,
caused by his negligence or accident due to his constructional operations.
6. STACKING OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL:

Rate for excavation shall include sorting out of useful materials and stacking them on site
as directed. Materials suitable and useful for backfilling, plinth filling or leveling of the plot or
other use shall be stacked in convenient places but not in such a way as to obstruct free
movement of men animals and vehicles or encroach on the area required for constructional
purposes.
7. BACK FILLING:
7.1 Back filling in sides of excavation pits shall be done with soil approved by the
Engineer-in-charge taken from excavation or from outside the site, in layers as
described in clause 7.3. the backfilling shall commence only after the approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.2 Fill shall be of well compactable, well graded earth or sand and shall be free from
tree stumps, organic matter, seed, peat etc. where earth or sand from source other
than excavation at site is used, the quality of such earth or sand shall be the same
as that obtained from excavation at site, or superior to it.
7.3 The fill shall be spread in layers not exceeding 20 cm thick and each layer shall be
watered and thoroughly consolidated by mechanical rollers/rammers / vibrators or
other approved plant or system of compaction. The fill material shall be pulverized
before depositing in place. In order that the fill shall be reasonably uniform
throughout the material shall be dumped in place in approximately horizontal layers.
End dumping, a process by which the material is pushed off edge of the fill and
allowed to roll down the slope shall not be carried out. If there is traffic over the fill
11
during construction, either by construction equipment or otherwise, it should be

routed to make the compaction as uniform as possible.
Where necessary symmetrical filling load shall be maintained and also care shall be
taken to prevent any wedging action.
8. DEWATERING:
8.1 Rate for excavation shall include bailing out or pumping out water which may
accumulate in the excavation during the progress of work either from seepage,
springs, rain or any other cause and diverting surface flow if any by bunds or other
means.
8.2 During the construction of basements, continuous dewatering shall be carried out
by the contractor at his own cost by installing an approved and adequate well point
system to keep the water table below the foundation level. Pumping out water shall
be done in such approved manner as to prelude the possibility of any damage to
the foundations or any adjacent structure.
8.3 When water is met in excavation, pumping out water shall be from an auxiliary pit
whose depth shall be more than the working foundation level. The auxiliary pit shall
be refilled with approved excavated material after the dewatering is over.
8.4 The excavation shall be kept free from water:

(a) during inspection and measurement
(b) when concrete and /or masonry are in progress and till they come above
the natural water level and,
(c) till the Engineer-in-Charge considers that the concrete/mortar is
sufficiently set.
9. SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
All excavated material certified as surplus and not useful shall be removed by the contractor
from the site in an approved manner to a suitable dump as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge.
10. RATES TO INCLUDE
Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract, rates for the item of
excavation shall also include for the following:
1. Setting out works as required and setting up bench marks and other reference
marks.
2. Providing shoring and strutting and subsequently removing the same unless
otherwise specifically provided for.
3. Dewatering as required and directed.
4. Excavation at all depths (unless otherwise specified in the schedule of Quantities)

and removal of all materials of whatsoever nature wet or dry necessary for the
construction bed for laying concrete.
5. Removal of muck left over by the piling Contractor.
12
6. Sorting out useful excavated material and conveying beyond the structure and
stacking them neatly on the site for backfilling or re-use as directed.
7. Necessary protection including labor, materials and equipment to ensure safety and
protection against risk or accident.
8. Site clearance as required for foundation earthwork excavation.
13
CHAPTER : 3 PRE-CONSTRUCTIONAL ANTITERMITE TREATMENT
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section covers the requirements for providing pre-constructional anti-termite
treatment of buildings by treating the soil beneath the building and around the
foundation with a suitable insecticide
1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

The codes and standards generally applicable to the work of this section are listed
here in after:
IS: 6313 Pre-constructional Chemical Treatment.
IS: 8944 Chloropyrifos emulsifiable Concentrates
IS: 632 Lindane emulsifiable concentrate.
2. MATERIALS
2.1 CHEMICALS
The contractor shall use the following chemical in water emulsion to achieve the
percentage concentration specified below:
CHEMICAL RELEVANT INDIAN CONCENTRATION BY

STANDARDS VOLUME
Chloropyrifos IS: 8944 1.0%

emulsifiable
concentrate-20 EC
Lindane Emulsifiable IS: 632 1.0%

concentrate-20EC.
Chemical is available in concentrated form in the market and concentration is

indicated on the sealed containers. To achieve the percentage of concentration
specified above, chemical should be diluted with water in required quantity before it
is used. Graduated containers shall be used for dilution of chemical with water in
the required proportion to achieve the desired percentage of concentration.
Chemical shall be brought to site of work in sealed original containers. The material
shall be brought in, at a time in adequate quantity to suffice for a whole or at least a
fort-nights work. The material shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor
and Engineer-in-Charge. The empties shall not be removed from the site of work,
till the relevant item of work has been completed and permission obtained from the
Engineer-in-Charge.
3. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
All chemicals used for anti-termite treatment are Poisons. These chemicals can
have an adverse effect upon the health when absorbed through the skin, inhaled as
vapors or spray mists or swallowed. The containers having emulsifiable
concentrates shall be clearly labeled and kept securely closed in stores so that
children or pet cannot get at them. Storage and mixing of concentrates shall not be
done near any fire source or flame. Persons using these chemicals shall be warned
that absorption through skin is the most likely source of accidental poisoning. After
14
handling the concentrates or dilute emulsion, workers shall wash themselves with
soap and water and in the event of severe contamination, affected person shall be
flushed with plenty of soap and water and immediate medical attention sought.
Care should be taken to see that no source of drinking water should be allowed to
contaminate.
4. EQUIPMENT
Hand operated pressure pump shall be used for uniform spraying of the chemical.
To have proper check for uniform spraying of chemical, graduated containers shall
be used. Proper check should be kept that the specified quantity of chemical is
used for the required area during the operation
5. TIME OF APPLICATION
The treatment should start just prior to laying concrete sub base when the chemical
emulsifier has been absorbed by the filled up soil for plinth. Treatment should not
be carried out when it is raining or when soil is wet due to rain or subsoil water.
The treated soil barrier shall not be disturbed. If by chance the treated soil barrier
gets disturbed, immediate steps shall be taken to restore the continuity and
completeness of barrier system.
6. TREATMENT PROCEDURE
6.1 A complete chemical barrier shall be provided on top surface of plinth filling,
junction of wall and floors, on top of damp proof course (DPC) or masonry at plinth
level as per IS 6313(Part II). The chemical of specified concentration shall be
spread at 5 liters per Sqm on top surface of plinth filling, top of damp proof course
and shall be applied at one liter per linear meter length along the junction of wall
and floor
6.2 TREATMENT ON TOP SURFACE OF PLINTH FILLING
After the earth filling is completed and made ready to receive sub base concrete the
entire surface of filled earth shall be treated with the chemical emulsion at the rate
of 5 liter per Sqm. Light tamping may be carried out in the soil surface to facilitate
absorption for saturation of the soil with chemical emulsion.
6.3 TREATMENT AT JUNCTION OF WALL AND FLOOR
Rodding shall be carried out along the junction of wall and earth filling at 15cm
intervals down to the bottom of plinth filling. Emulsion shall be sprayed along the
wall junction at 1 litre per linear metre so that it mixes intimately with the broken up
soil and seeps to the natural ground level. The disturbed earth is then tamped
back in place.
6.4 The barrier shall be complete and continuous inside the whole of the surface to be
protected. Each part of the area treated shall receive the prescribed dosage of
chemical.
6.5 TREATMENT OF SOIL SURROUNDING PIPES AND CONDUITS
15
When pipes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of foundations, the soil
surrounding the points of entry shall be loosened around each such pipe, or conduit
for a distance of 150 mm and to a depth of 75 mm before treatment is commenced.
When they enter the soil external to the foundations, they shall be similarly treated
unless they stand clear of the walls of the building by about 75 mm for a distance of
over 300 mm from ground level.
7. GUARANTEE
The anti-termite treatment shall carry a free service guarantee for the satisfactory
performance for a minimum period of 10 years. The Contractor shall give a
guarantee bond under taking in writing to the effect that in case during the
guarantee period any termite infestation takes place, the same will be eradicated
and necessary treatment carried out to prevent reinfestation, free of cost. The
draft bond document will be furnished by Engineer-In-Charge.
8. RATE
The rate for the anti-termite treatment shall include the cost of all material, labour
and all other inputs involved in all the operations described above. Anti- termite
treatment works should be executed by a specialized agency
approved by SPCA.
16
CHAPTER :4 PLAIN & REINFORCED CONCRETE
Section - I:
Materials
Part - I : Specifications
Part - 2 : Handling and Storage
Part - 3 : Measuring/Batching
Section - II:
Concrete
Part - 1 : Specifications for Portland Cement Concrete
Part - 2 : Guideline Specifications for Pump-able Concrete
Section - III:
Concrete
Part - 1 : Mixing and ready - mix concrete
Part - 2 : Transporting ready mix concrete
Part - 3 : Placing Concrete in Position
Part - 4 : Special requirements for placing concrete by Pumping methods
Part - 5 : Compacting and Curing of Concrete
Part - 6 : Concreting under extreme weather conditions
Section - IV :
Testing
Part - 1 : Materials
Part - 2 : Concrete
17
SECTION - I: MATERIALS
PART - I: SPECIFICATIONS
1. MATERIALS
1.1 Materials covered under this section of specifications are:-
- Cement
- Aggregates (Coarse and Fine)
- Water
- Admixtures
2. CEMENT:
2.1 Cement used in the works shall conform to only the following types:-
a) Ordinary Portland cement of
- grade 33 conforming to I.S. : - 269
b) Portland Pozzolana Cement (Fly ash based)

- grade 43 conforming to I.S.: - 1489 (Part I)
c) Supersulphate cement of
- grade 30 conforming to I.S. - 6909.
2.2 Compressive strength requirement of each type of cement for various grades, when
tested in accordance with I.S. 4031 (Part-6) shall be as under:-
Strength in Newton/Sq.mm not less than

Sample
for
Grade 30 Grade 33 Grade 43 Grade 53

Age at testing
72 + 1 hour 15 16 23 27
168 + 2 hours 22 22 33 37
672 + 4 hours 30 33 43 53
2.3 Setting time of cement of any type or any grade specified in these
specifications, when tested by the Vicat apparatus method described in
I.S. - 4031 shall conform to the following limits:-
a) Initial setting time: not less than 30 minutes

b) Final setting time: not more than 600 minutes.
2.4 Cement to be used for the manufacture of concrete of different grades and for
different purposes shall be as specified by the user/purchaser of such concrete and
as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
18
3. COARSE AGGREGATE:
3.1 Coarse aggregates for the manufacture of concrete shall conform to I.S.:383
3.2 Coarse aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring stones and gravels. They
shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clear and be free from veins and
adherent coatings. These should be free from injurious amounts of disintegrated
pieces, alkali, vegetable matter and other deleterious substances. Flaky and
elongated pieces should be avoided as far as practicable.
3.3 Limits of deleterious materials permissible in coarse aggregates, when tested in

accordance with I.S. - 2386 shall be limited to the following :-
Maximum allowable percentage

Deleterious substance
by weight of aggregates
i) Coal and lignite 1.0
ii) Clay 1.0

iii) Materials finer than
3.0
75 micron I.S. sieve
iv) Soft fragments NIL
v) Shale
NIL
vi) Mica NIL
vii) Total of all items (i) to (vi) 5.0
19
3.4 Single sized coarse aggregates or graded coarse aggregates for

manufacture of concrete shall have grading as given in table 3.4.1 and 3.4.2
respectively.
TABLE 3.4.1
SINGLE SIZED (UNGRADED) STONE AGGREGATE OR GRAVEL
Percentage passing (by weight) for nominal size of

IS Sieve
Designation 40mm 20 mm 16mm 12.5 mm 10mm
63 mm 100 - - - -
40 mm 85 -100 100 - - -
20 mm 0 - 25 85 - 100 100 - -
16 mm - - 85 -100 100 -
12.5 mm - - - 85 -100 100
10 mm 0-5 0 - 20 0 - 20 0 - 20 85 -100
4.75 mm - 0-5 0-5 0-5 0 - 20
2.36 mm - - - - 0-5
TABLE 3.4.2
GRADED STONE AGGREGATE OR GRAVEL
Percentage passing through for graded aggregates I.S.

IS Sieve Sieve of nominal sizes
Designation 12.5 mm
40 mm 20 mm 16 mm
-
75 mm 100 - -
-
37.5 mm 95 to 100 100 -
19 mm 30 to 70 95 to 100 100 -
16 mm - - 95 - 100 100
11.2 mm - - - 90 - 100
9.5 mm 10 to 35 25 - 35 30 - 70 40 - 85
4.75 mm 0-5 0 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 10
3.5 Strength and other tests for coarse aggregates shall be done in accordance with
I.S. 2386 as per instructions of Engineer-in-Charge and all such test reports shall
20
be furnished to him for his approval before any aggregate is used in

manufacture of concrete for the works.
3.6 Maximum nominal size of coarse aggregates to be used for the manufacture of
concrete of different grades and different purposes shall be as specified by the
user/purchaser of such concrete and as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4. FINE AGGREGATES:
4.1 Fine aggregates for the manufacture of concrete shall conform to I.S.:383.
4.2 Fine aggregates shall comprise of either naturally occurring sand or crushed and
milled stone and gravels or a combination thereof. These shall be hard, strong,
dense, durable, clear and free from adherent coatings, and shall be free from
injurious amounts of alkali, vegetable matter, and other deleterious substances.
4.3 Limits of deleterious materials permissible in fine aggregates shall be as for coarse
aggregates as given in Para 3.3 above.
4.4 Grading of fine aggregates for manufacture of concrete shall be limited to the zones
I to III of table 4.4.1, when determined as described in I.S- 2386 (Part I).
TABLE - 4.4.1
IS Sieve Percentage passing for
Size Zone - I Zone - II Zone - III Zone IV
10 mm 100 100 100 100
4.75 mm 90 - 100 90 - 100 90 - 100 95 100
2.36 mm 60 95 75 100 85 100 95 100
1.18 mm 30 - 70 55 - 90 75 - 100 90 100
600 micron 15 34 35 59 60 79 80 100
300 micron 5 - 20 8 - 30 12 - 40 15 50
150 micron 0 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 10 0 15
4.5 Tolerance for a particular grading zone shall be + 5% for all sizes of particles
for that zone. This tolerance limit shall not be applicable to the following:
a) For material passing 600 micron sieve for all zones.

b) For coarse limits of Zone - I.
4.6 Strength and other tests for fine aggregates shall be done in accordance with I.S. -
2386 as per instructions of Engineer-In-Charge, and all such test reports shall be
furnished to him for his approval before any of the fine aggregates is used in the
manufacture of concrete for the works.
5. WATER:
21
5.1 Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and shall be free from injurious
amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials or other
substances that may be deleterious to concrete and steel.
5.2 Water proposed to be used for manufacture of concrete and curing of concrete
shall be tested as per recommendations of I.S. 3025. All such test reports shall be
furnished to the Engineer-in-Charge for his approval.
5.3 Water for manufacture of concrete, when tested in accordance with I.S. 3025 for
presence of solids shall have permissible limits as given in table 5.3.1.
TABLE 5.3.1
Material Maximum permissible limit
Organic 200 mg/litre
Inorganic 2000 mg/litre
Sulphates (as SO4) 300 mg/litre
Chloride (as CL ) 500 mg/litre
Suspended matter 1000 mg/litre
5.4 The PH value of water to be used for manufacture of concrete shall not be less
than 6.
5.5 Prior to testing of water sample, it shall not have any pretreatment. Sample shall
be stored in a clean container previously rinsed out with the same water.
6. ADMIXTURES:
6.1 Admixtures may be used in concrete subject to prior approval of Engineer-In-

Charge. All admixtures shall conform to I.S. 9103.
6.2 Admixtures may be any one of the following classes for use in concrete:-
a) Water - reducing Admixtures

b) Retarding Admixtures
c) Accelerating Admixtures
d) Water reducing and retarding Admixtures
e) Water reducing and accelerating Admixtures
f) Permeability reducing (water proofing) Admixtures.
6.3 LIQUID ADMIXTURES:
6.3.1 Admixtures introduced into the concrete as liquids generally fall into the
following categories:
i) Air entraining
ii) Water reducing
22
iii) Water reducing retarders

iv) Retarders
v) Water reducing accelerators
vi) Accelerators
6.3.2 Dosage of these admixtures shall be done exactly as per specification of

Admixture manufacturer.
6.3.3 Two or more admixtures may not be compatible in the same solution. It is
therefore mandatory that when two admixtures manufactured by the same
manufacturer is being used simultaneously, the manufacturer shall certify
their compatibility. In case the two or more admixtures are produced by
different manufacturers, then, before their use in concrete, test shall be
performed by the manufacturer to establish their compatibility, all such
test reports shall be furnished to the Engineer-in-Charge for his approval
before their use in concrete.
6.4 Some admixtures may be in the form of powder, particle or high concentration
liquids which may require mixing with water prior to dosing. Under these
conditions, water in solution shall be considered as part of total water content in the
batch in order to maintain the water cement ratio.
6.5 Admixture manufacturer's recommendation shall be carefully followed so as to

ensure complete solution of the product or to prepare a standard solution of
uniform strength for easier use.
6.6 Certain admixtures may contain significant amounts of finely divided insoluble
materials or active ingredients which may or may not be readily soluble. It is
essential for such admixtures that precautious be taken to ensure that these
constituents be kept in a state of uniform suspension before actual batching.
6.7 When relatively small amounts of powdered admixtures are to be used directly,
these shall be pre - blended with cement.
6.8 Admixtures are sold under various trade names and may be in the form of liquids or
powders. The proprietary name and the net quantity of content shall be clearly
indicated in each package or container of admixtures. The admixtures shall be
uniform within each batch and uniform between all batches.
6.9 No admixture shall be accepted for use in concrete unless these are tested in
accordance with I.S: 9103 and the test results are approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge.
23
SECTION I : MATERIALS
PART-2 : HANDLING AND STORAGE
1. AGGREGATES:
1.1 Coarse and fine aggregates as delivered to weigh batchers shall be of good
quality and uniform grading. Moisture content shall also be controlled.
1.2 COARSE AGGREGATES:
1.2.1 Segregation in coarse aggregates shall be reduced to a minimum by

separating the material into several fractions and batching these fractions
separately.
1.2.2 Range of sizes in each fraction shall be reduced, and the number of
separations shall be increased to control segregation. To maintain this the
ratio of maximum to minimum size in each fraction shall be restricted to
four for aggregates smaller than 25mm and the ratio shall be reduced
to two for aggregates larger than 25mm.
1.2.3 When specification limits for grading cannot be met consistently,

special handling methods shall be instituted, like re-screening of
coarse aggregates at the batch plant to eliminate objectionable
undersized material. Undersize materials in the smaller aggregate
fractions shall be consistently reduced to 2% by re-screening
immediately before storing in batch-plant bins.
1.3 FINE AGGRAGTES:
1.3.1 Fine aggregates shall be controlled and stored to minimize variations

in grading by keeping finer fractions uniform and exercising care to
avoid excessive removal of fines during processing.
1.3.2 Variations in grading during production of concrete shall be minimized.

Variation in fineness modulus of fine aggregate shall be maintained within +
0.20 of design value.
1.3.3 Amount and nature of material finer than the 75 micron sieve shall be given
special attention. Excessive quantities of fines passing 75 micron sieve
increases mixing water requirement, rate of slump loss, increase of drying
shrinkage and strength loss. Arrangements shall be made to store coarse
and fine fractions separately before loading then into batch - plant bins.
1.4 STORAGE:
1.4.1 Stock piling of aggregates if required shall be kept to a minimum and in no

case the height shall exceed 1.2 m. Stock piles shall be built up in
horizontal layers with gently sloping sides. Stock piles shall not be created
by end- dumping from trucks. Suitable arrangements to slide the
aggregates down from truck bodies shall be made. Vehicular movement
on stock piles shall not be allowed.
Stock piles shall be provided with a hard base (preferably concrete) with
suitable drainage to prevent contamination. Overlap of different fraction
piles shall be prevented by means of separator walls. Wind shall not be
permitted to blow on dry fine aggregate causing separation/segregation.
24
1.4.2 Storage bins shall be kept as full as practicable to minimize changes in

grading as material is withdrawn. Material shall be deposited in bins
vertically and directly above the bin outlet.
1.5 MOISTURE CONTROL:
1.5.1 Effort shall be made to ensure uniform and stable moisture content in
aggregates as batched. Use of aggregates having varying amounts of free
water shall not be permitted. Sometimes it may be necessary to wet the
coarse aggregates in stock piles. Under such conditions the aggregates
shall be dewatered on appropriate drying screens.
For fine aggregates, appropriate time shall be allowed for free water
drainage before the aggregate is transferred to batch plant bins.
1.5.2 Moisture variation in fine aggregates shall be restricted to 0.5% per hour.
To ensure stable moisture content in fine aggregate before loading in batch
plant bin, use of moisture meter shall be made.
1.5.3 CEMENT:
1.6 HANDLING:
1.6.1 As far as practicable, cement of each type shall be obtained from one
constant source throughout the works. Different brands of cements or
cement of same brand from different sources shall not be used for the
works without the written approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
1.6.2 Cement shall be received and stored either packed in approved quality
bags or in silos. Damaged bags shall not be received in stores.
1.6.3 Every delivery of cement shall be accompanied by a producer's

certificate confirming that the supplied cement conforms to relevant
specifications. These certificates shall be endorsed to the Engineer-in-
Charge for his record.
1.6.4 Every consignment of cement must have identification marks on packages

indicating date of manufacture and grade and type of cement. Cement
brought to works shall not be more than 6 weeks old from the date of
manufacture.
1.7 STORAGE:
1.7.1 Packaged cement shall be stored in weather tight but properly ventilated
structures to prevent absorption of moisture.
These shall be stored on a raised floor/platform. Stacks shall be made with

height not exceeding 10 bags. Adequate alley ways shall be provided
between each stack. Stacks shall not be made against exterior walls.
1.7.2 Cement stored in bags during monsoon or cement in bags expected to be

in storage for more than 8 weeks shall be completely wrapped with
700 micron thick polythene/polyethylene sheets so arranged that the
flaps closes on the top of the stack with at least one metre overlap. If
during handling/use the covering sheets gets damaged or ruptured,
these shall be replaced.
1.7.3 Cement shall be used in the manufacture of concrete in order of the
following preferences:-
a) Date of manufacture or age of cement.
b) Date of storage at works.
25
2. ADMIXTURES:
2.1 HANDLING:
2.1.1 Admixtures, being manufactured ingredients for use in concrete, shall be

handled as packed by manufactures. Damaged packing shall not be
acceptable and contents of such packages shall not be used in the works.
2.2 STORAGE:
2.2.1 Admixtures shall be stored in proper store - rooms and shall be kept in
packages/containers as supplied by the manufacturer of the item.
2.2.2 When the seal of a package or container is broken for use care shall be
taken that the balance quantity is stored such that these are protected from
dampness. For liquid admixtures supplied in drums or cans, the lids shall
be replaced tightly. For admixtures supplied in packages, the opened
packs shall be carefully wrapped in 700 micron thick polythene sheets
before putting these back in storage.
2.2.3 Admixtures of different types and usages shall be stored in different

groups (preferably in separate racks).
2.2.4 All packing of admixtures shall have the date of manufacture and/or
date of expiry clearly stamped on them.
2.2.5 Admixtures of any type shall be used in order of the following preferences:-
a) Date of expiry.
b) Date of manufacture.
26
SECTION I: MATERIALS
PART - 3: MEASURING OR BATCHING
1. OBJECTIVES:
1.1 During measurement all components of concrete shall be handled in a manner to

maintain their desired grading and shall be weighed to the tolerances required
to maintain the desired reproducibility of the concrete mix selected for use.
1.2 In addition to accurate weighing, another important objective of successful

batching is the proper sequencing and blending of the ingredients during
charging of the mixers. Homogeneity and consistency of the concrete produced in
respect of physical properties like unit weight, slump, air content, strength and air
free mortar content in successive batches of the same mix proportion.
2. OTHER REQUIREMENTS:
2.1 Other requirements on measurement tolerances shall be:
a) Beam or scale divisions of scales shall be 0.1 percent of total capacity.

b) Batching interlock of + 0.3 percent of total capacity at zero balance.
c) Quantity of admixtures measured shall never be so small that 0.4 percent of the
full scale capacity is greater than 3 percent of the required weight
2.2 All batching equipments shall be isolated from any kind of vibrations either from
plant or otherwise. If required, proper vibration isolators shall be used.
2.3 All automatic controls shall be protected from dust and weather.
2.4 Frequent checks shall be made of the beam and scale pivot points for their
correctness. All balances and scales shall be regularly cleaned.
3. BINS AND WEIGH BATCHERS
3.1 Batch plant bins shall be of adequate size to effectively accommodate the
productive capacity of the plant. All compartments in bins shall be adequately
separate for the various materials. Shape and arrangements of bins shall be
conducive to the prevention of aggregate segregation and breakage.
3.2 Gates used to charge the batchers shall be power operated and shall be
equipped with a suitable controlling device to obtain the desired weighing
accuracy.
3.3 Batchers shall be capable of providing representative samples at any time during
the process of batching. Batchers shall also be capable of proper sequencing and
blending of aggregates during charging of mixer.
SECTION - II : CONCRETE
27
PART - I : PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
1. GENERAL
1.1 This section deals with the requirements of Portland Cement Concrete as
manufactured from:
Cement
Coarse aggregates
Fine aggregates
Water
Concrete may or may not contain permissible admixtures.
1.2 Specifications for ingredients to be used in manufacture/production of concrete

shall be as stipulated in Section - I of these specifications.
2. MIX DESIGN AND PROPOTIONING:
2.1 Mix proportions shall be designed to ensure that the workability of fresh concrete
is suitable for conditions of handling and placing, so that after compaction it
surrounds all reinforcements and completely fills the formwork. When concrete
is hardened, it shall have the stipulated strength, durability and impermeability.
2.2 Determination of the proportions by weight of cement, aggregates and water shall be
based on design of the mix.
2.3 As a trial the manufacturer of concrete may prepare a preliminary mix according to
provisions of S.P: 23-1982. Reference may also be made to ACI 211.1-77 for
guidance.
2.4 Mix design shall be tried and the mix proportions checked on the basis of tests
conducted at a recognized laboratory approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
2.5 All concrete proportions for various grades of concretes shall be designed
separately and the mix proportions established keeping in view the workability
for various structural elements, methods of placing and compacting. Irrespective of
the variables, each grade of concrete being produced for works shall meet the
characteristic strength requirements as given in table 2.5.1, when tested in
accordance with I.S. 516.
28
TABLE: 2.5.1
Concrete grade Specified Characteristic Cube

Designation Compressive Strength at 28 days.
M - 20 20 N/sq.mm
M - 25 25 N/ sq.mm
M - 30 30 N/ sq.mm
M - 35 35 N/ sq.mm
M - 40 40 N/ sq.mm
Strength values given in table 2.5.1 shall alone be the criterion for acceptance or
rejection of the concrete.
2.6 In order to get a relatively quicker idea of the strengths gained by concrete, tests
shall be conducted in accordance with I.S. 516, as per requirement and
instructions of Engineer-in-Charge, for tests to determine modulus of rupture and
compressive strengths. For such test results, with ordinary Portland cement, the
guide line values shall be as given in table 2.6.1
TABLE: 2.6.1
Modulus of rupture by beam test in

Concrete
Cube Compressive (N/sq.mm)
grade
Strength at 7 days
Designation at 72 + 2 hrs. 7 days
(N/sq.mm)
M - 20 13.5 1.7 2.4
M - 25 17.0 1.9 2.7
M - 30 20.0 2.1 3.0
M - 35 23.5 2.3 3.2
M - 40 27.0 2.5 3.4
2.7 Concrete compressive strength tests for preliminary works including trial mix
design conducted in accordance with I.S. 516 under controlled laboratory
conditions shall meet the requirements of values stipulated in table 2.7.1
TABLE: 2.7.1
Compressive Strength of cubes

Concrete grade (N/sq.mm)
Designation
at 7 days at 28 days
M - 20 13.5 20
M - 25 17.0 25
M - 30 20.0 30
M - 35 23.5 35
M - 40 27.0 40
3. TEST STRENGTHS OF SAMPLES
29
3.1 Test strength of a sample shall be the average of three specimens from the same
batch of concrete. Individual variations in strengths of the three specimens shall not
be more than + 10 percent of the average.
4. STANDARD DEVIATION
4.1 Standard deviation calculations of test results based on tests conducted on the
same mix design for a particular grade designation shall be done in
accordance with clause 14.5 of I.S. 456.
5. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Acceptance criteria of any concrete shall be as stipulated in clause 15 of I.S. 456
6. CEMENT CONTENT IN CONCRETE
6.1 For all grades of concrete manufactured/produced, minimum cement content in the
concrete shall be 300 kg per cubic metre of concrete. Also, irrespective of the grade
of concrete, the maximum cement content shall not be more than 500 kg per cubic
metre of concrete. These limitations shall apply for all types of cements of all
strengths.
6.2 Actual cement content in each grade of concrete for various conditions of variables
shall be established by design mixes within the limits specified in Para 6.1 above.
7. WATER CEMENT RATIO AND SLUMP
7.1 In proportioning a particular mix, the manufacturer/ producer shall give due
consideration to the moisture content in the aggregates, and the mix shall be so
designed as to restrict the maximum free water to cement ratio to less than 0.5.
7.2 Due consideration shall be given to the workability of the concrete thus produced.
Slump shall be controlled on the basis of placement in different situations. For
normal methods of placing concrete, maximum slump shall be restricted to 100 mm
when measured in accordance with I.S. 1199.
8. WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE
8.1 The concrete mix proportion chosen should be such that the concrete is of adequate
workability for the placing conditions of the concrete and can properly be compacted
with the means available. Ranges of workability of concrete measured in
accordance with IS:1199 are given below:
30
PLACING CONDITIONS DEGREE OF SLUMP

WORKABILITY (MM)
1 2 3
Blinding concrete; shallow Very low See 8.2
sections; pavements using pavers
Mass concrete; lightly reinforced Low 25-75

sections in slabs, beams, wall,
columns: floor; hand placed
pavements, canal lining, strip
footings
Heavily reinforced sections in Medium 50-100

slabs, beams, walls, columns
Slip form work; pumped concrete Medium 75-100
Trench fill; in situ piling High 100
Tremie concrete Very high See 8.3
8.2 In the very low category of workability where strict control is necessary, for
example. Pavent quality, quality concrete, measurement of workability by
determination of compacting factor will be more appropriate than slump (seeIS:1199)
and a value of compacting factor of 0.75 to 80 is suggested.
8.3 In the very high category of workability, measurement of workability by

determination of flow will be appropriate ( see IS:9103).
9. APPROVAL OF DESIGN MIX
9.1 The producer/manufacturer of concrete shall submit details of each trial mix of
each grade of concrete designed for various workability conditions to the
Engineer-in-Charge for his comment and approval. Concrete of any particular
design mix and grade shall be produced /manufactured for works only on obtaining
written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
9.2 For any change in quality/quantity in the ingredients of a particular concrete, for
which mix has been designed earlier and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge,
the mix has to be redesigned and approval obtained again.
31
SECTION - II : CONCRETE
PART - 2 : GUIDELINE SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUMPABLE CONCRETE.
1. BASIC CONSIDERATIONS:
1.1 Ingredients of pumped concrete shall be same as those for concrete placed by
other means. However, more emphasis shall be laid on quality control and
proportioning of pump-able concrete.
2. QUALITY
2.1 Concrete mixes for pumping must be plastic and soft. Harsh mixes do not pump
well. Particular attention shall be given to the mortar part (cement, fine
aggregate and water) and also to the amount and sizes of coarse aggregates.
3. CEMENT
3.1 There shall be no special requirements for cement to be used for pump-able mixes.
4. COARSE AGGREGATES
4.1 The maximum size of angular coarse aggregate shall be limited to one third of the
smallest inside diameter of the hose or pipe on simple geometry of cubical shaped
aggregates. For well rounded aggregates, the maximum aggregate size shall be
restricted to 40% of the pipe or hose diameter. Provision shall be made to totally
eliminate oversized particles in the aggregates. Grading of different size
aggregates shall be as per table 3.4.2 of Section - I, Part-I of these
specifications and shall be as close to the middle range of each gradation
limits. It may become necessary to combine and blend certain fractional sizes to
produce proper gradation.
4.2 Uniformity of gradation throughout the period of the job from day to day is far
more important than occasional perfect "down the middle gradation".
4.3 Shape of the coarse aggregate, whether angular or rounded, has an influence
on the mix proportions. However, both types can be pumped satisfactorily. The
maximum size of coarse aggregates has a significant effect on the volume or
amount of coarse aggregates that may be efficiently used. Quantity of coarse
aggregates must be suitably reduced as the maximum aggregate size become
smaller.
5. FINE AGGREGATES
5.1 Properties of fine aggregate play a vital role in the proportioning of pump-able
concrete. Together with cement and water, the fine aggregates provide the
mortar or fluid which conveys the coarse aggregates in suspension thus rendering
the mix pump-able.
5.2 Gradation of fine aggregates which constitute all the particle passing the 4.75 mm
I.S. sieve shall conform to Table 4.4.1 of Section I, Part-I of these
specifications. For a pump-able mix, particular attention shall to given to the
finer screen sizes. For small line systems (less than 150 mm diameter) 15 to 30
32
percent should pass the 300 micron sieve and 5 to 10 percent should pass the 150
micron sieve.
Fine aggregates which are deficient in either of these two grading shall be blended
with selected fines to produce the desired percentages.
Care shall be taken to restrict the finer grading to the optimum. Otherwise the mix
would require additional water which may cause excessive shrinkage and loss of
strength
5.3 Pump-ability of mixes generally improves with decrease in fineness modulus

values. Fineness modulus values between 2.40 and 3.00 are generally
satisfactory. However, fineness modulus values above, without control on the finer
grade may not produce satisfactory results. Limits given in Para 5.2 above should
therefore be kept in view while establishing fineness modulus of the fine aggregates
5.4 It shall also be ensured that fineness modulus does not vary by more than 0.20
from the average value adopted in proportioning, to maintain uniformity of concrete.
6. WATER AND SLUMP
6.1 Water requirements and slump control for pump-able normal weight concrete
mixes are interrelated and extremely important considerations.
6.2 Mixing water requirements vary for different maximum sizes of aggregates as well
as for slumps. ACI - 211.1-77 table 5.3.3 gives guidelines for mixing water
requirements for both non-air-entrained and air- entrained concrete. It is
however emphasized that these values are only approximate and may require
modifications due to:
the amount and/or fineness of fine aggregates

quantity or amount of admixtures or additives
cement replacements
other materials being used in concrete
6.3 Experience indicates that slump below 50 mm are impractical for pumping jobs
and slumps above 150 mm shall be avoided to prevent segregation of
aggregates. Over-wet concrete will also exhibit excessive bleeding, and increase
shrinkage. It is much more important to obtain a truly plastic" mix through proper
proportioning than to try to overcome deficiencies by adding more water.
7. CEMENT
7.1 Determination of cement content in a pump mix shall follow the same basic
principle used for conventionally placed concrete.
7.2 The exact cement requirement and water - cement ratio shall be established from:
strength requirements
exposure conditions
minimum cement factor.
Because of the slightly higher ranges of slump and ratios of fines to coarse
aggregate, pump - mixes may require an increase in the amount of cement above
those used in conventionally placed concrete.
7.3 In establishing the cement content it is necessary to over-strength the concrete

proportioning for laboratory testing to provide for field variations which produce
lower strength.
33
However, use of extra quantities of cement as the only solution to rectify pumping
difficulties shall not be practiced. It is far more essential to control and rectify
deficiencies in aggregate proportioning. Well graded coarse and fine aggregates
properly combined will give rise to cement factors for pump mixes which will
closely resemble cement for conventionally placed concrete.
8. ADMIXTURES
8.1 Any admixture that increases workability of concrete will usually improve pump-
ability. However, use of any admixtures shall be made only with the approval of
Engineer-in-Charge.
8.2 Admixtures generally used to increase pump-ability are:
Water reducing
Air entraining
finely divided minerals
8.3 Air entraining admixtures materially alter the properties of both fresh and
hardened concrete. Air entrained concrete is considerably more plastic and
workable, can be pumped with less coarse- aggregate segregation and there is a
lesser tendency of the concrete to bleed. However, to maintain durability within
specified limits, air content in an air entrained mix shall not be more than 3% by
volume.
9. TESTING FOR PUMP-ABILITY
9.1 There is no recognized laboratory apparatus or a precise piece of equipment

available to test the pump-ability of a concrete mix in the laboratory.
Therefore, no mix shall be accepted on a pumping job unless an actual test under
field conditions has been successfully tried.
9.2 Testing a mix for pump-ability shall involve a duplication of anticipated job
conditions from beginning to end, including batching, truck mixing, similar pumps
and pipe lines installed to deliver concrete at heights and distances as on actual
works. Guide lines for such mix proportions may however be obtained from
another job with similar conditions but shall in no case be accepted as adequate for
the job.
34
SECTION - III : CONCRETE
PART - I : MIXING AND READY-MIX CONCRETE
1. MIXING
1.1 Thorough mixing is essential for production of uniform concrete. Equipments and
methods used shall be capable of effectively mixing concrete materials to produce
uniform mixes of the lowest slump practical for the work.
2. CHARGING OF MIXTURE
2.1 Mixers both stationary and truck mounted shall be so charged that there is a pre-
blending of the ingredients as the stream flows into the mixer.
2.2 Water shall enter the mixer first, but must continue to flow while other ingredients are
entering the mixer. Water charging pipes shall be of proper design and of adequate
size so that water enters at a point well inside the mixer. Water charging shall be
complete within the first 25% of the mixing time.
2.3 Cement shall be charged along with other materials, but it shall be ensured that
cement enters the stream after approximately 10% of the aggregates is in the mixer.
When it is necessary to charge cement into truck mixers separately, additional
mixing time shall be allowed to obtain desired uniformity of mix.
2.4 Admixtures shall be charged to the mixer at the same time in the mixing sequence
for every batch. Liquid admixtures shall be charged with the water. Powdered
admixtures shall be ribboned into the mixer with other dry ingredients. When more
than one admixture is used, they shall be batched separately and they shall not be
premixed before entering the mixer.
3. MIXER PERFORMANCE
3.1 Mixer performance checks shall be made at regular intervals to ensure

uniformity of the concrete. Visual examination of the concrete shall be one of the
aids for maintaining and checking mixer performance.
3.2 Results of tests on air content, slump, unit weight of air free mortar shall be guide
lines on mixer performance.
4. MIXING TIME
4.1 Mixing time shall be measured from the time all ingredients are in the mixer.
4.2 Mixing time shall be established from mixer performance tests conducted at frequent
intervals throughout the period of the works. However, as an initial guide, mixer
manufacturers recommendation may be followed. Other guide line being: 1.33
mins. for 1 cum capacity of mixer and 0.33 min. for every additional 1 cum of
mixer capacity.
4.3 Mixer shall be designed to have audible indicators and combination interlocks which
prevent mixer discharge prior to completion of a preset mixing time. Mixer shall
also be designed to start and stop operation with full load.
5. RE-TEMPERING
35
5.1 Provided that design water - cement ratio is not exceeded, small increments of re-
tempering water may be added to mixed batches to obtain the desired slump.
5.2 Addition of water in excess of designed water - cement ratio to compensate for
slump loss resulting from delays in delivery or placing of concrete shall not be
permitted.
6. MIX TEMPERATURE
6.1 Batch to batch uniformity of concrete with regard to slump, water requirement and air
content is dependant on temperature of concrete. It shall therefore be ensured that
the maximum and minimum temperatures of concrete throughout all seasons of the
year do not vary beyond the limits given below:
o
Maximum : 38 C
o
Minimum : 5 C
6.2 Necessary measures shall be taken to lower or raise the temperature of water to
maintain the mixed concrete between the specified temperature limits.
7. DISCHARGING OF MIXER
7.1 Mixer shall be capable of and handled properly so that concrete of lowest desired
slump can be effectively discharged without causing segregation.
8. READY - MIX CONCRETE

8.1 READY - MIX CONCRETE MAY BE:-
mixed in a central plant and transported to the job in agitating or non-
agitating truck bodies.
Obtained by the approved RMC manufacturers.
8.2 In ready mix concrete, special attention shall be given to the addition of mixing
water quantity, which if incorrect, shall result in reduction of concrete quality.
8.3 Concrete consistency (slump) is also affected by:-

amount and rate of mixing
length of haul
time period for unloading
temperature conditions.
8.4 In cool weather, or short haul and with prompt delivery, concrete quality may
not be significantly affected. But with reverse conditions, quality of concrete may be
significantly affected.
Addition of water to compensate for slump loss shall not exceed that quantity
necessary to compensate for a maximum 25mm slump loss. However, by this
additional quantity of water, the design water cement ratio shall not be exceeded.
8.5 Loss in workability in warm weather shall be minimized by expediting delivery and
placement, and by controlling the concrete temperature.
8.6 If it becomes necessary to use retarders to prolong the time the concrete will
respond to vibrations after placement, prior approval shall be obtained from
Engineer-in-Charges for their use.
8.7 In hot weather conditions or delays in delivery/placement, use may be made of the
procedure of withholding some of the mixing water till the mixer arrives at the job
site. In such cases, after addition of the balance (with held) quantity of water,
an additional 30 revolutions of mixer at mixing speed shall be given to
adequately incorporate the additional water into the mix.
36
8.8 When loss of slump or workability cannot be controlled by measures stated above,
complete mixing shall be done at the jobsite using centrally dry batched ingredients.
9. SUPPLY AND PLACING OF READY-MIX CONCRETE
9.1 Responsibility of in-place quality of ready-mix concrete shall be shared by the

manufacturer/supplier of ready mix concrete and the placing contractor.
9.2 They shall work in close coordination. The placing crew shall be in direct
radio/telecommunication contact with the batch plant to ensure:-
Avoidance of delay in dispatching concrete from batch plant inform batching plant
delays in formwork, reinforcement work, handling or placing
9.3 The placement contractor shall give in writing his requirement of a particular batch of
concrete to the supplier. The contractor shall give copies of all such concrete order
forms to the Engineer-In-Charge for his records. He shall get his duplicate order
forms duly stamped and signed from the supplier/manufacturer.
9.4 The ready-mix concrete manufacturer/supplier shall, along with each batch of
concrete delivered to the placement contractor, give him a concrete delivery
ticket. The supplier shall give copies of all such delivery tickets to the Engineer-in-
Charge for his record and also shall get duplicate copies of all such delivery tickets
duly received and signed from the placement contractor.
9.5 Ready mixed concrete as supplied by the manufacturer and as placed by the
contractor shall in no way be different from the specifications of concrete given in
Section II of these specifications.
37
PART - 2 : TRANSPORTING READY MIX CONCRETE
1. GENERAL
Fresh concrete can be transported to the placement area by a variety of methods.

Common among them are:-
Mixer trucks
Stationary truck bodies with or without agitators
Buckets hauled by trucks
Conveyor belts
Hose or pipe line by pumping.
Each type of transportation has specific advantages and limitations depending on

the condition of use, mix, accessibility and location of placing.
2. TRANSPORTING BY MIXER TRUCKS
2.1 These are essentially revolving drums mounted on truck chassis. Truck mixers used
in the job shall be labeled permanently to indicate the manufactures specifications
for mixing like:-
Capacity of drum
Total number of drum revolutions required for complete mixing
Mixing speed
Maximum time limit before completion of discharge and after cement has
entered the drum.
Reduction in time period of discharge due to warm weather or other variables.
All above information shall only form guidelines for the manufacturer/producer of
concrete.
2.2 Fulfillment of the stipulated number of revolutions or elapsed time shall not be the
acceptable criterion. As long as the mixing water limit is not exceeded, and the
concrete has satisfactory plastic physical properties and is of satisfactory
consistency and homogeneity for satisfactory placement and consolidation and is
without initial set, the concrete shall be acceptable.
2.3 When the concrete is totally mixed in transporting trucks or in case of shrink-mix
concrete, volume of concrete being transported shall not exceed 63% of the rated
capacity of the drum. In case the concrete is totally mixed in the central
batching plant, the transporting truck may be loaded upto 80% of the rated
capacity of the drum. In this case the drum shall be rotated at charging speed
during loading and reduced to agitating speed after loading is complete.
2.4 When transporting concrete by truck mixers, delivery time shall be restricted to
1.50 hours from the time cement has entered the mixer to completion of
discharge.
3. TRANSPORTING BY AGITATING / NON-AGITATING TRUCKS
3.1 Transporting ready mix concrete by this method shall consist of truck chassis
mounted with open top bodies. The metal body shall be smooth and streamlined for
easy discharge. Discharge may be from the rear when the body is mechanically
tilted. Body of the truck shall have a provision of discharge gate. Mechanical
vibrators shall be installed at the discharge gate for control of discharge flow.
3.2 Agitators, if mounted, also aids in the discharging of concrete from the truck in
addition to keeping the concrete alive.
38
3.3 Water shall not be added to concrete in transport through this system.
3.4 Bodies of trucks shall be provided with protective covers during period of inclement
weather.
3.5 Delivery period, when adopting this system of transporting, concrete shall be
restricted to 30 minutes from the moment all ingredients including cement and
water enters in mixer to completion of discharge.
4. TRANSPORTING BY BUCKETS
4.1 This method of transportation is very common for transportation of centrally mixed
concrete. Buckets of suitable capacities may be filled with concrete which is totally
mixed in central plant and hauled to the jobsite. Buckets then may be conveyed to
the actual point of placement either with the help of crane/hoist or they may be
carted.
4.2 As in the case of open truck transportation, water shall not be added to concrete
transported in buckets. Concrete shall be protected from inclement weather by
necessary covering arrangements. Also, maximum delivery period for this system of
transportation from the time cement is introduced into the mixer to completion
of discharge shall not exceed 30 minutes.
5. CLEANING
5.1 Before loading concrete in either truck mixer, open bodied trucks or buckets, the
containers shall be thoroughly cleaned, washed and dried, so that there is no water
or moisture in the container which may affect the designed water content of the
concrete.
6. OTHER METHODS OF TRANSPORTATION
6.1 Transportation of concrete either by belt conveyors or by pumping is not envisaged

in this work and therefore not specified.
6.2 If however, producer/manufacturer/purchaser of ready mix concrete desires to

use such methods of transportation, they may do so provided their scheme
and complete specifications are submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for his
record and approval.
7. OBJECTIVE
7.1 Method of transportation used shall ensure:-

efficient delivery of concrete
no significant alteration of properties with regard to water cement ratio, slump,
air content and homogeneity.
7.2 All variables in transportation, considering type and accessibility of placement

locations, distance, time interval etc. shall be carefully studied before arriving at the
method used.
39
PART - 3 : PLACING CONCRETE IN POSITION
1. GENERAL
1.1. This section of specifications cover transfer of concrete from transporting vehicle
discharge point to actual placement locations.
1.2. This may be accomplished by any of the usual methods like:-

buckets, hoppers, manual or motor propelled buggies.
Placement by pumps
2. BASIC REQUIREMENTS
2.1. Basic requirements for placing equipment and methods, as for all other handling
equipments and methods shall be that the quality of concrete in terms of water-
cement ratio, slump, air content and homogeneity is not affected significantly.
Selection of all equipment and plant shall be based on their capability to handle
efficiently concrete of the most advantageous quantities that can be readily
consolidated in place with vibration. Equipments which require adjustments in
mix-proportions for placing of concrete shall not be used.
2.2. Sufficient placing capacity shall be arranged for so that concrete can be kept plastic
and free of cold joints while placing.
2.3. Concrete shall be laid in layers not exceeding 300 mm, thick. Inclined layers and
cold joints shall be avoided. For monolithic construction, each layer shall be placed
while the underlying layer is still responsive to vibrations and compactions. Shallow
layers permit knitting the layers together by proper vibration.
2.4. Concrete shall be deposited as near to the actual position of placement to

prevent segregation by lateral flow into place.
2.5. On sloping surfaces, concrete shall be placed on the lower end of the slope first and
progressing upwards, thereby increasing natural compaction.
2.6. High velocity discharge/dumping of concrete, causing segregation, shall not be

permitted.
2.7. Finished surfaces of placed concrete shall be protected by planned walkways and
the surface kept covered till these are strong enough to resist damage from traffic
to which these may be exposed.
3. PLACING EQUIPMENTS
3.1. Buckets: - Properly designed bottom dump buckets permits placement of concrete
at lowest practical slump values. Discharge gates for such buckets shall have a
clear opening size not less than one third of the interior horizontal area, nor less than
five times the maximum aggregate size. The bottom shall be sloping and the slopes
o
shall not be less than 60 to the horizontal. Discharge gates of the buckets shall be
such that the placement crew can open and close then at any stage of discharge
without any difficulties.
3.2. Discharge hoppers:- These shall have provisions of discharge similar to those of
the buckets mentioned in Para 3.1 above. These shall also have same side
slopes as for the buckets to prevent segregation during discharge.
3.3. Spilled concrete shall not be refilled into buckets/hoppers for reuse and these
shall be wasted.
40
3.4. Manual or motor propelled buggies - Rigid and smooth runways shall be laid if
concrete is intended to be carried to placement locations by these buggies. This is
essential to prevent segregation of concrete.
Recommended maximum delivery distance for power buggies shall be 120 meters
and for hand drawn buggies (wheel barrows) the recommended maximum delivery
distance shall be 60 meters.
SECTION - III: CONCRETE
PART - 4: PLACING CONCRETE BY PUMPING METHODS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Concrete conveyed by pressure through either rigid pipes or flexible hoses and
discharged directly into the desired area is termed as pumped concrete. The
method of conveying the concrete through pipe lines is dealt with in these
specifications.
1.2 Method of applying pressure to concrete is by pumps. Pumps to be used shall be

either of the two types as mentioned below:-
a) Piston type pumps
b) Squeeze pressure type pumps.
Compressed air pressure pumps shall not be used in the works.
2. PUMPING EQUIPMENTS
2.1 PISTON PUMPS
2.1.1 Piston pump to be used in the works shall consist of a receiving hopper
for mixed concrete, an inlet valve, an outlet valve, and the pump shall be
a twin - piston pump.
The two pistons shall be so arranged that one piston retracts when the
other is moving forward and pushing concrete into the pipe line to maintain
a reasonably steady flow of concrete single - piston pumps shall not be
acceptable.
Inlet and outlet valves shall be any one of the following types:-
rotating plug type

sliding plate type
guided plunger type
swing type
flapper type
or any combination of the above.
The pistons shall be mechanically driven using a crank or chain or

hydraulically driven using oil or water.
The receiving hopper shall have a minimum capacity of 1.0 cum and the
hopper shall be fitted with re-mixing rotating blades capable of maintaining
consistency and uniformity of concrete.
41
Primary power for pumps may be supplied by - gasoline, diesel, or electric

motors. The primary power unit and the pump unit may be truck, trailer or
skid mounted.
2.2 SQUEEZE PRESSURE PUMPS
2.2.1 Squeeze pressure pumps shall consist of a receiving hopper fitted with
remixing blades. Remixing blades shall be such that these can push the
concrete into the flexible hose connected at the bottom of the hopper.
The flexible hose shall pass through a metal drum around the inside
periphery of the drum and come out through the top part of the drum.
The drum shall be maintained under a very high degree of vacuum during
operation. The drum shall be so fitted with hydraulically operated metal
rollers, which when rotating, create a squeeze pressure on the flexible
hose carrying concrete and forces the concrete out into the pipe line.
2.3 EFFECTIVE RANGE AND DISCHARGE OF PUMPS
2.3.1 Effective range of pumps to be used in the work shall be decided by the
contractors after studying the site conditions. However, the minimum
horizontal range shall not be less than 150 meters and minimum vertical
range shall not be less than 50 meters.
2.3.2 Selection of pumps based on discharge capacity shall be decided by the

contractors after studying the requirements for the project. Discharge
capacity shall be worked out by the contractors and approval obtained from
the Engineer-in-Charge. As a guide line figure the contractors may assume
a discharge capacity of 15 cubic metre/hour/pump.
3. PIPE LINES
3.1 All concrete carrying pipe lines shall generally be rigid pipe lines. Flexible pipe
lines may only be used at bend - curves in lines or at discharge ends if required.
Placements of flexible units shall be done judiciously and connected to the pipe
lines only when it meets the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.2 RIGID LINE/HARD LINE/SLICK LINE
Such lines shall be made either of steel or plastic. Aluminium alloy pipes shall not
be used. Minimum pipe line diameter shall be 100 millimeters and shall have
normal maximum length of 3 metre in each section connected through couplers
3.3 FLEXIBLE PIPE LINE
Flexible lines shall be made out of rubber or spiral wound flexible metal or plastic.
The pipe shall again be such that they are in sections of 3 metre length each and
connected through couplers. These pipes shall be such that they are
interchangeable with rigid lines. While installing flexible units, care shall be taken
that there are no kinks in the pipe line, which is a normal tendency with these
pipes having diameters 100 mm and above.
4. COUPLERS
4.1 Couplers to be used for connecting pipeline sections (either hard or flexible) shall
have adequate strength to withstand stresses due to handling, misalignments,
poor support to pipe lines etc.
42
For horizontal runs of pipes and for vertical runs upto 30 metre height the couplers
shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 35 kg/cm square. Couplers used for rising
runs between 30 metre and 50 metre heights shall have a minimum pressure rating
of 50 kg/cm square. Couplers shall be designed to allow for replacement of any
pipe section without displacing other sections. These shall provide for the full
internal cross section with no constrictions or crevices which may disrupt the
smooth flow of concrete. For pipe lines of size 150 mm and above, double toggle
type coupler with a thick rubber gasket and secondary wedge-take-up is
recommended. Types of couplers that may be used shall be any of the following:-
grooved end couplers
one piece extended lever swing type couplers and
full flow oil line type couplers.
5. OTHER ACCESSORIES
5.1 Other accessories which shall be catered for are standards as under:
Rigid and flexible pipes of varying lengths
Curved sections of rigid pipes
Swivel joints and rotary distributors
Pin and gate valves to prevent back flow in pipe lines
Switch valves to direct the flow into another pipe line
Connection devices to fill forms from the bottom up.
Splints, rollers, and other devices for protection of conduit over rock,
concrete reinforcing steel and forms and to provide lifting and lashing points
in the pipe line.
Transitions for connecting different sizes of pipe sections.
Air vents for down-ward pumping.
Clean out equipment.
5.2 For concreting of columns, walls and scattered small placements,

recommendation is made for special cranes or power controlled booms carrying
pipe lines with a pendant type concrete delivery hose.
6. LUBRICATION OF PIPE LINE
6.1 Before pumping concrete into the pipe line, the line shall be lubricated with a
properly designed mortar/grout lubricant. This shall be ensured by starting
the pumping operation with a properly designed mortar, or with a batch of regular
concrete with the coarse aggregate omitted. The quantity of mortar required as
lubricant is dependant on the smoothness and cleanliness of the pipe line. As a
guide line, for a 100 mm diameter pipe line of 100 metre length, 0.08 cum to 0.10
cum of mortar should normally be adequate, but this shall not be taken as
specified, and the contractor shall establish his requirement.
The quantity of mortar that comes out of the delivery end of the pipe line shall not
be used in place of the concrete work. However, with approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge this mortar may be used as bedding mortar against
construction joints. The rest of the mortar shall be wasted. Lubrication shall be
maintained as long as the pumping of concrete continues
7. GUIDE LINES OF FIELD PRACTICE
7.1 Proper planning of concrete supply, pump locations, line layout, placing sequence
and the entire pumping operation will result in savings of time and expense.
7.2 The pump shall be placed as near the placement area as practicable. The
surrounding area of the pump shall be free of obstructions to allow for movement of
43
concrete delivery trucks. The surface must be strong enough to withstand the
loaded trucks operating on it. If the surface is a suspended slab, the truck route
shall be adequately supported in consultation with the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.3 Pipe-lines from the pump to the placing area shall be laid with minimum number of
bends. For large placement areas, alternate lines shall be installed for rapid
connection when required. A flexible pipe at the discharge end will permit
placing over a large area directly without re-handling of pipe lines. The
pipeline shall be firmly supported.
If more than one size of pipe must be used, the smaller diameter pipe shall be
placed at the pump end and the larger diameter at the discharge end.
7.4 When pumping downwards, an air release valve shall be provided at the middle
of the top bend to prevent vaccum or air buildup. Similarly, while pumping
upwards, a no-return valve shall be provided near the pump to prevent the reverse
flow of concrete during the fitting of cleans up equipments or when working on the
pump.
7.5 It is essential that direct radio / telecommunication be maintained between the

pump operator and the concrete placing crew. Good communication between the
pump operator and the batching-plant, is also essential. The placing rate shall
be estimated by the pump operator so that concrete can be ordered at an
appropriate delivery rate.
7.6 The pump shall be started for a check run and operated without concrete to ensure
that all moving parts are operating properly. Before placing concrete, the pump
shall be run with some grout/mortar for lubricating the line.
7.7 When concrete is received in the hopper, the pump shall be run slowly until the
lines are completely full and the concrete is steadily moving. A continuous pumping
must be ensured, because, if the pump is stopped, concrete in the line may be
difficult to move again.
7.8 When a delay occurs because of concrete delivery, or some form repair works or
for any other reason, the pump shall be slowed down to maintain some movement
of concrete in the pipe line. For longer delays, concrete in the receiving hopper
shall be made to last as long as possible by moving the concrete in the lines
occasionally with intermittent strokes of the pump. It is sometimes essential to run
a return line back to the pump so that concrete can be re-circulated during long
delays.
7.9 If after a long delay, concrete cannot be moved in the line, it may be necessary to
clean out the entire line. However, quite often only a small section of pipe line may
be plugged and require cleaning. The pump operator who knows such details as
the length of line, age of concrete in the line etc., should be depended upon to
aid in deciding the appropriate section to be cleaned.
7.10 When the form is nearly full, and there is enough concrete in the line to
complete the placement, the pump shall be stopped and a "go-devil" inserted at
the appropriate time so that concrete ahead of the go-devil is adequate for the
completion of the work. The go-devil shall be forced through the pipe line to clean
it out. Use of water pressure is a safer method. The go-devil shall be stopped
about a from the discharge end to ensure that water does not spill on the
placement area. If air pressure is used, extreme care shall be taken and the
pressure must be very carefully regulated. A trap shall be installed at the end of the
line to prevent the go-devil being ejected as a dangerous projectile. An air release
valve shall also be installed in the line to prevent air pressure build up.
44
7.11 It is essential to clean the line after concrete placing operation is complete.
Cleaning shall be done in the reverse direction from the form work end to the
pump-end where the concrete in the line can be dumped in a bucket.
After removal of all concrete, all pipe lines and other equipments shall be cleaned
thoroughly and made ready for the next use.
45
SECTION - III: CONCRETE
PART - 5: VIBRATING - COMPACTING AND CURING
1. COMPACTING CONCRETE
1.1 Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and fully worked around all the
reinforcements, around embodied fixtures and into corners of the formwork so as
not to leave any voids/air spaces.
1.2 Internal vibration when properly applied is the most effective method of
consolidating/compacting plastic concrete and is generally best suited for
normal construction.
1.3 Use of mechanical vibrators complying with relevant specifications shall be made
as under:-
Immersion type vibrators ( I.S. 2505 )

Screed board concrete vibrators ( I.S. 2506 )
Concrete vibrating tables ( I.S. 2514 )
Concrete Form vibrators ( I.S. 4656 )
1.4 Vibrators shall not be used for moving concrete laterally, and shall be inserted
into concrete vertically at close intervals.
1.5 The largest and most powerful vibrator that can be used effectively shall be
used to ensure that all concrete is adequately consolidated. Care shall be
taken to prevent over vibration resulting in segregation and bleeding.
1.6 A systematic and patterned vibration shall be used to ensure proper consolidation
of the full mass of concrete deposited.
1.7 Re-vibration of concrete may be done provided that the running vibrator sinks into
the concrete by its own weight. Till such time it is not too late for the
concrete to be benefited from re-vibration. However, re-vibration shall not be done
to concrete where initial set has taken place.
1.8 In unusually difficult and obstructed places supplemental form vibrators shall
be used. However, care shall be taken to avoid over vibration, causing
segregation, bleeding, and paste formation on the surface.
1.9 For unusually thin and repetitive pre-cast units, table vibrators shall be used for
compaction of concrete.
1.10 Use of vaccum dewatering processes and use of absorptive form liners have
shown successful results in preventing formation of air void holes in concrete.
Specialist agencies and technicians shall be employed when such processes are
proposed to be used.
1.11 Experienced and competent vibrator operators shall be used for compaction of
concrete.
1.12 Adequate number of stand by vibrators shall be kept ready while placement and
compaction of concrete is the progress.
2. CURING CONCRETE
46
2.1 Curing of concrete shall commence from the day of placing concrete and as
soon as the surface is finished, and shall continue for a minimum period of 10
days.
2.2 Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be continuously kept in state of damp or wet
condition throughout the period of curing specified.
2.2.1 Moist curing shall be done either by ponding (overlarge horizontal areas) or
by spraying of water at intervals so that the surface is never dry.
2.2.2 For vertical faces and soffits of slabs and beams, moist curing shall be
done either by spraying or sprinkling water at intervals directly on the
surfaces to keep them wet continuously, or, by covering the surfaces
with suitable absorbent membrane completely hugging the surfaces and
keeping the membrane wet.
3. When the relative humidity is less than 50% and the wind speed exceeds 4
metres per second, sheltering of concrete during casting and for a period of 24
hours after casting shall be provided.
Such sheltering shall be in the form of heavy duty polythene sheets forming an
enclosure for the area under operation keeping adequate headroom clearances
for concreting operations.
Similar protective cover to freshly laid concrete shall be provided during inclement
weather conditions, so that rain water does not come in contact with freshly laid
concrete for a period of 10 hours.
4. Cost of all works specified in this section including tools, plants, equipments and
accessories required to carry out the works shall be borne by the contractors.
47
PART - 6 :
SECTION - IV : SAMPLING AND TESTING
PART - I : MATERIALS
1. AGGREGATES
1.1 Supplier of aggregates shall furnish the following information before the material is
delivered to site :-
Precise location of source from whose the material is to be supplied.
Trade group of principal rock type as per table 1.1.1
Physical characteristics as per I.S. 383
Presence or reactive minerals.
Trade Groups Rocks to be Used as Concrete Aggregate:
Granite, Gabbros, Dolerite, Rhyolite,

Names of trade groups :
Basalt, Quartzite
1.2 All tests shall be conducted in accordance with I.S. 2386 (Part - I to VIII).
Change in quality of aggregates as per trade group name shall not be acceptable in
the work. Change in source of aggregates shall also not be acceptable under
normal circumstances, even if the aggregates belong to the same trade group.
Engineer-in-Charge may with his discretion allow a change in the source. But, in
that case, all tests mentioned in Para 1.2 above shall have to be repeated for the
aggregates from the changed source and the test results submitted to Engineer-in-
Charge for his approval before the delivery of material at site.
2. CEMENT
2.1 Supplier of cement shall furnish the following:
2.1.1 Certificate confirming that chemical composition and physical

characteristics are within the stipulated values for types of cement
supplied as per relevant codes.
2.1.2 Certificate confirming that the chloride content in the cement is not in
excess of 0.05 percent by mass of cement.
2.2 If during subsequent testing of cement supplied in lots any of the properties are
found to be outside the acceptable limits, the lot of cement shall be rejected.
2.3 Each 1000 bags or part thereof of cement, or each wagon load of cement shall
constitute one lot of cement for the purpose of conducting tests at site before
cement is accepted.
2.4 Samples for testing at site shall be taken at random from 2% of the total quantity
supplied in one lot. For cement supplied in bags, samples shall be drawn from
minimum of 5 bags and the 2% value shall be rounded off to the next higher
integer.
For bulk cement, sampling shall be done with the help of slotted sampler to be as
per I.S. 3535
48
2.5 Results of tests conducted on samples drawn as mentioned in Para 2.4,

shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for his approval. If in the opinion
of the Engineer-in-Charge, the test results are not within permissible limits, the lot
of cement from which samples have been obtained for testing shall stand
rejected and the material shall be removed from site.
2.6 Following tests shall be conducted at site on each lot of cement delivered:-
S. No. Mandatory Tests No. of Tests per lot
1
Consistency of standard cement paste 5
2 Initial and final setting time 5 each
3 Compressive strength test 10
Mean values of the results from the above results shall be taken as the
representative value and the acceptance criteria shall be based on these tests. All
test procedures and computation of test results shall be as per I.S. 4031.
2.7 Apart from mandatory tests specified in Para 2.6 above, the Engineer-in-Charge
may at his discretion, call for any additional tests that he may consider
necessary. All such tests shall be done on representative samples taken from
each lot described Para 2.4 and testing and computation of test results shall be
done as per I.S. 4031.
3. WATER
3.1 Water to be used in manufacturing and casting of concrete shall be supplied

by the Dept.
ADMIXTURES
3.2 Suppliers of Admixtures for concrete shall supply the following before any
admixture is approved by the Engineer-in-Charge for their use:-
Certificate confirming that the use of a particular brand of admixture shall not
be harmful to concrete in any way.
Certificate confirming the exact dosage of admixture of a particular brand.
Certificate stating the specific purpose for which the admixture is to be

used.
Special precautionary measures to be taken in the manufacture of

concrete when using the particular brand of admixture.
Certificate confirming that the admixture conforms to specifications of I.S.

9103 or to ASTM - C 260, ASTM - C 10, ASTM - C 141, ASTM - C 595
or to ASTM - C 618.
3.3 Engineer-in-Charge at his discretion may require tests to be performed to reconfirm

the characteristics properties of any admixture. All such tests shall be done in
49
SECTION - IV : SAMPLING AND TESTING FOR QUALITY CONTROL
PART - 2 : CONCRETE
1. FRESH CONCRETE
1.1 Fresh concrete shall be tested for :-

Slump
Compacting Factor/Workability
Consistency
Weight per cubic metre, cement factor and air content
1.2 SLUMP
1.2.1 For concrete totally mixed in a central plant, slump shall be

checked at :-
Immediately during loading of trucks
Point of discharge from the delivery truck
Final placement location
At placement location the slump measured shall conform to the

design slump. Manufacturer of concrete shall adjust for loss of
slump in transit and establish the requirements of design mix. All
slump measurements shall be done within a period of 20 minutes
from the time cement is added to the mixer. Placement
contractor shall transport concrete from truck discharge point to
actual placement location within 10 minutes of delivery, before the
final slump reading is taken at placement location
1.2.2 For concrete entirely mixed in transit or for shrink mix concrete,
slump readings shall be taken at :-
a) Point of discharge from delivery trucks

b) Final placement location
In this case also, the slump measured at the final placement location
shall conform to the design slump. The placement contractor shall
be responsible for transporting concrete from delivery truck
discharge point to final placement location within 10 minutes.
However, in this case, the truck shall discharge the concrete within
1 hour and 30 minutes from the time cement is added in the mixer
and slump measured at point of discharge immediately on
delivery. Manufacturer of concrete shall ensure that the final slump
measurement corresponds to the ordered slump.
1.2.3 For measuring concrete slump at point of discharge from delivery

trucks, samples shall be taken from concrete omitting the first and
the last 15% of the load. For concrete delivered or placed by
pumping, sampling shall be similar to those specified for delivery
trucks
1.2.4 Slump measurement of ready mix concrete transported by buckets

shall be at locations specified in Para 1.1.1.1 with same limits on
time. Sampling from buckets mix concrete shall be such that the
buckets containing discharge from mixer for the first and last 15%
are omitted.
1.2.5 At placement location, samples for checking slump shall be collected

from every 20 cum of concrete or part thereof placed at location
for each type of concrete.
50
1.2.6 For all slump checks in the field at least two recordings shall be
made and the average value taken as the recorded slump.
1.2.7 Slump checks for concrete in the laboratory shall be carried out as
and when required by the manufacturer of concrete during the mix
design stage and during the progress of work for control on field
results.
1.2.8 Slump readings shall only be a guideline for concrete consistency

and shall not be taken as the acceptability criteria for concrete
placed at location. All slump tests shall be carried out in
1.3 COMPACTING FACTOR
1.3.1 For concrete whose ordered slump is 50 mm or less, compacting

factor test shall be conducted at both field and central batch plant in
addition to slump tests mentioned in Para 1.2
1.3.2 Compacting factor check shall be done in field only at placement

location, and shall also be conducted at central batch plant if
concrete is totally mixed in plant.
1.3.3 For this test sampling shall be done as for slump measurements
infield and within the same time frame as for slump test.
1.3.4 Only one compaction factor test shall be conducted for every 20
cum of concrete or part thereof placed at location for each type of
concrete. Since the test is sensitive, every care shall be taken to
conduct this test totally in compliance with procedure mentioned in
I.S. 1199.
1.3.5 Laboratory tests for determining compacting factor of concrete shall

be done as per manufacturer's requirement for establishing
and controlling the design mix of concrete.
1.3.6 Compacting factor test shall not be taken as an acceptance

criteria and shall be treated only as a guide line to workability of
concrete.
1.4 CONSISTENCY OF CONCRETE
This test shall be performed only at the batching plant laboratory using a Vee-
Bee Consistometer, for determining and predicting the slump of concrete.
Number and frequency of these tests shall be based on requirements of the
manufacturer of concrete. Care shall be taken in producing mix design of
required characteristic strengths of concrete within limits of Vee-Bee - Degrees
between 1.6 and 4.5 for concrete transported and placed by normal methods
and between 0.8 and 3.5 for concrete transported and placed by pumping
methods.
1.5 WEIGHT, CEMENT FACTOR AND AIR CONTENT TEST
i. Freshly mixed concrete for every type shall be tested in the batch plant
laboratory for each batch of concrete produced to determine weight per
51
cubic metre of freshly mixed concrete, cement factor in concrete and the
air content of the concrete. Frequency and number of tests shall be
finalized by the manufacturer of concrete in consultation with the
Construction Manager for his requirement on the mode of measurement
of concrete produced.
1.6 The Engineer-in-Charge may at his discretion require further tests over and above
those specified above in Para 1.1 to be conducted on fresh concrete. The
manufacturer and the placement contractor shall have to comply with all such
requirements.
2. HARDENED CONCRETE
2.1 For quality control a strict check on the strength of concrete shall be maintained
along with other field requirements such as workability, consistency, slump
etc., mentioned in Para 1.1 above.
2.2 Acceptability criteria as specified in IS 516 shall alone be followed strictly.
2.3 Tests on cube crushing strength of concrete in accordance and compliance with
I.S. 456 and I.S. 516 shall be done as under:-
2.3.1 Samples of fresh concrete shall be taken from concrete at central batch
plant mixer while loading delivery trucks or other transport and also
from concrete transported to placement location.
2.3.2 Test on specimens made from samples collected at placement

location shall be considered as field test specimens and results there from
shall be the criterion of concrete strength. Test on specimens made from
samples at the batch plant shall only be taken as guide lines tests. Only in
the case of doubtful results, the Engineer-in-Charge may refer to such
guide line results for deciding on the quality of concrete.
2.3.3 For truck mix concrete and shrink mix concrete guide line test
specimens shall be made from samples collected at discharge
location from mixing trucks. For this purpose first and last 15% of the load
shall be omitted while collecting samples.
2.3.4 Frequency of sampling shall be as given in table 2.3.4.1 for each

grade of concrete of different work-abilities and for each type of
specimens (field test specimens and guide line test specimens) for
conducting 28 day crushing strength tests.
TABLE 2.3.4.1
Quantity of Concrete No. of Samples

Delivered (Cum )
52
Less than 5 1
6 to 15 2
16 to 30 3
31 to 50 4
4 Plus one additional sample for

51 and above each additional15 Cum or part
thereof
Each sample shall be of adequate quantity so that a minimum of 3

specimen cubes can be made test of the sample in accordance with I.S.
516.
2.3.5 All test specimens shall be made compacted cured and tested in
compliance with I.S. 516, and the test results interpreted in accordance
with I.S. 456. for acceptance of concrete strength, field specimens test
results shall not be less than values given in Table 2.5.1 of Section - II,
Part - I.
2.3.6 In addition to 28 day crushing strength test on specimens made at

frequencies specified in Para 2.3.4 above, early strength tests at 7 days
shall also be conducted on field specimens as well as guide line test
specimens. Frequency of sampling for this set of tests shall also be same
as those specified in Table 2.3.4.1 above. 7 day strengths shall conform
to values given in Table 2.6.1 of Section - II, Part - I. But these test
results even if conforming to specified values shall only be taken as guide
line values for projecting concrete strength and shall not be
construed as conforming to specifications.
2.3.7 For each grade of concrete and for all workability conditions with
different water - cement ratios and compositions of admixtures,
Preliminary tests shall be conducted for crushing strengths on
finalization for design mix for each type of concrete. Such tests shall be
conducted both at 7 days and 28 days under laboratory
conditions. Six test specimens shall be made for 7 day test and six test
specimens shall be made of 28 day test.
Average of the six tests results of different periods shall not be less than
those specified in Table 2.7.1 of Section - II, Part - I.
2.3.8 Crushing strengths on cubes shall also be conducted during the process
of finalizing concrete design mix. Frequency and number of such tests
shall be as per requirements of concrete manufacturer
2.3.9 All test specimens for conducting crushing strength shall be properly
labeled for identification indicating:-
- date of making specimen

- grade of concrete
- Placement location exact
- Purchasers order number
2.3.10 In addition to crushing strength test on concrete, the Engineer-In-Charge

may call for other tests on hardened concrete. The placement contractor
and the manufacturer of concrete shall comply with all such instructions.
2.3.11
53
2.4 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTS
2.4.1 When the 28 day crushing strength values on field specimens and/or
specimens made for guide line tests fall short of specified values, or in
case of doubtful placement of concrete, the Engineer-in-Charge shall call
for non - destruction tests on the structure. Such tests may be any one or
a combination of the following:-
Rebound hammer test
Windsor Penetration Probe test
Pulse velocity (Sonic or Ultrasonic) tests
Core test
Load test
2.4.2 Interpretation of rebound hammer, Windsor Probe and Pulse velocity

test results shall rest with the Engineer-in-Charge.
2.4.3 Core tests, if ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge, shall be done in

accordance with I.S. 516. Samples for such test shall be taken from
locations to be identified by the Engineer-in-Charge and such
samples shall be collected in compliance with I.S. 1199.
2.4.4 If felt necessary, the Engineer-in-Charge may instruct load testing for
any part of the structure based on doubtful concrete strengths. Such tests
shall be carried out as per details to be provided by the Engineer-in-Charge
in consultation with the structural consultants.
3. The concrete manufacturer/concrete placement contractor shall arrange for all

tests to be conducted in accordance with these specifications, including all
necessary tools, plants, equipments and material, and shall be responsible for
conducting all tests at his cost.
4. All tests conducted at the field laboratory shall be carried out by qualified
technicians employed by contractor, in presence of authorized representative
of the Engineer-in-Charge. All test reports and observation reports shall be jointly
signed by the Engineer-in-Charge authorized representative and the technician
conducting such tests.
5. Engineer-in-Charge shall alone decide where such tests are to be conducted. He

may instruct tests to be conducted at laboratories other than the field laboratory
and such instructions shall be followed without claiming any extra charges on this
account.
6. The Contractor shall set up a laboratory at his own expense which shall have
facilities for conducting all necessary field tests on materials and field and
laboratory tests on concrete. The laboratory shall be staffed by the Contractor with
qualified and experienced scientists and technicians.
54
CHAPTER : 5 FORM WORK
1. GENERAL
1.1 This section covers the requirements of formwork for placing green concrete in
moulds for the purpose of casting concrete to desired shapes and sizes and
includes all works of providing and fabricating such forms, erecting them in position,
including all activities of scaffolding, bracing, shoring, strutting, wedging, jacking,
fixing etc. complete and then removing all such temporary work subsequent to the
concrete attaining the desired strength in maturity.
1.2 All such work shall be carried out in conformity with the guidelines and stipulations
laid down in the latest versions of the BIS Codes and Standards mentioned herein
:-
IS-2750: Steel Scaffoldings

IS -4014: (Parts 1&2) : Code of practice for Steel tubular scaffolding
IS-3696: (Parts 1&2) : Safety Codes for Scaffolds & Ladders.
IS-4990: Plywood for concrete shuttering work
IS-6461: (Part 5) : Glossary of terms related to formwork
IS-10421: Proforma for analysis of unit rates for formwork
IS-1200 : (Part 5) : Method of measurement of formwork
IS-14687: Guide lines for false work for concrete structure
2. MATERIALS
2.1 Material for shuttering shall be such that it can resist damage to form work faces to
be in contact with concrete, due to normal conditions of erecting forms, fixing of
steel reinforcements and placing of concrete. Formed surfaces shall be reasonably
smooth and shall be free of undulations and warps.
2.2 Form work may be made out of any of the commonly used materials like:-
Plywood
Timber
Steel Plates
Pre-cast concrete
Any other suitable material
Selection of the material to be used for a particular work shall be based on the
desired surface finish of de-shuttered concrete.
Prior to mobilizing material for form work, the Contractor shall obtain a clearance
from the Engineer in Charge, on the material he propose to use for a particular
work
2.3 For the same work, combination of different types of materials shall not be used,
unless such use is specifically approved by the Engineer in Charge in writing.
55
PART II FABRICATION, ERECTION & REMOVAL OF FORM
1. FABRICATION
1.1 Forms shall be used wherever necessary, to confine the green concrete to the
required sizes, shapes, lines and levels as shown on drawings.
1.1.1 Dimensions of form shall be within the tolerance limits given in Table III/1.
These tolerances apply to the finished concrete dimensions and not to the
placement of reinforcements, dowels or inserts.
TABLE III/1
Concrte Member Dviation dimension (mm)
Footings Plan dimensions (+) 50 ; (-) 12
Footing thickness (+) 0.05 times of thickness

Columns
Beams (+) 12 ; (-) 6
Slab thickness (+)5;(-) Nil
Eccentricity of footings:
2% of lateral dimension, up to a limit of 25 for footings of size less than or
equal to 1500; and up to a limit of 50 for footings of size larger than 1600.
1.2 Forms shall be capable of withstanding without deformation or distortion, the dead
weight of the concrete mass to be deposited on / against them, including the weight
of steel reinforcements. It should also be able to sustain the direct loads and
vibrations generated by concrete-placing and compacting equipment, loads and
forces generated by movement of men and material on the surface.
1.3 Joints in forms must be tight enough to prevent loss of slurry from the concrete. If
formwork is held together by bolts or wires, these shall be so fixed that any part of
the iron is not left exposed at the surface after concreting.
The Engineer in Charge at his sole discretion may allow the use of through - tie -
bolts for fixing formwork, depending on their location, and other complexities.
However, holes formed by such tie - bolts shall have to be plugged with material to
be specified by the Engineer in Charge, which should be suitable for the location.
The Contractor at his own expense shall do all such plugging work.
2. ERECTION
2.1 Forms must be made rigid by using bracings, ties, props and struts, such that there
is no sway or buckling of the system due to uneven loads or unforeseen lateral
loads.
2.2 Adequate number of jacks and wedges must be introduced into the system to
allow for proper adjustments of lines and levels.
2.3 All steel props used for formwork must have a base plate fixed to it. Size of the
base plates must be adequate to transmit loads from the props uniformly on the
high surface, such that the bearing pressure under the base plate is less than
4N/sq.mm.
56
Where props for the formwork rest on natural or fill-up ground, the bases of such
props shall be of adequate size so as to restrict the bearing pressure on soil
restricted to a safe limit for the purpose of avoiding settlements
2.4 Before placing of steel and concrete, surfaces of the form to be in contact with
concrete must be thoroughly cleaned.
The surface should be coated with an approved quality Oil-coating that will prevent
the form sticking to the concrete surface after drying. Machine-oil or lubricating oil
shall not be used for this purpose.
Consistency and quantity of oil used shall be very carefully controlled such that the
oil does not get smeared in the surface if reinforcing steel.
2.5 Immediately before placing concrete, the formwork must be carefully examined for
correctness of lines, levels, dimensions, placement of steel and the cleanliness of
the surface receiving the concrete
2.6 When plywood, timber or pre-cast concrete forms are used which absorb water, the
forming surface must be kept wet during the concreting operation to prevent loss of
water from the green concrete.
2.7 Formwork shall be fabricated and erected in such a fashion that removal / striking
of form does not cause damage to the as-cast concrete surface.
2.8 Before placing of reinforcements on the erected formwork, the total formwork
system as erected, must be got approved from the Engineer in Charge.
3. STRIKING OF FORMWORK
3.1 Forms from any part of structural components shall not be released until concrete in
that part of the structure has achieved strength of at least twice the stress to which
the part may be subjected to on release of the form.
3.2 While the provision of paragraph 3.1 above shall be the guiding factor for removal
of formwork, in normal circumstances where ambient temperature does not fall
0
below 15 C, and where Ordinary Portland cement is used and proper curing of
concrete has been done, the time periods given in Table-III/2, may deem to satisfy
the strength requirement given in paragraph 3.1.
57
TABLE III/2
Minimum period for Striking

Type and location of Formwork
Formwork after casting
Vertical faces of columns, walls

16 - 24 hours
Sides of slabs and beams
Soffit of slabs
3 days
(with immediate Re-propping after
removal of formwork)
Soffit of Beams
7 days
(with immediate Re-propping after
removal of formwork)
Props to slabs
Spans up to 4.5m 7 days
Spans over 4.5 mm 14 days
Props to beams and arches
Spans up to 6.0m 14 days
Spans over 6.0m 21 days
3.3 Where other types of cement only are used or, where the ambient temperature is
0
below 15 C, stripping time for formwork shall be as per guidelines to be given by
Engineer-In-charge.
3.4 Number of props to be left in position before concrete fully matures in strength, and
the strength requirement of such props shall be worked out by the contractor. This
should be based in the carrying capacity of such props and the full dead load of the
portion of the structure carried by each such prop. Consideration shall be given to
likely hood of any imposed load coming on the portion of the structure during curing
or additional construction activity.
3.5 Formwork shall be removed carefully so as to prevent damage to the cast concrete
surfaces. Only wooden wedges should be used where it is necessary to separate
the formwork from the concrete surface.
Formwork should be removed very gently so as to avoid any jarring effect on the
built structure.
3.6 Formwork should be removed in a properly planned sequence, such that the safety
and serviceability of the structure is not impaired, and the structure at any point is
not subjected to undue stresses.
3.7 Immediately after the forms are removed, these should be cleaned with a jet of
water and a soft brush, before these are reused.
3.8 Contractor shall not use any formwork material, which in the opinion of the
Engineer in Charge has worn out, or is otherwise damaged. Decision of the
Engineer in Charge in this regard is to be final and binding. The Contractor shall
58
remove form site any such material declared unfit by the Engineer in Charge for
use in formwork.
3.9 In any case, removal of formwork / scaffolding / bracings etc should be only with
written approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
59
PART III
SPECIAL FORMS
1. FORMWORK IN SLOPES
1.1 Where the slope of the forming surface is steeper than 4-Horizontal to 1-vertical
arrangements shall be made for casting by using double-form.
1.2 While the lower form should be fixed, the upper form should have arrangements for
quick installation and early removal. This shall be used as a stay for the green
concrete against sliding down the slope and to give the concrete the desired shape
and thickness.
1.3 The upper form shall be placed in position immediately before the concrete
placement operation is to start, and after the reinforcements and other fixtures,
inserts etc are secured in position, and checked.
1.4 The upper form should be removed as soon as the concrete is hard enough and will
not bulge out, or sag due to its own weight when the support is not there to prevent
such effects.
1.5 After removal of the upper form, the concrete surface shall be thoroughly inspected
for defects like bulging, surface cracking etc. These should be rectified as per
directions of the Engineer in Charge.
1.6 Depending on the size of the casting, the upper form can be made in segments.
After completing the pouring of one segment, the form for the next segment should
be installed, and pouring continued.
2. FORMWORK FOR CURVED SURFACES
2.1 Required curvature can be in one or both directions. In either case the forming
surface shall be smooth and be continuous between sections. Where necessary, to
meet the requirement of curvature, the forming lumber should be built out of
laminates properly cut to shapes and fixed to the forming boards.
2.2 After the form is constructed, all surface irregularities at matching faces of form-
material should be properly dressed to specified curvatures.
2.3 If the rise of the curvature so requires, use of double-form shall be made as
mentioned for sloping formwork.
3. FORMWORK FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES
3.1 Where it is desired, directed or shown on drawings to have original fair-face finish
of concrete surface, without any rendering or plastering, formwork shall be carried
out by using wood planks, plywood or plates of approved quality as per direction of
Engineer in Charge.
3.2 The contractor shall use only one type of material for such work. Forms shall be
constructed so as to produce a uniform and consistent texture and pattern on the
face of the concrete.
Patches in forms for these surfaces will not be permitted. Formwork shall be
placed so that all horizontal surfaces are continuous across the entire area. If such
formwork is constructed out of lumber and these are not paneled, then the form
shall be staggered.
60
3.3 To achieve a finish, which is free of board marks, the formwork should be faced
with plywood or equivalent material in large sheets. The sheets shall be arranged
in an approved pattern. Wherever possible joints between sheets shall be arranged
to coincide with architectural features like window heads, or change in direction of
the surface etc. All joint between panels shall be either vertical or horizontal or as
directed. Joints shall be arranged and fitted so that no blemish or mark is imparted
to the finished surfaces.
3.4 To achieve a finish which shall give the rough appearance of concrete cast against
sawn boards, formwork boards, unless otherwise stated shall have an average
width of 150mm, securely connected together with tongue and groove joints.
These boards shall be set horizontally, vertically or at an inclination shown in
drawings or as directed. All bolts shall be accurately aligned, and recessed by
5mm from the surrounding concrete surface.
3.5 For obtaining exposed fair face finished surfaces, the forming material shall be
used only 3 times in case of wood planks, 6 times for plywood boards and 10 times
for steel or aluminum plates, before these are replaced.
However, no form will be allowed for reuse if in the opinion of the Engineer in
charge the material is not fit to be reused irrespective of the number of use it has
been put to.
3.6 Exposed concrete surface shall not be rendered, or painted with cement or
otherwise. Plastering of defective concrete, as a means of achieving the required
finish shall not be permitted.
3.7 The Contractor shall take proper precautionary measures to prevent breaking and
chipping of corners and edges of completed work until the work is handed over to
the Owners.
61
CHAPTER : 6 REINFORCING STEEL
1. GENERAL
1.1 This section covers the requirements for providing fabricating, delivering and
placing in position and securing at location by binding or welding, of
reinforcements for in situ and pre-cast non-pre-stressed reinforced concrete work.
1.2 Reinforcements for concrete may be from any of the Grades" of steel indicated
below, conforming to the relevant Indian standards mentioned against each:-
GRADE DESCRIPTION CONFORMING TO
Fe 250 Mild Steel IS: 432 (Part I)

Fe 490 Hard drawn steel wire IS: 432 (Part II)
Fe 415 High strength Deformed/ Ribbed steel IS: 1786
1.3 Reinforcing steel may be any of the following types as in the item specification:-
Type - I : Plain Round Bars (PR)

Type - II : Welded Wire Fabrics (WWF)
Type - III : Cold Twisted Deformed Bars (CTD)
Type - IV : Thermo Mechanically Treated Ribbed Bars (TMT)
Thermo Mechanically Treated Ribbed Corrosion
Type - V :
Resistant bars (Copper Bearing) (TMT-CR)
Type VI : Corrosion resistant CTD bars (CTD CR)
1.4 Unless specifically shown in drawings or instructions issued in writing by the

Engineer-in-Charge, Steel of any Grade or Type other than those specified in
clauses 1.2 and 1.3 above shall not be used for the purpose of concrete
reinforcements.
1.5 Type and grade of steel to be used in a work shall be verified from the
Engineer-in-Charge which shall be conforming to relevant contract documents,
before procuring such steel.
1.6 All steel shall be procured only from original producers. Rerolled steel shall not be
procured for the purpose of using these as reinforcement in concrete work.
1.7 Every consignment of steel brought to the site of works for use in reinforced
concrete work, shall be accompanied by a certificate from the manufacturer
giving the following details:-
a) Process of Manufacture
b) Grade and Type of Steel
c) Chemical composition of steel
d) Identification mark on steel
e) Results of tests giving yield strength, ultimate strength
62
Tensile strength, Elongation percentage on gauge length of five times the

diameter of bar, bend and re-bend on minimum mandrel diameter, bond strength
values, corrosion test results and fatigue test results. All such certificates shall
be deposited with the Engineer-In-Charge for his record and reference
1.8 Steels of grade Fe 415, Fe 500 and Fe 550 may be of type III (CTD bars), or Type
IV TMT bars), or Type V (TMT-CR bars) or Type VI (CTD-CR) depending on the
process employed by the manufacturer. Depending on the process the chemical
composition of steel may vary from manufacturer to manufacturer. However, the
manufacturer shall give a guarantee that when combinations of different grades
and different types of steel are used in conjunction and are placed in contact, there
is no bimetallic action causing enhancement of the process of corrosion.
1.9 Some tests to reconfirm the mechanical properties of steel shall have to be
conducted on every consignment of steel received at site. Frequency of such tests
shall be as under:-
For every consignment of steel upto 100 tonnes or part there of:-
TESTS TO BE CONDUCTED NUMBER OF TESTS
1 No. for each size with

i) Tensile strength test
a min. of 2 tests

Bend test for:-
a min. of 3 tests.
Bars smaller than and including 20 mm dia.
ii)
Bars larger than 20 mm dia.
a min. of 5 tests.
Minimum 2 Nos.
iii) Elongation
iii) test from any two different sizes if applicable
choosing one size
Mass tolerance test from different sizes if Minimum 3 tests with

iv)
applicable one size
All such field tests shall be conducted at a laboratory to be decided by the

Engineer-in-Charge. Contractors shall be obliged to conduct all such tests and cost
of such tests have to be borne by the Contractors.
1.10 Steel brought to site shall be free from mill scales, rust, grease, oil, paint or any
other coatings which have deleterious effects on the performance. Bars and wires
shall be cleanly rolled and shall be free from all surface defects detrimental to its
use.
However, rust, seams, mill scales or minor surface irregularities shall not be the
cause for rejection. Such bars shall be properly cleaned and retested as directed
by the Engineer-in-Charge. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with relevant
Indian Standard specifications
1.11 Based on test results of field tests specified in clauses 1.9 and 1.10 above, the
Engineer-in-Charge will be the sole authority to accept or reject the consignment
of steel, and such decision shall not be influenced by the results of tests as per
manufacturer's certificate mentioned in clause 1.7 above.
1.12 For acceptability of steel, test results shall comply with the values given below:-
63
Sl. Steel Grade (Clause Fe Fe

Fe 490 Fe 500 Fe 550
No. 1.2) 250 415
Yield Strength/0.2% 250 490 415 500 550

1
Proof Stress (min)
Ultimate Tensile 410 580 485 550 585
2
Strength(min)
Elongation on guage 23% 10% 14.5% 14% 12%

3
length 5 dia
Mandrel dia for Bend test
4
(max)
For bars upto & including 2 Dia 2 Dia 3 Dia 4 Dia 5 Dia
a.
20 mm
b. 3 Dia 2 Dia 4Dia 5 Dia 6 Dia

For bars above 20 mm
Mandrel dia for Rebend

5
test (max)
For bars upto & including Not Applicable 5 Dia 5 Dia 5 Dia
a.
20 mm
For bars above 20 mm Not Applicable 5 Dia 5 Dia 5 Dia

b.
Tolerance on Nominal +2% +2% +2% +2% +2%

6
mass of 7.85 gms/cc
1.13 Steels of all grades and all types shall have maximum Carbon content of less than
0.25% by mass for guaranteed weld ability.
1.14 Steels of Type V of para 1.3 above shall have a minimum Copper content of
0.30% by mass.
1.15 Steel of Type II of para 1.3 above shall be manufactured in conformity with
provisions of I.S. 1566 and shall be certified by the manufacturer as such.
2. BINDING WIRES
2.1 Binding wire for steels of all grades and types shall normally be black
annealed steel wire conforming to 1.S.280.
2.2 When reinforcing bars are galvanized for corrosion protection, the binding wires to
be used in conjunction with such steel shall also be galvanized as per relevant
specifications given elsewhere.
2.3 Binding wires to be used in conjunction with fusion bonded epoxy-coated

reinforcing bars shall be plastic coated as per specifications given elsewhere.
2.4 Nominal size of binding wires shall be as under :-
a) For bars of all sizes : 20 Gauge
3. COVER BLOCKS
64
3.1 Cover blocks for reinforcements shall be made out of cement mortar. Crushing
strength of such cover blocks shall be one grade richer than the concrete in the
member where such cover blocks are to be used.
3.2 Cover to reinforcements may also be provided with reinforcing bars forming
'Chairs" for seating of bars. Such chairs shall be fabricated out of scrap-steel of
lengths which cannot be efficiently used as reinforcements. Unless specifically
shown on drawings or permitted by Engineer-In-Charge, Type V bars or bars
treated for corrosion resistance shall not be used for fabricating such "Chairs".
3.3 Cover blocks made out of Neoprene or High strength Plastic may be used subject
to written approval being obtained from the Engineer-in-Charge.
4. STORAGE OF STEEL.
4.1 Reinforcing steel shall be handled and stored in a manner such that bending and
distortion of the bars is avoided.
4.2 All reinforcing steel shall be stored horizontally above ground level on platforms
or other approved supports, clear of any running or standing water. Contact with
soil shall be avoided. Proper drainage and protection from elements shall be
provided.
4.3 Bars of different grades, types and sizes shall be stored separately.
4.4 Reinforcing bars treated with a corrosion resistant protective coating of any kind
shall be handled and stored with utmost care so as not to cause any damage to
the protective coating. Such bars shall be stored separately from others.
FABRICATION
4.5 Contractor shall prepare Bar bending schedules for all structural components based
on drawings issued for construction. Such schedules shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge for his approval. Fabrication of reinforcements shall be
commenced only on receiving approval on bar bending schedule from the
Engineer-in-Charge.
4.6 Reinforcement steel shall be carefully cut bent and formed to the dimensions and
configurations shown on drawings and bar bending schedules.
4.7 All cutting, bending, fixing, binding etc shall be done generally in accordance with
IS 2502 unless otherwise specified herein.
4.8 Bending dimension tolerances shall be as specified in IS 2502. However, cutting

tolerance for all sizes of bars and for all lengths shall be limited to +10mm.
4.9 All bars shall be bent cold using appropriate mandrel sizes. Dimensions of bends
and hooks shall be as indicated in schedules.
4.10 It shall be ensured that bars are not bent or straightened in any manner that will
injure the material. Any incorrectly bent bar shall be used only when the bends are
set right, provided that during straightening and rebending the bare is not damaged
in any way including formation of twisted necks.
4.11 No bar shall be bent or straightened when in position on the works without approval
of the Engineer-in-Charge, whether or not such bar is partially embedded in
hardened concrete.
65
4.12 Reinforcing steel having a reduced section, visible cracks, peels or any other
defects shall not be used for the purpose of reinforcing of concrete.
5. PLACEMENT
5.1 All reinforcements shall be placed accurately and secured in position as indicated
on drawings.
5.2 Tolerance on placing of reinforcements shall be as under:-
OVERALL THICKNESS OF
TOLERANCE IN SPACING OF BARS
MEMBER
Members of thickness 300mm or less 5mm
Members of thickness more than

10mm
300mm
Beams and column elements 2 mm
Tolerance to clear concrete cover dimensions shall be + one third the specified
cover or 5 mm whichever is less
5.3 Contractor shall provide approved type of supports to reinforcing bars for
maintaining the bars in position and to ensure required spacing and correct cover
as called for in the drawings. Pre-cast cement mortar cover blocks, chairs and
spacer bars shall be used as appropriate for this purpose. For fair faced concrete.
5.4 All intersections of reinforcements shall be securely tied with two strands of binding
wire as required, and twisted tight to make the skeleton or net work of steel a rigid
frame so that the bars do not get displaced during transportation, placement or
vibration of concrete.
Tack welding of reinforcements in place of binding with wire may be permitted by

the Engineer-in-Charge after ensuring the weldability of steel.
5.5 Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that during handling and
erecting of steel, no damage is done to the finished concrete.
5.6 Temporary walk ways and galleries shall be placed across reinforcements laid in
position for purpose of movement of men and material. Such walk ways and
galleries shall be independent of the reinforcements. No movements of men and
material shall be permitted on reinforcements laid and secured in position.
5.7 Without relieving the contractor of the responsibilities for the correctness of placing
of reinforcements in accordance with drawings, the reinforcements as placed and
secured in position shall be got inspected and approval obtained from the Engineer-
in-Charge in writing before any concrete is placed in the form. Contractor shall
allow for sufficient time to get the reinforcement work inspected and any
subsequent remedial measures to be carried out.
6. COVER TO REINFORCEMENTS
6.1 Unless shown on drawings or otherwise specified or instructed, minimum clear

concrete cover to reinforcements shall be maintained as per IS 456 for normal
structures, and as per IS 3370 for water retaining structures.
6.2 Care shall be taken to maintain the covers to tolerance limits specified earlier in
clause 5.2 above.
66
7. SPLICING
7.1 As far as practicable, bars of maximum available lengths shall be used. All bars
shall preferably be in single lengths. Where such arrangements are not possible,
bars shall be spliced together.
7.2 Splices may be lapped splices or welded splices. Unless specifically shown on
drawings or conveyed in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge, welded splice shall not
be provided.
7.3 Where welded splices are indicated on drawings or instructed by the Engineer-in-
Charge, such welding shall be provided as specified in clause 9.0.
7.4 Where details and specific locations of splicing are not shown on drawings, lap
splices shall be so provided that :-
7.4.1 At any section not more than 50% of total number of bars are spliced
together at any face of the member.
7.4.2 From the end of one splice to the beginning of the next splice in two
contiguous bars, there is a clear distance of 300mm or 12 times bar
diameter whichever is greater.
7.5 Lengths of such lap splices shall be as given in table 6.5.1 below:-
67
TABLE 6.5.1
SPLICE LENGTHS FOR GRADES OF CONCRETE IN

STEEL STEEL MULTIPLES OF NOMINAL BAR DIAMETER
GRADE TYPE
M-20 M-25 M-30 M-35 M-40
Fe 250 I 45 40 36 32 30
Fe 490 II 89 76 71 63 56
Fe 415 III/IV/V 47 40 38 33 30
Fe 500 III/IV/V 57 50 45 40 36
Fe 550 III/IV/V 62 53 50 44 40
7.6 Splice lengths given in Table 6.5.1 are for steels which do not have any coating on
the surface affecting its bond strength.
7.7 Irrespective of values obtained from Table 6.5.1, minimum splice length shall be
300mm.
7.8 When bars of two different diameters are spliced, the splice length shall be based
on the smaller of the two diameters, unless otherwise shown in the drawings.
8. WELDED SPLICE
8.1 Wherever specified on drawings or instructed by Engineer-in-Charge, welded laps

shall be provided and such welding shall be paid for separately unless specifically
included in the item of work described in bill of quantities.
8.2 Welding of reinforcements shall be done in accordance with:-
IS 2751 for mild steel bars of grade Fe 250

IS 9417 for type III (CTD bars) steel conforming to grades Fe 415,
Fe 500 and Fe 550.
For types IV and V (TMT and TMT CR bars) of grades Fe 415, Fe 500 and Fe 550 ,
welding procedures shall be confirmed from Manufacturer of such steel and shall
be strictly followed as recommended by manufacturer.
8.3 Size of weld, throat thickness, length of lap welds and details of butt welds shall all
be as per details shown in relevant drawings.
8.4 In all cases of welded splice, at least 2% of the welded connections made shall be
tested to ensure the joints are of full strength of the bars connected. Also 100% of
all such welds shall be subjected to radiographic tests to ensure proper welding.
Cost of all such tests to be conducted on welded joints shall have to be borne by
the contractor and all such tests shall be conducted at a laboratory to be identified
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.5 For manual metal arc welding and oxy-acetylene welding, only welders of proven
ability shall be employed and such welders shall have to pass qualifying tests as
stipulated in Appendix - C and Appendix D of IS 2751.
68
CHAPTER : 7 WATERPROOFING
1. GENERAL
Water proofing treatment shall be carried out to roof slabs/terrace levels and
sunken slabs as specified in the bill of quantities
GUARANTEE
A written guarantee shall be furnished by the contractor to certify that the water
proofing treatment done shall be free from defects of materials and workman ship
for a period of 10 years.
Leakage, failure to stay in place, cracking, undue expansion and contraction

shall be judged as defective work.
69
CHAPTER : 8 PRECAST CONCRETE BLOCKS
1. TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this standard, the following definition shall apply:
Block Density - The density calculated by dividing the mass of a block by the
overall volume including holes or cavities.
STONE SPALLS - Broken stone pieces of varying sizes obtained by breaking the
natural river boulders or quarry stones.
CONCRETE STONE MASONRY BLOCK - A pre-cast cement solid block having

stone splays in it (25 to 30 percent of block volume) and cement concrete with
dense stone aggregate and sand. It is 100% solid.
STONE FACE EXPOSED BLOCK - A concrete stone masonry block where the
stone spalls are exposed at one of its face. The face, when forms the exposed wall
face, the wall gets the texture of stone surface exposed.
2 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES
Concrete stone masonry block is a solid block and shall be referred to by its
nominal dimensions the term 'normal' means that the dimensions includes the
thickness of the mortar joint. Actual dimensions shall be 10mm short of the
nominal dimensions.
The nominal dimensions of concrete stone masonry block shall be as follows:

Length 400 mm Height 200 mm and Width 100, 150 and 200 mm
In addition, block shall be manufactured in one-third, half, two-third and three

quarters of its full length. The nominal dimensions of the units are so designed that
taking account of the thickness of mortar joints, they will produce wall lengths and
heights which will conform to the principles of modular coordination.
Blocks or other nominal dimensions may also be made if so directed by the

Engineer In-Charge
2.1 For accommodation vertical, reinforcement required in earthquake resistant

construction, special block of half width and with semi-circular recess in it shall be
used.
These dimensions are suitable for 200 mm thick wall. Similar blocks shall be
made for walls of thickness greater than 200 mm.
2.2 The maximum variation in the length of the units shall not be more than (+)/(-) 5mm
and maximum variation in height and width of units more than( +)/(-3) mm.
2.3 Subject to the tolerance specified in 10.7.3 the faces of blocks shall be flat and
rectangular, opposite faces shall be parallel, and all arises shall be square. The
bedding surfaces shall be at right angles to the faces of the blocks.
3. MATERIALS
70
3.1 CEMENT: Cement complying with any of the following Indian Standards may be used
at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge IS:269, 455, 1489, 6909,
8041,8043.
When cement conforming to IS:269 is used, replacement of cement by fly ash

conforming to IS: 3812 may be permitted up to a limit of 20%. However, it shall be
ensured that blending of fly ash with cement is as intimate as possible, at achieve
maximum uniformity.
3.2 STONE SPALLS
The stone spalls shall be of size ranging from 50 to 250mm in dimension The stone
spalls shall be hard, sound, round in shape, durable, free from decay and
weathering. These shall not be flaky. The Spalls shall have rough surface for better
bond with cement concrete. Good quality stone such as granite, sand stone and
basalt shall be used., Slate shale or any other soft and flaky stone shall not be
used. The spalls shall be obtained from approved quarry or by breaking river
boulder. Larger size shall be broken into the required sizes and shall be stacked
into two categories:
(a) 100mm and above and
(b) Below 100 mm.
3.3 AGGREGATES
The aggregates used in the manufacture of block shall be clean and free from all
deleterious matter, and shall conform to the requirements of IS:383.Maximum size
of the coarse aggregate shall be 10 mm. Sand used in the manufacture of blocks
shall be well graded, clean and free from deleterious mater, and shall conform to
the requirements of IS:383. Besides it shall have fine particles 15 to 20% passing
300 micron I.S. Sieve and 5 to 15% passing 150 micron I.S Sieve.
It is recommended that the fineness modules of the combined aggregate shall be

between 3.6 to 4.
3.4 MANUFACTURE
Blocks shall be factory made.
4.0 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENT
4.1 GENERAL
All blocks shall be sound and free from cracks or other defects which may
interfere with proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the
construction.
4.1.1 Where blocks are to be used in exposed wall construction, the face or faces that are
to be exposed shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections, expect that not more
than 5% of a consignment contains slight cracks or small chipping.
4.1.2 DIMENSIONS:
The overall dimensions of the blocks when measured as given in Appendix

A of 1S: 12440 shall be in accordance with 10.7.1 subject to the tolerance
mentioned therein.
71
4.1.3 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH:
The .minimum compressive strength at 28 days, being the average of eight

blocks and the minimum compressive strength at 28 days of individual
blocks, when tested in the manner described in Appendix B, of 1S:12440,
shall be as prescribed in Table 2.
TABLE 2
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE STONE MASONRY BLOCKS
DESIGNATION MINIMUM AVERAGE MINIMUM STRENGTH OF

COMPRESSIVE INDIVIDUAL BLOCKS N /
STRENGTH ON BLOCKS N MM2
/ MM2
5 5.0 3.5
6 6.0 4.2
7 7.0 5.0
9 9.0 6.3
10 10.0 7.5
For 100 mm wide blocks (for 100mm thick walls), the minimum strength may be 3.5
N/mm.
4.1.4 WATER ABSORPTION:
The water absorption being the average of three blocks, when determined
in the manner prescribed in Appendix C, of IS:12440 shall be not more than
6% by mass.
4.1.5 TESTS
4.1.5.1 Tests as described in Appendix IS:12440 shall be conducted on samples of blocks

selected according to the sampling procedure given in 7.1.5.2 to ensure conformity
with the physical requirements laid down in 7.
4.1.5.2 A sample of 15 blocks shall be taken from a lot of 5000 or part there of
manufactured under similar conditions of the same size and batch.
4.1.6 CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY
4.1.6.1 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of the specification if
the conditions mentioned in 7.1.6.1 to 7.1.6.3 are satisfied.
4.1.6.2 Number of blocks with dimension outside the tolerance limit and/or with visual
defects, among those inspected shall not be more than two.
4.1.6.3 For compressive strength, the mean value determined shall be greater than or
equal to the minimum limit specified in 7.1.3.
72
4.1.6.4 For water absorption the mean value determined shall be equal to or less than
maximum limit specified in 7.1.4.
4.2 LAYING
The laying of pre-cast concrete stone block masonry shall be as per Para 8.8.
5. SOLID CONCRETE BLOCK MASONARY
5.1 SOLID CONCRETE BLOCK
Shall conform to the requirements of IS:2185. Specification for hollow and solid
concrete blocks except with regard to the mix cement concrete and sizes of
aggregates which shall be as indicated. Hollow blocks shall be sound, free from
cracks, broken edges, honey combing and other defects that would interfere with
the proper placing of block or impair the strength of performance of construction.
5.2 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES
Concrete masonry building units shall be made in sizes and shapes to fit.
Different construction needs. They include stretcher, corner, double corner or pier,
jamb, header, bull nose, and partition block and concrete floor units.
Concrete Block-hollow (open or closed cavity) or solid shall be referred by its

nominal dimensions. The nominal dimensions of concrete block shall be, as follows:
Length: 400, 500 or 600 mm
Height: 200 or 100 mm
Width: 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250 or 300 mm.
In addition, block shall be manufactured in half lengths of 200, 250 or 300 mm to

corresponding to full lengths.
The maximum variation in the length of the units shall be not more than +/- 5 mm
and maximum variation in height and width of unit, not more than +/- 3 mm.
5.3 CLASSIFICATION :
5.3.1 HOLLOW (OPEN AND CLOSED CAVITY) CONCRETE BLOCKS
The hollow (Open and closed cavity) concrete blocks shall conform to the
following three grades:
(a) Grade 'A' - These are used as load bearing units and shall have a
minimum block density of 1500 kg/m3. These shall be manufactured for
minimum average compressive strength of 3.5, 4.5, 5.5 and 7.0 N/mm2
respectively at 28, days (See Table 3).
(b) Grade - 'B' - These are also used as load bearing units and shall have
a block density less than 1500 kg/m3 but not less than 1000 kg/m3. These
shall be manufactured for minimum average compressive strength of 2.0,
3.0, and 5.0 N/mm2 respectively at 28 days (See Table 3).
(c) Grade 'C' - These are used as non-load bearing units and shall have a
~ block density less than 1500 kg/m3but not less than 1000 kg/m3. These
shall be manufactured for minimum average compressive strength of 1.5
N/mm2 at 28 days (See Table 3).
(d) Grade 'D' - The solid concrete blocks are used as load bearing units
and shall have a block density not less than 1800 kg/m3. These shall be
manufactured for' minimum average compressive strength of 4.0 and 5.0
N/mm2 respectively (See Table 3)
73
5.4 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS :
5.4.1 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
The average crushing strength of eight blocks, when determined in accordance with
IS:2185 shall be not less. than as specified in table given below:
TABLE 3
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
TYPE GRADE DENSITY OF MINIMUM MINIMUM

BLOCK KG / AVERAGE STRENGTH
CUM COMPRESSIVE OF
STRENGTH OF INDIVIDUAL
UNITS N / MM2 UNITS
N/MM2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Hollow A ( 3.5 ) Not less than 3.5 2.8

(Open & A ( 4.5 ) 1500 4.5 3.6
closed cavity) A ( 5.5 ) 5.5 4.45
load bearing A ( 7.0 ) 7.0 5.6
Unit
B ( 2.0 ) Less than 1500 2.0 1.6
B ( 3.0 ) but not less 3.0 2.4
B ( 5.0 ) than 1000 5.0 4.0
Hollow ( open C ( 1.5 ) Less than 1500 1.5 1.2

& closed but not less
cavity ) non- than 1000
load bearing
Unit
Solid Load D ( 5.0 ) Not Less than 5.0 4.0

Bearing 1800
D ( 4.0 ) 4.0 3.2
5.4.2 DRYING SHRINKAGE
The drying shrinkage of the blocks (average of three blocks), when

unrestrained shall be determined in accordance with IS:2185 (shall not
exceed) 0.1 per cent
5.4.3 MOISTURE MOVEMENT
The moisture movement (average of three blocks), when determined in the

manner described in IS:2185 shall not exceed 0.09 percent
5.4.4 WATER ABSORPTION
The water absorption (average of three blocks), when determined in the

manner described in IS:2185 shall be not more than 10 per cent by mass.
74
5.4.5 Face shells and webs shall increase in thickness from the bottom to the top of the unit
depending upon the core moulds used, the face shells and webs shall be flared and
tapered or straight tapered, the former providing a wider surface for mortar. The
thickness of the face shell and web shell be not less than the values given in Table
below.
TABLE 4
MINIMUM FACE SHELL AND WEB THICKNESS
NOMINAL FACE SHELL THICKNESS OF TOTAL WEB

BLOCK WIDTH THICKNESS, MM. WEB, MM. THICKNESS PER
COURSE IN
WALLING MM.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
100 or less 25 25 25
Over 100 to 150 25 25 30
Over 150 to 200 30 25 30
Over 200 35 30 38
5.4.6 The dimensions said above are subject to the tolerance specified in 8.2.
5.4.7 The face of Masonry units shall be flat and rectangular, opposite face shall be parallel,
and all arises shall be square. The bedding surfaces shall be at right angles to the
faces of the blocks.
5.4.8 Blocks with special faces shall be manufactured and supplied as directed by the
Engineer -in-Charge.
5.5 CURING AND DRYING
The blocks shall be cured in an immersion tank or in a curing yard and shall be kept
continuously moist for at least 14 days. When the blocks are cured in an immersion
tank, the water of tank shall be changed at least voce in every four days.
After curing, the blocks shall be dried in shade before being used on the work. They
shall be stacked with voids horizontal to facilitate through passage of air. The
blocks shall be allowed to complete their initial shrinkage before they are laid in
wall.
5.6 CONSTRUCTION OF MASONRY
Solid concrete blocks shall be used in foundation courses, plinth, and basement
walls,superstructure including partition walls.
5.7 WETTING OF BLOCKS
Blocks need not be wetted before or during laying in the walls. In case the climate
condition so required the top and the sides of the blocks may only be slightly
75
moistened so as to prevent absorption of water from tile mortar and ensure the
development of the required bond with the mortar.
5.8 LAYING
Blocks shall be laid in mortar, as indicated and thoroughly bedded in mortar, spread
over the entire top surface of the previous course of blocks to a uniform layer of not
less than 10mm and not more than 12 mm in thickness.
All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints made truly
vertical. Blocks shall break joints with those above and below for not less than
quarter of their length. Pre-cast half-length closers (and not cut from full size
blocks) shall be used. For battered faces, bedding shall be at right angles to the
face unless otherwise directed. Care shall be taken during construction to see that
edges of blocks are not damaged.
5.9 PROVISIONS FOR DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES
A course of solid concrete block masonry shall be provided under door and window
openings (or a 10 cm thick pre-cast concrete sill block under windows). The solid
course shall extend for at least 20 cm beyond the opening on either side. For jambs
of very large doors and windows either solid units used, or the hollows shall b e
filled in with concrete of mix 1:3:6 using 12.5 mm nominal size aggregate.
5.10 PROVISIONS FOR ROOF

The top of the course immediately below the roof slab shall be finished smooth with
a layer of cement and coarse sand mortar 1:3, 10mm thick and covered with a thick
coat of white wash or crude oil, to ensure free movement of slab.
5.11 INTERSECTING WALLS

When two walls meet or intersect and the courses are to be laid up at the same
time, a true masonry bond between at least 50% of the units of the intersection is
necessary. When such intersecting walls are laid up separately, pockets' with
20mm maximum vertical spacing shall be built in the first wall laid. The
corresponding course of the second wall shall be built into these pockets.
5.12 Where possible fixtures, fittings etc. shall be built into the masonry in cement and
coarse sand mortar 1:3 while laying the blocks. Hold fasts shall be built into the
joints of the masonry during the laying.
Holes, chases, sleeves, opening, etc. of the required size and shape shall be
formed in the masonry with special blocks while laying, for fixing pipes, service
lines, passage of water etc. After service lines pipes etc. are fixed, voids left, if any,
shall be filled up with cement concrete 1:3:6 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand: 6 stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and neatly finished.
5.13 FINISHES
Rendering shall not be done to the walls when walls are wet. Joints for plastering or
pointing as specified shall be raked to a depth of 12 mm.
Joints on internal faces, unless otherwise indicated, shall be raked for plastering. If
internal face of masonry are not to be plastered the joints shall be finished flush as
the work proceeds or pointed flush where so indicated.
76
CHAPTER : 12 WOOD WORK
WOOD WORK IN JOINERY
1. TIMBER
1.1 The timber shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets of
streaks on the exposed edges, splits and cracks. All timber shall be of natural
growth and uniform in color texture and shall be well and properly seasoned. It shall
be free from large loose dead or cluster knots, waves, discoloration, soft or sponge
spots. Hollow pockets, pitch or center heart and all other defects and blemishes.
The timber shall be graded as first grade (class I) and second grad (second class~
on the basis of permissible defects in the timber as given in Appendix "A" at the end
of this chapter.
Timber shall either be obtained in cut sizes or shall be cut to required sizes well in
advance of the commencement of fabrication and stacked at site of work in a
suitable manner for further seasoning.
1.2 SEASONING OF TIMBER AND MOISTURE CONTENT
The seasoning of timber shall be as laid down in L.S No. 1141. The process of
drying timber under controlled conditions is called seasoning of timber. The timber
shall be either air seasoned or kiln seasoned. The seasoning of timber shall be
judged from the moisture content as laid down in IS No. 287 control on moisture
content of timber is necessary to ensure its proper utility in various climatic
conditions. The maximum permissible moisture content in timber shall not exceed
12%. No individual hard and sound knot shall be more than 25mm diameter and
aggregate area of all the knots shall not exceed 1% of the area of piece. There
shall not be less than 2 growth rings per cm of width.
1.3 DEFECTS IN TIMBER
a.) Timber with loose grains, splits, heart or sitar shakes, springs and cups,
wanes, compression wood in coniferous timber, heart wood, rot, sap rot,
warps and holes made by powder pest beetles and pitch pockets shall be
eliminated.
b.) Sap wood shall not be more than 15% of area of the section in case of first
class timber, in other classes of timbers sap wood shall not be permitted
unless the timber is thoroughly impregnated with approved wood
preservatives.
c.) Knots shall not exceed one per meter length of any member and the maximum
diameter of individual knots shall not exceed the figures given below for
various widths of face.
WIDTH OF FACES MAXIMUM DIAMETER OF KNOT
77
Up to 75mm 15mm
Exceeding 75 mm Not Exceeding 25mm

150mm
Exceeding 150mm Not Exceeding 40mm

250mm
Exceeding 250 mm 50mm
Note: The diameter of a knot shall be the maximum distance between two
points farthest apart on the periphery of a round knot on the face of which it
becomes visible. In the case of a spike or a splay knot it shall be the maximum
width of the knot visible.
In structural members knots shakes and checks shall not be permitted in regions of
maximum stress intensities not shall they be permitted at locations where joints are
to be provided.
1.4 FIRST AND SECOND CLASS TIMBER
In first class wood the individual hard and sound knot shall not be more than 25mm
in diameter and the aggregate area of all the knots shall not exceed one percent of
the area of the piece.
1.5 SECOND CLASS WOOD
In second class wood the individual hard and sound knots shall not be more than
40mm in diameter and aggregate of all the knots shall not exceed one and half
percent of the area of the piece. Wood shall be generally free from sap wood, but
traces of sap wood shall be allowed.
1.6 PRESERVATION OF TIMBER
Preventive treatment does not improve basic properties of timber but gives varying
degree of protection against deterioration due to attacks by fungi,
termites, borers and marine organisms. Preservative treatment where specified
shall be done using oil type, organic solvent type or water soluble type preservative.
Oil type preservative shall be used if the timber is not required to be polished or
painted. Before preservative treatment, the timber shall be sawn and seasoned. All
surfaces exposed after treatment except due to planning shall be thoroughly
brushed with the preservation before jointing. Preservative treatment of timber shall
be done as per IS 401 in a plant approved by Engineer-in- charge.
2. PLY WOOD BOARDS
Ply wood boards are formed by gluing and pressing three or more layers of veneers
with the grains of adjacent veneers running at right angles to each other. The
veneers shall be sufficiently smooth to permit an even spread of glue. The
thickness of veneers shall be uniform. With a tolerance of +/ - 5%. Corresponding
78
veneers on either side of center one shall be of some thickness and species. The
requirements of Veneers and core veneer shall be as follows.
a) In 3 ply boards up to 5 mm thick the combined thickness of the face veneers

shall not exceed twice the thickness of center ply.
b) In multiply boards, the thickness of any veneer shall not be more than
thrice the thickness of any other veneer.
c) The sum of the thickness of the veneers in one direction shall approximate to
the sum of the thickness of the veneers at right angle to them and shall not be
greater than 1.5 times this sum except for 3 ply as specified in (a).The boards are
available in thickness 3 to 25 mm. Tolerance in thickness shall be + / - 10%. For
boards upto and including 5 mm + / - 7% for boards from 6 to 9 mm and + / - 5%
for boards above 9mm thickness. The boards shall be of uniform thickness and
surface of boards shall be sanded to a smooth finish. Number of ply in ply woods
board shall be as below.
THICKNESS IN MM NUMBER OF PLY
3,4,5,6, 3
5,6,8,9, 5
9,12,15,16 7
12,15,16,19, 9
19,22,25, 11
The moisture content of ply boards shall not be less than 5 percent and not more
than 15 percent.
One sample for every 100 sqm or part thereof shall be taken for testing. Testing
may not be required if the total requirement is less than 308 Sqm. Unless otherwise
stated only BWP grade plywood boards shall be used.
3. BLOCK BOARDS
3.1 Block board shall have solid core made up of uniform strip of wood each not
exceeding 25mm in width, laid separately or spot glued or otherwise joined to form
a slab which is glued between two or more outer veneers. With the direction of the
grain of the core block running at right angles to that of the adjacent venners. In
anyone block board, the core strips shall be of one species of timber only. Block
board shall be Grade I (Exterior grade) as per IS 1659. The adhesive used shall be
BWP type synthetic resin confirming-to IS 848. The block boards are available in
thickness ranging from 12 to 50 mm tolerance in the thickness shall be + / - 5% for
boards upto and including 25mm thick and + /- 2.5% for boards above 25 mm
thickness each boards shall be of uniform thickness. One sample for every 100
sqm or part there of shall be taken for testing. Testing may not be required if the
total requirement is less than 30 Sqm. unless otherwise stated grade I (exterior
grade) block board bonded with BWP grade shall be used.
4. SHEET GLASS
79
Sheet glass shall be flat, transparent ,and clear as judged by the unaided eye. It
may however possess a slight tint when viewed edgewise. Sheet glass shall be of
selected quality (SQ) or ordinary Quality (OQ) confirming to IS 2835 as stipulated.
The glass shall be free from cracks. Unless otherwise specified ordinary quality
sheet glass shall be used. The nominal thickness, range of thickness and weight of
glass shall be as below.
NORMAL RANGE OF THICKNESS WEIGHT IN KG / SQM

THICKNESS IN MM IN MM
3 2.8 - 3.2 7.5
4 3.8 - 4.2 10
4.8 4.6 - 5.1 11.9
5.5 5.2 - 5.8 13.5
6.3 6.0 - 6.6 15.5
Tolerance for cut size glass (length and width) shall be + / - 2mm. Up to panel area
of 0.5 Sqm glass of 4mm nominal thickness may be used for bigger panels the
thickness shall be as specified.
5. WORKMANSHIP
5.1 SHUTTERS FOR DOORS
The shutters of flush doors shall be factory made exterior grade from approved
manufacturer and conforming to IS No. 2202 thickness specified in the schedule of
quantities and shall have solid core with finishes as described under relevant items
and with internal teakwood lipping on all edges 25mm minimum depth as per IS
1659 glued under pressure. In the case of double shutter door, the depth of the
lipping at the meeting of the styles shall not be less than 30mm and meeting of the
styles shall be rebated 20 mm. The rebating shall be of either splayed or square
type The shutters shall be obtained from the approved manufacture. Samples for
shutters shall be submitted free of cost for conducting tests as per IS specification
No. 2202 and 2191 and the approval of Engineer -in- charge before bulk delivery is
affected. The shutters shall be of single leaf' or double leaves as described in the
schedule of quantities. The adhesive for the manufacture of Flush doors shall be
phenol formaldehyde resin. All necessary rebates, recesses, holes etc if any for
fixtures or otherwise shall also be provided and the visible surface finished with the
finish specified in the relevant items of schedule of quantities.
5.2 VISION PANEL
Where specified or shown in the drawings, opening for glazing shall be

provided. The opening shall be as specified in drawing opening of vision panel shall
be lipped internally with solid teakwood as per details in drawing.
80
5.3 FINISH
The frames, shutters, mullions, beading, etc shall be smooth finished with
sandpapering.
All wood work shall be treated with a coat of approved wood primer. The wood work
coming in contact with the masonry shall be painted with one protective coat of
painting as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. No extra will be paid for this painting.
5.4 BUILDERS HARDWARE
5.5 Builders hardware like fittings, locks and fixtures to be fixed on doors, windows,
ventilators, wardrobes etc.shall as specified in appendix A & Drawings . The
contractor shall provide all incidentals required for fixing these without extra cost.
Builders hardware shall be fixed in a workman like manner as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
5.6 GLASIER'S WORK
Glass sheets should be of best quality of thickness and type specified in the
schedule. In measuring thickness of glass panes a tolerance of + / - 0.2mm can be
allowed as indicated at 4.1. These shall be free from flaws, specks or bubbles. All
glasses shall be cut to fit the rebate of the sashes or other members as required. All
glasses shall be properly bedded, puttied and fixed with wooden/metal beading to
the frames and finished in a workman like manner generally as indicated in
drawings and or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The corner of beadings
shall be beveled at 45 to have photo frame finish.
CHAPTER : 13 STEEL WORK
1. MATERIALS
1.1 STEEL
Finished steel shall be well and cleanly rolled to the dimensions and weight subject
to permissible tolerances as per IS:1852. Finished material shall be free from
cracks, surface flaws, laminations, imperfect and rough edges and any other
defects. They shall be free from rust, scaling and putting and shall be well
protected. For structural purpose following varieties of steel only should be used
unless otherwise specified.
81
( a ) ST 42-S conforming to IS:226: For all types of structures (riveted or bolted)

including those subjected to dynamic loading and where fatigue, wide fluctuation of
stresses, reversal of stresses are involved like in crane gantry girders, road and rail
bridges etc. It is suitable for welding only if the thickness of the materials does not
exceed 20 mrn.
(b) S.T. 42-W conforming to IS 2062: This is fusion welding quality steel
Used for structures like crane gantry girders, road and rail bridges etc.
(c) S.T. 42-0 conforming to IS 1977: This is ordinary quality steel which shall be
used only for structures not subjected to dynamic loading, where welding is not
employed, structures not situated in earth quake zones and structures the design of
which has not been based on plastic theory.
(d) S.T.. 32-0 conforming to IS 1977: This is ordinary quality steel which shall be
used only for doors, window frames, window bars, grills, steel gates, hand railing,
builders hardware, fencing posts, tie bars etc.
(e) All structural steel work shall conform to code of practice for use of structural
steel in general building construction IS:800.
(f) All structural steel and electrodes shall comply in all respects with Indian
Standard Specification for structural steel.
2. PAINTING
Surfaces to be painted, oiled or otherwise treated shall be dry and thoroughly

cleaned to remove all loose scales and loose rust.
Inaccessible surfaces after shop assembly shall receive full specified protective
treatment before assembly except sealed hollow sections. The part of steel
member to be encased in concrete shall not be painted or oiled. Prior to placing any
steel member in position or taken out of workshop a priming coat of approved steel
primer Le., Red oxide zinc chromate primer conforming to IS:2074 should be
applied.
3. WORKMANSHIP
All workmanship shall be of acceptable standard in every respect, and accuracy

should be ensured so that all parts will fit together properly on erection.
All ends shall be cut true to planes. They must fit the abutting surfaces closely.
All stiffeners shall bear tightly at both ends.
All butt ends of compression members / shall be in close contact throughout the
area of the joint.
All holes in plates and sections between 12.7 mm and 19 mm thick shall be
punched to such a diameter that 3.18 mm of metal is left all around the hole to be
cleaned out to correct size by reamer.
The base connection shall be provided as shown in drawings and accurate

workmanship shall be ensured to provide the connections.
Figured dimensions on the drawings shall be taken.
82
4. ERECTION
(a) All the plants and equipments used for erection should be of adequate capacity
and contractor has to furnish details of same to Engineer In-Charge well before the
programmed date for erection and get his clearance approval.
(b) During erection, the work shall be securely braced and fastened temporarily to
provide safety against all erection stresses etc. No permanent welding shall be
done until proper alignment has been obtained.
(c) Any parts which do not fit accurately or which are not in accordance with the
drawings and specifications shall be liable to rejection and if rejected shall at once
be made good.
(d) Engineer-in-Charge shall have full liberty at all reasonable times to enter the
contractor's premises for the purpose of inspecting the work and no work shall be
taken down, painted or dispatched until it has been inspected and passed. The
contractor shall supply free of charge all labour and tools required for testing of
work.
The contractor shall ensure that each welding operator employed on fabrication or
erection is an efficient and dependable welder, who has passed qualifying, tests on
the types of welds.
5. FIXING PROCEDURE
MASONRY OPENINGS
(a) Fixing with lugs:
(i) Doors, windows and ventilators unit, shall not be 'built' in as the work proceeds
but opening shall be left around. The size of the opening shall first be checked and
cleared of obstruction, if any.
The position of the unit of fixing holes shall be marked on the jamb. Necessary
holes shall. be made in the masonry and lugs not less than 10cm long 15 x 3 mm
size fixed in cement concrete blocks 15 x 10 x 10 cm size of 1:3:6 mix (1 cement :3
coarse sand :6 graded , stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size).
The frames of units shall be set in the openings by using wooden wedges at the
jamb, head and sill, (wedges shall preferably be placed near the points where a
glazing bar meets the frames) and be plumbed in position.
(ii) Then it lugs shall be fixed with the frame with 20 mm long and 7.3 mm dia G.!.
Counter sunk machine screws and nuts. In case of flush opening which are
rendered smooth wedges shall be removed and gap between unit and the jambs
shall be filled with approved filling material.
(iii) In case of flush jamb with external fair faced' finish the gap between the
opening and frame shall be filled with mastic from inside till it oozes out on external
face. The oozing mastic shall be cleaned and flush pointed. The internal gap shall
rd
be filled with mastic to about 1/ 3 depth and the rest with cement mortar.
(iv) In case of rebated jambs and jambs finished 'fair faced' externally the mastic
shall be freely applied to the inside channel of frame, jamb and sill, so as to ensure
a water tight joint. After the unit is firmly fixed in position surplus mastic shall be
cleaned and flush pointed.
83
(b) Fixing with screws and plugs
In RCC work where lugs cannot be embedded due to reinforcement bars etc.
wooden plugs shall be fixed in RCC at proper position while laying concrete.
Alternatively rawl plugs may be fixed in proper position and frames fixed to them
with 60 mm galvanized wood screws. Alternatively approved anchore fastener may
be used.
84
CHAPTER : 14 FLOORING
1. INDIAN PATENT STONE FLOORING
i) PREPARATION OF BASE
The base concrete surface shall be thoroughly 'cleaned to remove laitance, loose
particles and dust and washed clean and watered until no more water is absorbed.
Where the IPS flooring is laid directly on the RCC slab, the surface of RCC slab
shall be roughened with brushes without disturbing the concrete. Before laying the
floor, the laitance shall be removed, the surface of slab hacked and a coat of
cement slurry at 2.75 Kg of cement per sqm shall be applied, so as to get good
bond between RCG slab and IPS floor. The cost of applying a coat of cement slurry
shall be included in the flooring items.
Dividing strips as specified shall be arranged to lay the concrete flooring in alternate
panels. The size of panels shall be decided by the Engineer -in- charge, shall be
uniform in size, not exceeding 3 sqm in area and 2.5m in any direction. Alternate
panels shall be laid on different days.
ii) MIXING
The concrete shall be of mix of one part cement, two parts of sand and four parts of
well-graded stone aggregate of 20mm maximum size. The ingredients shall be
thoroughly mixed with just sufficient water to obtain the required plastic city and
shall generally conform to the specification of general concrete works.
iii) LAYING
A coat of cement slurry of the consistency of thick cream shall be brushed on the
surface. On this fresh grouted base, the prepared concrete shall be laid
immediately after mixing. The concrete shall be spread evenly and leveled
carefully. When the layer is made even, the surface shall be compacted by
ramming or beating and then screened to a uniform line and level.
iv) The finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the cessation of
beating. The surface shall be left for some time, till moisture disappears from it.
Excessive trowelling shall be avoided.
Use of dry cement and sand mixture sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the concrete
or absorb excessive moisture, shall not be permitted.
Fresh quantity of cement at 27.50 Kg per 10 Sqm of flooring, shall be mixed with
water to form a thick slurry and spread over the surface, while the concrete is still
green. The cement slurry shall be properly pressed twice by means of iron floats,
once, when the slurry is applied, and the second time when cement starts setting.
The junctions of floors with wall plaster, dado or skirting~ shall be rounded off
where so required up to 25mm radius. Alternate panels only shall be concreted in
one day and the remaining panel shall be concreted on next day or later. The joints
between panels should come out as fine straight lines.
Flooring shall be laid in the pattern as given in the drawing or as directed .by
Engineer-in-Charge.
v) FORM WORK
85
The panel shall be bounded by wood battens or flat iron having the same depth as
the concrete floor, these shall be fixed in position, with their top at proper level,
giv1ngslope where required. The surface of the battens of flats to come in contact
with concrete; shall be smeared with soap solution or non-straining oil (form oil or
raw linseed oil) before concreting. The flooring shall but against the masonry of
wall, which shall not be plastered.
v) CURING
As soon as the surface is hard enough it shall be covered and kept continuously
wet for at least a period of one week.
vi) PRECAUTIONS
Flooring in toilets and bathroom shall be laid only after fixing of water closet and
floor traps. Traps shall be plugged while laying the floors and opened after floors
are cured and cleaned. To facilitate rounding of junction of skirting, dado and floor,
the skirting / dado shall be laid along with the boarder or adjacent panels of floor.
2. VITRIFIED TILE FLOORING / DADO
The tiles shall be of specified size and thickness. The tiles shall not be subjected to
polish weathering, discoloring, color and, shade variation. The technical
specifications of the tiles viz, dimensional stability, surface flatness, water
absorption, hardness, flexural strength, abrasion resistance, skid resistance,
breaking strength, density, frost, chemical, color, thermal shock, stain resistance,
thermal expansion, moisture expansion etc shall all conform to manufacturers
specification.
The bed / backing for floor laying shall be finished and kept ready including curing
at least two weeks prior to laying. For fixing tile fixing adhesive or cement mortar
may be adopted as specified. When using cement mortar the proportion ratio may
be 1:4 (1 cement to 4 coarse sand) The mortar shall be of consistent paste. Once
mixing is over water should not be added to the mortar. The mortar may be spread
for an area of one square meter at a time of specified thickness. Apply a fine slurry
to the back of the tile to ensure proper and full bedding press gently for even
adherence. Iron hammer or heavy material should not be used for pressing the tiles
The floor tiles shall be laid from center to side duly marking to ensure that cut
pieces if any shall be on the outer edge towards the wall. The laid surface shall be
allowed one or two days for bed curing unless otherwise specified joints shall be
grouted with the joint sealant as per manufacturers specification to keep the grout
free of dust. 15 minutes after finishing the grouting process, wipe off. Excess grout
with damp sponge and polish surface with soft and dry cloth for a clean surface. For
cleaning the surface Hydrofluoric acid and its derivatives should not be used.
All materials and workmanship shall be strictly as per manufacturers specification.
3. MIRROR POLISHED GRANITE STONE FLOORING
Factory polished granite slabs shall be adopted.
a) DRESSING OF SLABS
86
Every stone shall be cut to the required size and shape, fine chisel dressed on all
sides to the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the tone shall be
fully in contact with it. The top surface shall also be fine chisel dressed to remove
all waviness. The sides and top surface of slabs shall be machine rubbed or table
rubbed with coarse sand before paving. All angles and edges of the marble slabs
shall be true, square and free from chip pages and the surface shall be true and
plane.
The thickness of the slabs shall be 20, 30 or 40 mm as specified in the description

of the item. Tolerance of :t2mm shall be allowed for the thickness. In respect of
length and breadth of slabs, a tolerance of + / - 5mm shall be allowed.
b) LAYING
Sub-grade concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be
cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the slabs shall be with cement
mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) as given in the description of the item.
Unless otherwise specified the average thickness of the bedding mortar under the
slab shall be 20mm and the thickness at any place under the slab not be less than
12 mm
Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slab, roughly to
the average thickness specification/specified in the item. The slab shall be washed
clean before laying, It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped with wooden mallet and
brought to level with the adjoining slabs, It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top
surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollow. The
mortar is allowed to harden a bit and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall
be spread over the same at the rate of 4.4 kg of cement per sqm. The edges of the
slab already paved shall be buttered with grey or white cement with or without
admixture of pigment to match the shade of the marble slabs as given in the
description of the item. The' slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in
position an trapped / tapped with wooden mallet till is properly bedded in level with
and close to the adjoining slab with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequently slabs
shall be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on
the surface of the slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a
minimum period of seven days. The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to
levels and slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in- charge.
The slabs shall be matched as shown in drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-

in-charge.
Slabs which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 12mm
under the plaster skirting or dado. The junction between wall plaster and floor shall
be finished-neatly and without waviness.
c) FINISHING
Slight unevenness at the meeting edges of slab shall then be removed by fine
chiseling.
d) CURING
The work shall be kept constantly moist on all the faces for a period of at least 7
days.
a) PROTECTION
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. The work shall also
be protected from damage during construction.
Steps and treads of stairs paved with granite stone slabs shall also be measured
under the item of "GRANITE STONE SLAB Flooring". Extra shall, however, be paid
87
for such areas where the width of treads does not exceed 30 cm. Nosing for treads
shall be measured in running metres and paid for extra. The width of tread in all
cases shall be measured from the outer line of nosing to the finished face of riser.
3.1 GRANITE STONE SLAB IN RISER OF STEPS AND SKIRTING I DADO
PREPARATION OF SURFACE
Where necessary, the wall surface shall be cut uniformly to the requisite depth so
that the skirting face shall have the projection from the finished face of wall as
shown in drawings or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge.
LAYING
The risers of steps and skirting shall be set in grey or white cement admixed with or
without pigment to match the shade of the stone, as specified in the description of
the item, with the line of the slab at such a distance from the wall that the average
width of the gap shall be 12mm and at no place the width shall be less than 10mm,
if necessary the slabs shall be held in position by temporary MS hook.
For marble / granite flooring the sample of material of specified color shall be
submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge and should be got approved prior to prowling
the material. The newly laid floor shall be protected with a layer of gypsum / pop
laid over a polythene sheet covering entire surface and shall be maintained till
completion of all finishing work of the building. This shall be thoroughly removed
and flooring properly cleaned and polished just prior to handing over the building.
The specifications for laying shall be as described under marble flooring. Cement
slurry with or without pigment shall not be applied on the surface before polishing.
4. EPOXY FLOORING
DESCRIPTION :
Epoxy Sealer Coat LB is a two-part system having excellent adhesion to epoxy and
cementations surface and when cured forms a flexible glossy to semi gloss film. It
penetrates the surface to bind together the particles to produce a hard wearing
surface. This is used as a clear, epoxy sealing coat on epoxy or cementations
surface to provide a dust proof and easily cleaned floors with resistance to
penetration of oils and liquids.
AREAS OF APPLICATION :
This can be applied to seal the applied epoxy screeds over any type of epoxy
coating over any type of dry cementations surface.
FEATURES & BENEFITS :
Easy to mix and application

Easier cleaning of the floors
Reduced dusting of the floors
Increased resistance to staining from spillage of mild chemicals
Good resistance to abrasion
APPLICATION METHODOLOGY
88
SURFACE PREPARATION
Substrate must be clean and free from all contamination and in dry condition. All
loose material must be swept away remove all laitance by abrading or wire
brushing or by dry grinding. If any applied epoxy system has to be coated with
Sealer coat LB, then roughen the surface slightly using emery paper to ensure
good bonding.
MIXING
This is a two component system - Stir each component thoroughly, combine pre-
packed quantity of the component and mix with spark - proof electric equipment
until blend is of uniform clear transparent color.
APPLICATION
Apply the mixed material either by brush or roller. Reseal area after surface has
completely absorbed the first application. Avoid paddling and continues surface film
must be there. Two coats are normally recommended @ 150 gm/m2 per coat.
IMPORTANT RECOMMENDATIONS
Do not thin Sealer Coat at any point of time

Application at temperature below 10oC or above 40oC is not recommended
Toxic before cure
Flammable contains volatile solvents
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Color - Colorless to Light Amber

Pot Life - 45 -60 minutes at 30oC
Curing Rate - Over coating - 6 to 8 hrs
For pedestrian traffic - 24 hrs
Full cure - 7 days
Film thickness - 250 micron @ 300 gm/m2
Bond strength - 3.0 N/m2 with dry concrete (Concrete failure)
Shelf life - 12 months when stored in well sealed containers
STORAGE
Keep in cool dry place. Do not expose to direct sunlight.
PACKAGING
Available in 12 kgs packs.
SUBSTRATE :
Substrate should be VDF or concrete floor finished with power floater to provide
smooth surface.
PRIMING FOR OVERLAY:
Apply Ardex R3E, or equivalent, a solvent free epoxy primer using roller or brush
over the cured and dried surface. The primer coating should be applied evenly over
the surface to ensure a regular film thickness.
89
OVERLAY OF ARDEX R 25CE :
The mixed Ardex R 25CE or equivalent, self leveling epoxy polyurethane material
of approved shade should be applied to the prepared surface with out delay using a
trowel or depth set rake to achieve 3mm thickness. The surface should be gently
rolled with spiked roller in order to release any entrapped air from the mixed also to
blend out any trowel marks.
Note: Provide proper curing time prier to open for use, normally 24-36 hours. And
avoid heavy use etc for first week.
MEASUREMENT :
Measurement shall be made at the actual work done in sqm. No deductions shall
be made for projections / obstructions in the floor for application of Ardex Floor
System.
CHAPTER : 15 ROOFING
INTEGRAL CEMENT BASED WATER PROOFING TREATMENT WITH BRICK BAT COBA
Preparing the Surface

The surface of the slab should be roughened by scrapping when the slab concrete is still
green,however, the surface need not be hacked. In case the slab is already cast and surface
fairly finished, the same shall be cleaned neatly of all mortar droppings, loose materials etc with
brooms/cloth.
Providing and Laying of Slurry under Base Coat
90
The quantity of water required to prepare the slurry with 2.75 kg. of blended cement to be
painted over an area of 1 sqm. Depending upon the area of surface that has to be covered, the
required quantity of slurry should be prepared using 2.75 kg. blended cement + water per sqm.
area to be covered, taking particular care to see that only that much quantity of slurry shall be
prepared which can be used within half an hour of preparation i.e. before the initial setting time
of cement. The prepared slurry shall be applied over the dampened surface with brushes very
carefully, including the joints between the floor slab and the parapet wall, holes on the
surfaces, joints of pipes, masonry/concrete etc.
The application of the slurry should continue upto a height of 300 mm on the parapet wall and
also the groove as shown in Fig. 22.6. The slurry should also be applied upto a height of 150
mm over pipe projections etc.
Laying Base Coat 20 mm thick
Immediately after the application of slurry and when the application is still green, 20 mm thick
cementplaster as base coat with cement mortar 1:5 (1 blended cement : 5 coarse sand) shall
be evenly applied over the concrete surface taking particular care to see that all the corners
and joints are properly packed and the application of the base coat shall be continued upto a
height of 300 mm over the parapet wall.
Laying Brick Bat Coba
Brick bat of size 25 mm to 115 mm out of well burnt bricks shall be used for the purpose of
brick bat coba. The brick bats shall be properly dampened for six hours before laying.
Brick bats shall be laid to required slope/gradient over the base coat of mortar leaving 15-25
mm gap between two bats. Cement mortar 1:5 (1 blended cement: 5 coarse sand) shall be
poured over the brick bats and joints filled properly. Under no circumstances dry brick bats
should be laid over the base coat. The haunches/gola at the junction of parapet wall and the
roof shall be formed only with brick bat coba . In case the brick bat coba is laid on the base
coat immediately on initial set there will be no necessity of applying cement slurry over the
base coat before laying the brick bat coba. However, if the brick bat coba is to be laid on the
subsequent day, cement slurry shall be applied over the top surface of the base coat, then only
the brick bat coba shall be laid.
Application of Slurry over Brick Bat Coba
After two days of curing of brick bat coba cement slurry shall be applied on the surface of brick
bat coba The application of slurry should cover the haunches/gola, and the remaining small
portion of parapet wall and also inside the groove.
Laying Finishing Layer (Protective Coat)
Immediately on applying the cement slurry over the surface of the brick bat coba and when the
slurry applied is still green, the fibre glass cloth shall be spread evenly on the surface without
any kink & pressed to see that no air spaces exist. The fibre glass cloth shall be taken
up to a height of 300 mm on parapet walls & tucked in the groove specially prepared at that
height. 20mm thick layer of cement plaster, without leaving any joints shall be applied with
cement mortar 1:4 (1 blended cement: 4 coarse sand) over the entire fibre glass cloth including
the haunches/gola and the small portion on the parapet wall. The groove in the parapet wall
over the haunches shall also be filled neatly packing the mortar firmly in the groove.
91
The surface of the finishing layer (protective coat) shall be neatly finished with cement slurry.
The finished surface shall be allowed to dry for a while and then pattern
of 300 mm x 300 mm groove, 8 mm deep shall be made over the entire surface.
Curing and Testing the Treatment

The entire surface thus treated shall be flooded with water by making kiaries with weak cement
mortar, for a minimum period of two weeks.
Measurement
The measurement shall be taken along the finished surface of treatment including the rounded
andtapered portion at junction of parapet wall. Length and breadth shall be measured correct
to a cm andarea shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 sqm. No deduction in measurement shall
be made for openingsor recesses or chimney stacks, roof lights or khurras of area upto 0.40
sqm., nor anything extra shall bepaid for making such openings, recesses etc. For areas
exceeding 0.40 sqm., deduction will be made inthe measurements for the full openings and
nothing extra shall be paid for making such openings.
After testing the treated surface for 2 weeks one layer of hydraulically pressed clay tile of
size and thickness specified in schedula of works shall be laid over cement mortar bedding and
jointed with cment mortar mixed with water proofing compound.
KHURRAS
The khurras shall be constructed before the brick masonry work in parapet wall is taken up and
it shall be of size 45 cm x 45 cm unless otherwise specified in the description of the item and
shall be made of cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size) or other mix as stipulated in the description of the item.
Laying
A PVC sheet of size 1 m x 1 m x 400 micron (alternatively, aluminium foil of 32 SWG) shall be
laid under the khurra and then cement concrete shall be laid over it to average thickness of 50
mm with its top surface lower than the level of adjoining roof surface by not less than 50 mm.
The concrete shall be laid to a size greater than the stipulated size of the khurra in such a way
that the adjoining terracing shall overlap the concrete on its three edges by not less than 7.5
cm. Theconcrete will slope uniformly from the edges to the outlet, the slope being as much as
possible and in no case less than 20 mm cement concrete at the outlet. The concrete shall be
continued at the same slope through the width of the wall into the outlet opening to ensure a
water tight joint.
The khurras and the sides of the outlet shall then be rendered with 12 mm coat of cement
plaster 1:3 mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) or other mix as stipulated in the description of the
item. This shall be done when the concrete is still green and shall be finished. The sides of the
khurras and sides of the outlet opening shall be well rounded. The size of the finished outlet
opening shall be 10 cm wide and by 20 cm high or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
In cases where rain water is to be disposed off through rain water pipes, iron grating shall be
provided at the outlet as a safeguard against choking, if so directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Iron gratings, shall be of overall size 20 25 cm. with an outer frame of 15 3 mm M.S. flat to
which 4 Nos M.S. bars of 10 mm dia shall be welded in a vertical direction keeping equal clear
spacing of 2.5 cm. or as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
UNPLASTICISED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPES AND FITTINGS

UPVC Pipes
Pipes shall conform to Type A pipes of IS 13592. The internal and external surfaces of the
pipes shall be smooth and clean and free from groovings and other defects. The end shall be
clearly cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe. The end may be chamfered on the
plain sides. Slight shallow longitudinal grooves or irregularities in the wall thickness shall be
permissible provided the wall thickness remains within the permissible limit.
92
Colour of Pipe
Surface colour of the pipes shall be dark shade of grey or as specified .
Marking
Each pipe shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the following informations at intervals not
more than 3 meter.
(a) Manufacturers name or trade mark.
(b) Nominal outside dia of pipe.
(c) Type A
(d) Batch number.
Dimensions
Diameter and Wall Thickness: Mean outside diameter, outside diameter at any point and
wall thickness for type A manufactured plain or with socket shall be as given in Table- 1 of IS
13592. UPVC rain water pipes shall be of the dia, specified in the description of the item and
shall be in nominal lengths of 2,3,4 or 6 metres either plain or with sliding/grooved socket
unless shorter lengths are required at junctions with fittings. Tolerances on specified length
shall be + 10 mm and 0 mm.
Fixing and Jointing

Pipes shall be either fixed on face of wall or embedded in masonry as required in the
description of the item. Plain pipes shall be secured to the walls at all joints with PVC Pipes
clips by means of 50 x 50 x 50 mm hard wood plugs, screwed with M.S. screws of required
length i/c cutting brick work and fixing in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand ). The
clips shall be kept about 25 mm clear off finished face of wall,so as to facilitate cleaning of
pipes. Pipes shall be fixed perfectly vertical or to the lines as directed. The pipes shall be fitted
to fittings with seal ring conforming to IS 5382 allowing 10 mm gap for thermal expansion.
.
CHAPTER:16 FINISHING WORK
1. PLASTERING
The term plastering shall cover all types of rough or fair finished plastering
rendering, floating and setting coats screed etc in lime, cement lime or cement
mortar.
Dubbing out shall mean filling in hollows in the surface of wall and roughly leveling
up irregular or out of plumb surfaces prior to rendering.
Rendering shall mean the plastic coat which is applied following the dubbing out
where required or final coat in case of one coat work.
Floating coat shall mean the second coat used in a three coat work to bring the
rendering coat to a true and even surface before the setting coat is applied.
Setting coat shall mean final coat in a two or three coat work.
Thickness of plaster shall mean minimum thickness at any point on a surface. This
does not include thickness of dubbing out.
The term even and fair as referred to finishing of the final plastered surface shall
mean a surface finished with a wooden float.
93
The terms even and smooth as referred to finishing of the final plastered surface
shall mean a surface leveled with wooden float and subsequently finished with a
steel trowel.
The type and mix of mortar for plastering, the number of coats, the surface finish,
and the background which the plaster is to be applied shall be as indicated.
The mortar for dubbing out and rendering coat shall be of the same type and mix of
proposed plastering.
Ceiling plastering shall be completed before commencement of wall plastering in

any area.
1.1 MIX OF MORTAR
The mix of mortar shall be as indicated.
a) PREPARATION OF SURFACES
The surfaces to be plastered shall be prepared in the following manner.
i) MASONRY
The joints in row work shall be raked out to a depth of not less than 10mm as the
work proceeds.
ii) CONCRETE SURFACES
For new work, surface shall be left sufficiently rough to provide adhesion. For old
work surface shall be roughened by hacking or bush hammering. All dust, loose
particles, laitance efflorescence, grease and oil and all such matters shall be
removed where so directed. In all cases mentioned above the surface before
plastering shall be thoroughly brushed down to remove dust, loose particles and
efflorescence if any and kept well wetted. Plastering shall not be commenced
unless preparatory work has been passed in writing by EIC.
b) APPLICATION OF PLASTER
Mortar shall be firmly applied in a little more than the required thickness and well
pressed into joints. Correct thickness of plaster shall be obtained by using wood
screed or laying plaster screeds at intervals of 1.5m. The dubbing out rendering
and floating coats shall be left rough or scored to provide key for the subsequent
coats of plaster and kept damp. In the case of one coat work or after the completion
of setting coat the final surface shall be kept wet at least seven days. In hot weather
surfaces exposed to sun shall be screened with wet matting or by other approved
means. Unless otherwise indicated the final surfaces of external plaster work shall
be finished rough and fair internal plaster shall be finished with even smooth.
Plastering shall be done from top to bottom and care shall be taken to avoid joints
in continuous surface. Partly set and dried mortar shall not be used.
a)
1.2 CEMENT PLASTEING FINISHED ROUGH FOR EXTERNAL WALLS
Plastering shall be carried out generally as specified above for cement plastering
for internal walls for the surface plastering is to be finished rough. The sand to be
used for the rough plastering shall be coarse sand.
94
2. WATER PROOFING COMPOUND
Wherever admixture of water proofing compound is specified for cement plastering

work or concrete work integral water proofing compound conforming to IS 2645 and
of approved band and manufacturer only shall be used. The contractor shall bring
the material to the site in their original packing. The containers shall be opened in
the presence of EIC or his representative. The material shall be mixed with dry
cement in the proportion by weight recommended by the manufacturers or as
described in the item as directed by the EIC. The water proofing mixer shall get well
and integrally mixed with the cement and does not run out separately when water is
added. It shall be measured by weight unless otherwise stated. The rate shall
include all labor and materials involved in mixing.
3. PAINTING I POLISHING
GENERAL
The material required for painting, varnishing etc for the work shall be brought from
approved manufacturers. Prior to bulk procurement the sample to be got approved
from EIC. Adequate quantity required for the work should be brought at a time and
kept in joint custody of contractor and EIC. The empty tins should not be removed
from site till the relevant item of work has been completed, cleaned off dust prior to
next coat. No left over paint shall be put back into stock tin. When not in use the
container shall be kept properly closed. Top of the surfaces and surfaces in similar
hidden locations shall not be left out.
Plastic emulsion, Acrylic emulsion, flat oil paint, synthetic enamel paint etc., shall be
of special quality from approved manufacturers. Inferior quality (Bazaar quality
paints even though manufactured by the approved manufacturers) shall not be
used on the work.
Sample tins of paints for all coats to be submitted to the EIC for his approval prior to
balk procurement. The priming under coating and finishing coats shall be from
different tins. The finishing coat shall be semi-gloss or matt finish as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
All the materials shall be kept properly protected when not in use. Lids of containers
shall be kept closed and the surface of paint in open or partially open containers
shall be covered with a thin layer of turpentine to prevent the formation of skin.
Materials which in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge have become stale shall
not be used on the works and shall be removed from the site of the work.
The paints shall generally conform to the chemical composition and other
characteristics in the relevant IS Specification. The paint shall be put on with
approved brushes, kept well bound and well worked during its application. For iron
work, fairly stiff brushes shall be used. The painting to be carried out in such order
as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The brushes shall be thoroughly cleaned before
being used for a different types of class of materials.
3.1 PAINTING
3.1.1 a) All paints to be of best manufacture and to be delivered on the site in the
marker's original packages and tins and the maker's guarantee to be.
produced if called for by the Engineer-in-Charge. The paints shall be of the
qualities suitable for use in the local climatic conditions. Thinners must be
those recommended by the manufacturers and used as directed. by them.
95
b) The paints to be used for the various categories of painting work shall be
of those manufactured by one of the standard manufacturers e.g. M/s
Nerolac, Shalimar or any other manufacturers, as may be approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Only the best quality paint of various categories shall
be used. Paints for the application by brush shall be strained through paint
strainer. The paint shall be kept stirred and used within the specified time.
Hardened or damaged paint shall not be use.
c) APPLICATION: The paint shall be applied by means of brushes and in

the manner specified by the manufacturer. The number of coats shall be as
mentioned in the item. When more than one coat is ordered subsequent,
coats shall be applied after the preceding coat is properly finished I cured
and thoroughly hardened, inspected and approved, and as per
manufacturers specifications.
Absorbent surfaces shall be evenly damped so as to give an even suction,

In dry weather, freshly cement painted surfaces shall be kept damp for at
least 2 days and protected from direct sun.
3.1.2 WATER PROOF CEMENT PAINT
a) The water proof cement paint shall be of approved manufacturer and it

shall be of approved color and shade. The contractor shall bring them to
the site in original air tight containers with seals intact.
b) The brushes to be used shall be as specified by the manufacturers and

they shall be got approved by Engineer-in-Charge. The surface to be
painted shall be prepared as specified by the manufacturers of the paint.
Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned free from dirt, dust etc. by brushing
and washing down with clean water. Any grease, oil paint or any other
foreign materials shall be removed by approved methods. Rough cast
surface shall be thoroughly brushed and washed to remove dirt and dust.
c) MIXING THE PAINT: The dry cement paint shall be thoroughly mixed
with clean fresh water so as to produce paint of required consistency which
for normal work shall be that of ordinary paints. In mixing and application,
the contractor shall follow the manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.3 STEEL WORK
All iron and steel work delivered to the site already primed, to be examined
so as to ascertain the quality and condition of the existing primer to satisfy
that it is hard, firmly adhering, and not chalking, blistered or cracked. If the
quality or condition of the existing primer is not satisfactory, it shall be
completely removed and the surface thoroughly cleaned and wire brushed
and primed immediately with the appropriate primer. All iron and steel
works delivered to the site un-primed shall be scrapped and wire brushed
to remove any rust and loose scale and cleaned to remove all dirt and
grease and then primed immediately with the appropriate primer.
The primer coat shall be of red lead paint conforming to 1S-102. Primer
coat shall be applied only after completely drying the surface to be painted
but immediately after cleaning. The contractor shall adhere to the time
96
schedule given by the paint manufacturer regarding application of primer

coat. Under coating puttying shall be done if necessary and directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
3.1.4 PAINTING WOOD WORK
a) EMBEDDED TIMBER : Timber embedded in masonry shall be given two

coats of hot coal tar or so lignum before erection.
PRIMING COAT : This shall consist of equal parts of white and red lead
mixed to boiled linseed oil to the required consistency applied uniformly
over the surface. When this coat is dry, all cracks, holes and other such
defects shall be filled with a mixture of one part white lead and three parts
ordinary putty. The surface shall then be rubbed down with sand paper and
dusted clean.
FINISHING COATS: The first coat shall be thin so that plaster may be
thoroughly saturated. The second coat oil plus 0.5oz of litharge or patent
driers and shall be applied before the wood work is fixed in position.
b) ON OUT SIDE WOOD WORK : Priming shall consist of 10 Ibs of white

lead plus 2.28 Itr. of raw linseed oil plus 1ox of red lead plus 2ox of litharge
or patent driers and shall be applied before the wood work is fixed in
position.
c) STOPPING: After priming, all small holes, cracks, open joints and similar
minor defects of every kind shall be stopped with putty made from pure
whiting mixed to the proper consistency with raw linseed oil, a little white
lead being, worked in after mixing to help the hardening of the putty. On no
account putty is to be used before the priming coat is put on.
d) ADDITIONAL COATS : After applying primer coats, the work shall be

lightly rubbed down smooth with sand paper and the subsequent coats of
paint of the specified shade approved by the Engineer-in-charge shall be
applied. The paint shall be applied with brushes. It shall be spread as
smoothly as possible with the brush by means of crossing (right angles to
the grain) and then laying off crossing with the brush marks are not visible.
Each coat of paint shall be allowed to dry thoroughly and shall be lightly
rubbed down before the next is laid. Every coat of paint shall be passed by
the Engineer-in-Charge before the next is laid on it. The finished surface
shall not show any rain marks, ridges, or dry patches of paints and no
puddles shall be left in the corners of panels and angle of molding.
e) USE OF SAND PAPER : The surface shall be rubbed smooth with sand
paper, first with coarse grade and then finished with a medium grade
paper. Sand papering must be finished with the grain. When finished no
scratches from the coarse paper should show.
f) Before priming coat is applied, the knotting shall be done by one of the
following methods as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
a) Ordinary or size knotting - This shall be applied in two coats. The

first to be made by grinding red lead in water and mixing it with
strong glue size, used hot. The second coat shall be of red lead
ground in linseed oil and thinned with boiled linseed oil and
turpentine.
b) Lime knotting - Cover the knot with hot lime and leave for 24
hours then scrap off and coat the surface with size knotting as
above.
97
c) Patent knotting - This consists of 2 coats of a varnish made by

dissolving shellac in methylated spirits of wine.
3.1.4.1 PAINTING WITH ENAMEL PAINT

Enamel paint shall conform to IS 2933. Faint of approved brand,
manufacturer and color only shall be used. The preparation of
surface for painting etc all shall be as in the case of other painting
works above.
3.1.4.2 PAINTING WITH SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT

Synthetic enamel paint shall conform to IS 2932 paint of approved
brand, manufacturer and color only shall be used. Preparation of
surface shall be similar to that for enamel painting. One coat of the
specified ordinary paint of shade suited to the shade of top coat
shall be applied and allowed to dry over night. It shall be rubbed
next day with the finest grade of wet abrasive paper to ensure a
smooth and even surface, free from brush marks and all loose
particles dusted off. The top coat of synthetic enamel paint of
desired shade shall be applied after the under coat is thoroughly
dry. Additional finishing coat shall be applied if found necessary to
ensure properly uniform surface. All other details shall be generally
as per that for enamel painting.
3.1.4.3 PAINTING WITH ALUMINUM PAINT

The aluminum painting shall conform to IS 2339. Paint of approved
brand and manufacturer only shall be used. The paint comes in
compact dual container with the paste and medium separately
which shall be mixed together to proper consistency for use. When
applied for steel work, all rust and scale shall be removed by
scrapping, brushing with steel wire etc and smoothened with sand
paper and thoroughly cleaned of dust. Each coat of painting shall
be allowed to dry for at least 24 hours and lightly rubbed down with
fine grade sand paper and dusted off prior to next coat. The paint
container should be frequently stirred to avoid settling of aluminum
paste. The paint shall be applied quickly otherwise it is difficult to
finish the surface.
3.1.4.4 PAINTING WITH ANTI-CORROSIVE BITUMASTIC PAINT

Ready mixed paint conforming to IS 158 of approved brand and
manufacturer shall be used. It shall be black, lead free; acid; alkali;
heat water resistant. The drying time between alternate courses
shall not be less than 3 hours. All other specifications shall be
generally as per other painting works.
3.1.5 WASHABLE OIL BOUND DISTEMPER
a) Washable oil bound distemper of approved make, colour and shade

shall be used, It shall conform to 1S-428.
o The surface to be distempered shall be cleaned and all cracks, holes

and surface defects shall be repaired with gypsum and allowed to set
hard. All irregularities shall be sand papered smooth and wiped clean.
The surface so prepared must be completely dry and free from dust
before distempering is commenced. The priming coat shall be applied
over the completely dry` surface in the manner recommended by the
makers in the case of patent distempers.
Only quantity of distemper required for days work shall be prepared.

The distemper and primer shall be brought by the contractor in sealed
98
tins in sufficient quantities at a time for the work and the same shall be
kept in the joint custody of the contractor and Engineer-in-Charge. The
empty tins shall not be removed from the site of work till the painting
work is completed, consumption of painting m-aterial assessed,
painting work passed by the EIC and removal of empty tins permitted
by Engineer-in-charge.
Pitting in plaster shall be made good with plaster of pairs mixed with
color to be used. The surface to be rubbed down with fine grade sand
paper and made smooth of coat of distemper shall be applied over the
patches. The patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before
regular coat of distemper is applied. If the wall surface plaster has not
dried, completely, cement primer shall be applied before distempering
the wall. But if distempering is done after the wall surface has dried
completely, distemper primer shall be applied. Oil bound distemper is
not recommended to be applied within six months of the completion of
the wall plaster. However newly plastered surface is required to be
distempered before a period of six months, it shall be given a coat of
alkali resistant priming paint conforming to IS 109 and allowed to dry
for at least 48 hours before distempering is commenced. Unless
otherwise stated for old works no primer coat is necessary.
3.1.6 WALL PAINTING WITH PLASTIC EMULSION PAINT
Wall painting with plastic Emulsion paint on New work
GENERAL : Plastic emulsion 'paints are not suitable for application on

external wood and iron surfaces and surfaces which are liable to heavy
condensation and are to be used generally on masonry or plastered
surfaces. Suitable primer as per manufacturer shall be provided.
PAINT : Plastic emulsion paint of approved brand and manufacture and of

the required shade shall be sued.
PREPARATION OF SURFACE : The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned

of dust, old white or color wash by washing and' scrubbing. The surface
shall then be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours. It shall then be sand
papered to give a smooth and even surface. Any unevenness shall be
made good by applying putty, made of plaster of Paris mixed with water on
the entire surface including filing up the undulation and then sand papering
the same after it is dry.
APPLICATION : The number of coat-s shall be as stipulated in the item.

The paint will be applied in the usual manner with brush or roller. The paint
dries by evaporation of the water content and as soon as the water has
evaporated the film gets hard and the next coat can be applied. The time of
drying varies from one hour on absorbent surfaces to 20 to 3 hours on
nonabsorbent surfaces.
The thinning of emulsion is to be done with water and not with turpentine.
Thinning with water will be particularly required for the undercoat which is
applied on the absorbent surface. The quantity of thinner to be added shall
be as per manufacturer's instructions.
The surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish. If

necessary more coats will be applied till the surface presents a uniform
appearance.
99
PRECAUTIONS : a) Old brushes if there are to be used with emulsion

paints, should be completely dried of turpentine or oil paints by washing in
warm soap water.
Brushes should be quickly washed in water immediately after use and kept
immersed in water during break periods to prevent the paint from hardening
on the brush.
b) In the preparation of walls for plastic emulsion painting, no oil base

putties shall be used in filling cracks, holes etc.
c) Splashes on floors etc. shall be cleaned out without delays as they will
be difficult to remove after hardening.
d) Washing of surfaces treated with emulsion paints shall not be done

within 3 to 4 weeks of application.
OTHER DETAILS : These shall be as per specification for "painting" as far

as they are application.
3.2 CHICKEN MESH AT JUNCTIONS
Galvanized chicken mash (24 gauge, 12mm size) shall be provided at junctions
of brick masonry and concrete members, to be plastered and other locations as
called for, properly stretched and nailed with galvanized wire nails, ensuring
equal thickness of plaster on both sides of the mesh. The width of the mesh shall
be as approved by the Engineer in Charge. The chicken mesh shall be need for
separately unless specified in the description of the plastering items.
4. Wet STONE CLADDING ( GRANITE STONE )
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This section covers the requirements for providing and fixing of granite stone to wall
cladding outside the external walls of buildings keeping a gap between the wall
including pins, cramps and filling of joints etc.,
MATERIALS
GRANITE STONE SLABS
The slabs shall be of the required colour and shade and of textures as description
of the item. The stone slabs shall be hard, sound, durable and tough, free from
cracks, decay and weathering. Before starting the work the contractor shall get the
samples of stone slabs approved by the Engineer- In Charge.
The stone slabs shall be machine cut to the requisite thickness along planes
parallel to the natural bed of the stone and shall be of uniform size if required. The
thickness of the slabs shall be as specified in the description of the item with a
permissible tolerance of 3 percent.
PINS
Pins shall be of stainless steel 75 mm long and 6mm diameter or as specified.

Their samples shall be got approved by the Engineer- In Charge and kept at site.
CRAMPS
100
The material of cramps shall have high resistance to corrosion under conditions of
dampness and against the chemical action of mortar of concrete. The cramps shall
be of the material specified in the item of work.
LAYING
The stone slabs shall be fixed in position without the use of chips or underpinning of
any sort on a bed mortar screed of cement mortar as specified in schedule of
items., Further, the stone shall be secured to the backing by means of cramps and
pins.
The wet stone cladding shall be carried up truly plumb. All courses shall be laid
truly horizontal and all vertical joints truly vertical. The stone shall break joints on
the face of the wall unless otherwise shown in the drawings. The stone shall be in
regular courses as per drawing and all stones shall be of the size mentioned in the
drawing also with grooves where ever mentioned. In case of reinforced cement
concrete backing, the cramps shall be fixed to concrete while laying, at the requisite
positions.
JOINTS
The joints shall be paper jointed with pigment and white cement with adhesiveor
with grooves . as specified.The fine joint shall be uniform throughout.
OTHER DETAILS
PROTECTION
Work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. The work shall also be
suitably protected from damage from Adhesive / silicon dropping and rain during
construction.
SCAFFOLDING
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided. The
supports shall be sound and strong, tied together with horizontal pieces over which
scaffolding planks shall be fixed.
101
CHAPTER : 17 ALUMINIUM WORK
1. DEFINITIONS
Bar : Any solid section, other than round with at least one dimension of 10 mm or
greater.
Rod: Any round solid section with a diameter of 10 mm or greater.
Extruded Round Tube : A circular hollow extrusion of uniform wall thickness not
subject to cold drawing.
Hollow Section : An extruded shape other than round tube, the cross-section of
which completely encloses a void or voids and which is not subject to cold drawing.
Anodized Aluminum : Aluminum with an anodic coating, produced by an

electrolytic oxidation process in which the surface of aluminum is converted to a
coating, generally an oxide, which have protective, decorative or functional
properties. .
Pre-laminated Particle Board : A particle board laminated on both surfaces by

synthetic impregnated base papers under the influence of heat and pressure or with
finished foil under the pressure or pressure and heat depending on type of binder
used.
Floor Spring (Hydraulically Regulated) : A device used to close the door so as to

slow down its speed before it reaches in closed position, hereinafter called Floor
spring.
Single Action floor spring (Hydraulically Regulated) : A device used to close the
door in one direction only so as to slow down its speed before it reaches to its
closed position.
Double Action Floor Spring (Hydraulically Regulated) : A device used to close

the door in both directions so as to slow down its speed before it reaches its closed
position.
Shoe: The device fixed to the bottom of the door leaf in order to hoist it to the floor
spring.
Top Centre Pivot: The device to secure the upper portion of the door leaf and the
door frame above.
Right hand floor spring: A floor spring suitable for use on an anticlockwise door;
an anticlockwise door is one which, when viewed from above, rotates in
anticlockwise direction about its hinge while opening.
Left hand floor Spring: The floor spring suitable for use on clockwise door; a
clockwise door is one which, when viewed from above, rotates in clockwise
direction about its hinge while opening.
Sash: It is a complete window unit whether fixed or open type.
Composite Window: Window unit having two or more sashes joined together with
one or more coupling members.
Centre-Hung Ventilator: A ventilator horizontally pivoted at the centre on both

sides. Top half opens inwards and bottom half opens outwards.
102
Bottom-Hung Ventilator: Ventilator hinged at bottom opens inwards.
Top-Hung Ventilator: Ventilator hinged at top, opens outwards.
2. MATERIAL
2.1 Aluminum alloy standard extruded sections manufactured in the country by major
manufacturers and shown under the respective items in this book are used for
fabrication of Aluminum doors, windows, ventilators and partition. Tee/angle
sections are used for frame work of false ceiling. The chemical composition and
mechanical properties of these extruded sections should comply with the
requirements of IS 733, IS: 1285, IS : 737. Aluminum is corrosion resistance, it is
inert to sulphur.
Aluminum Alloy Extruded sections in different forms used in the manufacture of

frames and shutters of doors and windows and supports for hand rails, wall facings,
partitions and similar other applications, where surface finish is important and
medium strength would suffice shall conform to IS : 733 and IS : 1285.
2.2 ANODIZING
(i) In India, standard aluminum extrusion products are manufactured by a very few
large companies and the product mix includes a wide range of solid and hollow
profiles with different functional shapes for architectural, transport, structural
glazing, curtain walling, textile, electrical industries, micro light, aircraft etc. and also
the products used in irrigation industry as tubes for sprinkler system and for
transporting water, etc.
(ii) In such wide range of aluminum products, the small portion covered by
architectural/structural age is for the manufacture of doors, windows ventilators,
shop fronts, rolling shutters, ladders, structural glazing and curtain walling.
(iii) The anodizing of these products are undertaken by the companies themselves
with the imported Anodizing / electro coating plants which-ensures uniform coating
to match the taste and decor for various applications, without colour variation.
(iv) The extrusions are anodized up to 30 micron in different colours like silver,
champagne, bronze and black. A fool proof scaling system ensures durable finish
for long lasting applications.
(v) The companies have their own testing procedures, based on international
standards, the anodized extrusions are tested regularly under strict quality control
adhering to Indian and British standard specifications.
(vi) Therefore the Engineer-in-charge should insist on the contractor to get the
required components manufactured from the reputed local work-shops using the
aluminum extruded sections manufactured only by the standard recognized ISO
9002 or equivalent companies and produce a proof to that effect.
3. ALUMINUM WORK FOR DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS AND

COMPOSITE UNITS
(i) General Specifications and materials shall conform to the requirements as laid
down in clause 1 and 1.2.
(ii) The aluminum doors, windows and ventilators shall be fabricated by reputed
local work-shops using the aluminum extrusions manufactured by the renowned
manufacturers as listed in approved klist of materials.. Fabrication of doors,
windows etc. on site by local labour employed by the contractor shall not be
103
permitted. The fabricated materials in ready to fix position are subject to inspection
by the Engineer-in-charge, who may call for necessary documents to confirm that
only materials from reputed manufacturers have been used for the fabrication.
3.1 GENERAL
(i) The Indian Standards Codes IS : 1948 on aluminum doors, windows and
ventilators and IS : 1949 on manufacturing industrial windows were issued way
back in the year 1961, but somehow, aluminum extrusion sections and other
products were not much in use in construction industry almost till the year 1988-89.
(ii) It is only in the year 1989-90 that the manufacturing of different types, sizes of
aluminum extruded sections, tubes, angles etc. started on a large scale. The
construction industry was in need of an alternative material, as such the usage of
aluminum sections and other materials was started in a fairly big way.
(iii) However, the provisions for sizes and other details prescribed in the IS Codes
based as per the construction practice in vogue in the years 1960-61 has not been
revised and changed to suit the present day requirements, but the major
manufacturers started manufacturing the extruded sections and other materials to
suit the latest construction practice, based on British Standards and International
Standards in general, with the result the size and the type of aluminum extruded
sections for a particular member recommended by IS Codes issued in the year
1961 are rarely available in the market and one has to use only the sizes and types
of extruded sections manufactured by the manufacturer, which are readily available
in the market. However, the quality of extruded sections as regards the materials
and the anodizing etc. are maintained very high to cope up with the quality
requirements of IS Codes.
(iv) If need be the manufacturers offer to supply the aluminum extruded sections
and other materials as per types and sizes recommended in IS Codes only on bulk
orders for a particular client, but not for general sale in the market. It should be
clearly noted that the Aluminum Tubes and Aluminum square and rectangular
channels are not at all used for fabricating doors, windows etc. and are only for
general work.
(v) Therefore, the construction industry in general has totally adjusted to the
circumstances and are using the specially manufactured extruded sections and
other materials as available in the market and in turn the major manufacturers are
marketing the best materials maintaining the quality as prescribed in IS Standards.
(vi) Even small local factories, units have also started manufacturing the extruded
sections and anodizing the same. They are also producing the materials with the
shape and size exactly as manufactured by major companies, but the quality
maintained by the above small scale units is doubtful. Hence it is advisable to
prefer and use only the products manufactured by major manufacturers, though the
same may work out to be it costly, unless the volume of work is very small.
(vii) Therefore, it is not advisable to blindly follow the recommendations for shapes,
sizes of extruded sections as prescribed in IS Codes issued long back, for the
fabrication of aluminum doors, windows and ventilators etc. but on the other hand
most of the provisions prescribed for the sizes of members, joining procedure,
providing fittings, lugs, method of fixing etc. in the IS codes may be followed with
some alteration to suit the present day practice.
(viii) Therefore the details of shape, size and weight per metre of extruding
sections, for doors, windows, ventilators and other items as being manufactured by
some renowned manufacturers and along with the same, the size, shape and
weight per metre of some of the extruded sections as recommended by the IS
Codes are also given for comparison and convenience of the user to choose the
104
correct section, to suit his requirement & also to calculate the quantity of materials
to be used for the purpose of estimating, execution and billing.
(ix) The method of clubbing all items like doors, windows, ventilators, partitions
while dealing in specifications is not proper, as without dealing each item
separately, covering the explanation of all necessary requirements of each item
shall not be possible hence to make it convenient and easy to understand the
subject the description of all these items are given separately under separate sub-
heads.
3.2 DOORS
3.2.1 ALUMINUM ALLOY EXTRUDED SECTIONS - as per IS : 1948
i) Dimensions and weight per metre run of extruded sections to be used for
Manufacturing aluminum doors as recommended in IS : 1948-1961 shall be
as indicated in the drawings.
4. COMPONENTS OF DOORS AND TERMINOLOGY
(i) Different components of aluminum doors have been given a particular

terminology so that the exact component can be located.
(ii) IS: 1948 has specified the terminology for aluminum doors which is used for all
future references as necessary.
4.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION AND TOLERANCES FOR ALUMINUM

EXTRUSIONS MANUFACTURED BY RENOWNED MANUFACTURERS
4.1.1 CIRCUMSCRIBING CIRCLE DIAMETER (C.C.D.)
(i) The product range can be broadly categorized as follows:
(a) For solids up to 190 mm

(b) For Hollows up to 135 mm
(ii) Sections with higher C.C.D. can also be produced as per special inquiry.
4.1.2 MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES
Dimensional extrusions are normally manufactured as per Indian

Standard/British Standard specifications. Special tolerances shall be
mutually agreed upon.
4.1.3 TOLERANCE ON CUT LENGTH
i) The standard cut length is 3.66 m. The tolerance on cut length shall be as
follows:
LENGTH Up to 6 metres Over 6 metres
TOLERANCE + 5.00mm + 7.00 mm
105
(ii) Section can also be supplied in random lengths between 1500 mm to

5000 mm.
106
CHAPTER 18 ROAD/DRIVE WAY/RAMPS
All work shall be executed as specified in schedule of items and specifications

mentioned elsewhere for relevant items.
1. INTER LOCKING PAVER BLOCK DRIVE WAY

Unless otherwise specified the interlocking pavers blocks shall be of 65mm thick,
load bearing strength not less than M20 grade. They shall strictly conform to
manufacturers specification. The area where the pavers blocks are to be laid shall
be prepared as specified in the working drawings and as directed by the Engineer-
in-Charge of work. Over this sub grade a bed of 75mm thick coarse sand shall be
laid and consolidated. At all edges of the area to be provided with power block edge
restraint blocks shall be provided. Over this the pavers blocks has to be laid to
proper line and level sand bed. These blocks shall be bedded down by running
plate vibrator over it and if necessary by topping level with mallet and large flat
piece of timber. Prior to running the plate vibrator dry sand shall be spread over the
laid blocks to ensure thorough filling of all the joints including joints at edge restraint
blocks. The laying of blocks, colour pattern, design if any etc shall all be as per the
drawing for the work. All materials and workman ship of providing interlocking
power block shall be strictly as per the manufacturers specification.
107
CHAPTER : 20 MISCELLANEOUS & SPECIAL ITEMS
1 DOUBLE/ TOUGHENED/ LAMINATED GLASS
MATERIAL
Prior to ordering of glass, the Contractor shall supply details to glass manufacturers
and during design/shop drawing stage have manufacturers verify in writing the
degree of suitability of the indicative size and lamination and advise of any charges
recommended which shall be finally made to meet requirements of the
manufacturer.
GLASS PANEL SIZE
Each panel of glass must be lazer cut accurately (no tolerances allowed) at the
manufacturers factory itself before being brought to site variations discrepancies in
sizes or otherwise shall be attributed as a failure on the part of the Contractor. All
glass brought for the work shall be from the same manufacturing lot to avoid any
variations in color or otherwise.
Toughened glass shall conform to IS:6180. All glass shall be true and uniform in
thickness to the specified thickness for the various areas. No variation in thickness
shall be acceptable. All glass shall be best quality free of bubbles, streaks, waves
or other defects. Edges of glass shall be perfectly cut and installed without any
chipped edges.
INSTALLATION
Handling storage, cutting and installation of all glass shall be carried out in
accordance with the glass manufacturers recommendations.
Edges of all glass shall be clean cut, feathered or vented edges will not be
acceptable under any circumstances.
Method of glazing shall be fully detailed on the contractors drawings. Clearances

and bites shall be in accordance with both the glass and silicone manufacturers
recommendations and shall accommodate all movement between glass and frames
and adjacent glasses and the building as a whole.
Setting blocks shall be neoprene of the appropriate durum etc. used in accordance
with the glass manufacturers recommendations. The visual affect of the roller lines
shall be kept to an absolute minimum factory positioned so that all glass panels
when installed shall in all cases have such lines horizontal - not vertical.
2. STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE
108
Providing Stainless steel grade 316 hardware i.e. Mortice lock, Dead lock, Pull handles,
Handles, Wall mounted door stopper, Floor door stopper etc including the cost of screw
and other incidental charges complete.
Materials:-
Hardware : - Mortice lock, Dead lock, Pull handles, Handles, Wall mounted door stopper, Floor
door stopper etc as per code mentioned in items (Kich make or equivalent as approved)
Stainless steel Grade : - AISI 316
Stainless steel Screw : screws used for fitting shall be of same metal and finish as the fitting
otherwise specified.
Finish : - Satin finish
Installation: - Hardware shall be fixed in proper position as shown in the drawings or as directed
by the Engineer-in-Charge. These shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be. Screws
shall be driven home with screw driven and not hammered in. Recesses if required shall be cut to
the exact size and depth. All hardware products are made of Corrosion Resistant grade AISI316
stainless steel.
Measurement: - All hardware shall be measured in numbers.
Rate:- The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
3. TOILET CUBICLE SYSTEM: (Titan 18 mm Box-up Series)
The system consists of two parts pilasters & doors and intermediate panels. All Intermediate
panels shall be of 12 mm thick solid compact laminate as one continuous panel without any joints
and pilasters & Doors shall be made of solid compact laminate 18 mm thick with edges chamfered.
The solid compact laminate ( Phenolic core board) as per IS 2046 is based on thermosetting
resins, homogeneously reinforced with cellulose fibres. Top surface on both sides is melamine
coated which is scratch and impact resistant.
All pilasters are to be supported by Merino TITAN steel L bracket with floor anchor bolt, which is
concealed with stainless steel flat box-up of height 100 mm. The stainless steel box-up shoe is
available in SS Grade 316. Fixing of intermediate panels to the wall shall be with stainless steel
grade -304 U channel section fixed into the wall with SS-304 screw inserts.
Each toilet compartment shall be equipped with Stainless steel Grade-304 accessories of (Titan
18 mm Box-up Series) or equivalent. :
a) SS Grade-304 thumb turn Indicator.

b) SS Grade-304 Shoe box and channels.
c) SS Grade-304 Door Knob.
d) SS Grade-304 Coat Hook.
e) SS Grade-304 Hinges with Cover.
4.LAY-IN TILE ALUMINIUM FALSE CEILING
Material:
False ceiling : - 0.6 mm thick Lay-in tile (600 mm x 600 mm) aluminium Powder coated in the
manufactures standard colour shades, with square & beveled edges and flanges, produced on
advanced equipment, which includes several levelling stages in the manufacturing process.
Frame work : - Suspension system would be standard 24 mm table exposed metal grid features
main runners and cross tees roll formed from galvanized steel to BS 2989Z-18 zinc coating,
minimum tensile strength 270 Mpa. Grid system to be designed to satisfy ASTM C635 loading and
deflection criteria, G.I. wire rods or quick adjustment suspension hangers fixed to roof by expansion
fasteners, Wall angle to be 23 x 23 x 0.5 mm thick coil coated aluminum matching the colour of tile.
109
Installation Process:
Providing & fixing wall angle 23x23x0.5 mm thick along the perimeter of the area with the help of
nylon sleeves & dash fastener. Galvanised steel main runners of size as per manufacturers
specification are suspended from the soffit/ceiling with the help of G.I. wire rods or quick adjustment
suspension hangers fixed to roof by expansion fasteners. The main runners shall normally be fixed
at 1200 mm and shall be in filled with 1200 mm and 600 mm cross tees. Finally the tiles shall be
laid in place from below into the standard grid.
Measurement: Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. Areas shall be worked out to
nearest 0.01sqm. The superficial area of the finished work ceiling shall be measured in square
meters.. No deduction in measurements shall be made for openings of areas up to 40 square
decimetre.Nothing extra shall be payable either for any extra material or labour involved in forming
such openings. For openings exceeding 0.40 sqm in area, deductions in measurements for the full
opening will be made and in such case any labour involved in making these openings shall be paid
for separately.
Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including all framework ,wastage, scaffolding etc., at all heights and locations as
given in the drawings.
6.STAINLESS STEEL WELD FREE RAILING

Providing modular passivated stainless steel weld free railing system at suitable locations of
approved size and shape conforming to grade AISI 304 with necessary components using
expansion and ball socket jointing system.
Material:
Top handrail shall be S.S. tube dia 50.8 mm x 1.6 mm thickness, single vertical balusters shall be
of 42.3 mm dia pipe of 1.6 mm thickness at 1m to 1.2 m c / c & at turning with 4 Nos. mid rail of
S.S. tube dia 19mm x 1.6 mm thickness and mounted all balusters with blind rivet, in 240 grit satin
or mirror finish.
Installation Process
The balusters may be fixed on the horizontal or vertical surface as desired with modular system and
baluster to hold handrail with modular ball socket jointing system for all joints, turns etc. The entire
fixing shall be completed as per architectural drawing and approval of Engineer-in-charge.
Location: For stair, passage up to 1m high.
Measurement: The railing as actual fixed in place shall be measured in running metres correct to a
centimeter. No extra payment shall be made for wastage.
Rate: The rate quoted by the contractor shall inclusive the cost of material and labour involved in all
the operations described above including scaffolding etc., at all heights and locations as given in the
drawings
8. FRAMELESS FIXED & OPENABLE PANEL/ DOOR WITH TOUGHENED GLASS

Materials:-
Glass : - 12 mm thick toughened float glass (Saint Gobain or other equivalent make)
Patch fitting floor spring and Lock :- Dorma, or equivalent
Silicon sealant structural grade and weathering grade : Dow Corning, GE, Wacker .
Fastener :- Hilti / Fischer
Installation: - The glass shall be cut, toughened and brought to site with cutouts and holes as
required by the manufacturer for installation of patch fittings, door handles and locks. The patch
fittings shall be mounted on the glass and marking made on the floor & false ceiling for installation
of floor spring & top pivot. The finished floor shall be cut to fix the floor spring. After holding the
glass in position the patch fittings shall be tightened in to position for movement. The locks shall
then be fixed and the strike plates installed in the floor or on the adjacent fixed glass. Care should
be taken that all holes in the glass for fixing of subsequent glasses/doors/patch fittings is taken in to
account so that later the glass is not wasted for want of holes etc. as they shall be all toughened
110
allowing no modification. All the glass work shall be installed by a company authorized system
integrator only.
Measurement: - The height and width of glass as fixed in place shall be measured correct to one
centimeter and area calculated in sqm., correct to second place of decimal shall be taken for
payment. No extra payment shall be made for fins, wastage, odd shapes/sizes, holes, cutouts for
patch fitting etc.
Rate:- The rate quoted by the contractor shall be inclusive of glass and all Patch fittings, locks, floor
springs, silicon sealants and all necessary hardware for fixing at site including labour, cutting,
placing, cost of hardware, tools, scaffolding etc. at all heights and locations as given in the
drawings.
9. SEMI UNITIZED STRUCTURAL CURTAIN GLAZING SYSTEM

9.1 General
Structural Glazing shall be designed as per BIS code IS-875 Part III for required wind pressure .
The contractor must design the Structural Glazing as per the prevalent site conditions and building
profiles and the Structural Glazing should be structurally safe. System design to strictly consider for
thermal movements, air infiltration, water penetration, seismic movement and structural movement.
The work of Structural Glazing shall include the designing and fixing Mullions & Transoms to the
structure through adequately designed galvanized MS brackets, providing and fixing glass of
approved quality & spec. with Aluminium sections using structural silicon sealant of approved
quality including all Aluminium sub frames wherever necessary (Cost of aluminium sub frame shall
be paid in basic items ). The system shall also include sealing the complete glazing and perimeter
channel with weather sealant to prevent water penetration as per relevant specifications etc.
Complete as per detailed drawings & approved shop drawings. The complete drainage system to
be incorporated in the design in the unlikely event that water penetrates the pressure seal.
The contractor must provide detailed design &drawings of the system indicating individual profiles
and also details of any other profiles that may be used including dimensions, wall thickness etc., for
approval by the Architect / Engineer-in-Charge.
9.2 Specification for Materials used for Curtain Wall

(1) Glazing : As specified in the description of the item or as described in IS code.
(2) Framing system : The extruded Aluminium sections including transom, mullions etc. shall be
Anodised in approved colour with an Anodic Coating of minimum 25 microns . Extruded
Aluminium sections shall be specially designed and shall be of 6063 T6 alloy. All fastening
straps, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers, Screws etc. required in Structural Glazing shall be of SS
304 grade.
Aluminum anodized extruded sections manufactured by Hindalco / Jindal / Bhoruka or

equivalent makes for all types of members like, mullions, transom etc.
(3) Sealant : Silicon sealant structural grade and weathering grade shall be "Dow Corning-USA"
or "GE Silicon - USA" or "Wacker-Germany" as per the design requirement.
(4) Toughened Glass : The glass used for the Structural Glazing shall be Double glazed dual
sealed insulating glass comprising of first 6mm thick Olive, Nano SKN 154 (external)
toughened (Saint-Gobain or equivalent)with the solar control and Low E coating on face 2,
second 5mm thick clear float glass (internal) toughened (Saint-Gobain or equivalent),
separated by spacers to create 10mm dehydrated air space and thermatically sealed by using
double sealed organic sealant (priming sealant of thermoplastic), solvent free polyisobutylene
which is applied on both sides of spacer, secondary sealant comprising of two component
polysulphide in the right proportion for final outer seal including perforated channel for air
spaces.
111
(5) Non-corrosive galvanized brackets of approved design (Galvanizing to be done conforming to

IS:4759-1996 up to 610 gms. Per Sqm. i.e 80-90 micron thickness . Aluminium shims of
various thickness to adjust the beam level/ line variations fixed with SS 316 Grade dash
fasteners of Hilti make min. 12mm dia. 100 mm long .
(6) Stainless steel Friction stays grade 304: Security style / Alualpha / Dorma or equivalent make
Locking system and Window Handles : Security style / Alualpha / Dorma or equivalent make
Gasket : EPDM or equivalent
9.3 Scope of Work

9.3.1 Preliminary Requirements
(i) The contractor shall design, test, fabricate, deliver, install and guarantee all construction
necessary to provide a complete curtain wall system for the proposed building, all in conformity
with the drawings as shown.
(i) Specification and all relevant construction regulations including providing any measures that
may be required to that end, notwithstanding any omissions or inadequacies of the drawing
(iii)The curtain wall system shall also include the following activities:
(a) Metal frames, glass glazing, spandrels, ventilators, finish hardware copings, metal closure,
windows etc.
(b) All anchors attachments, reinforcement and steel reinforcing for the systems required for the
complete installations.
(c) All copings and closure and metal cladding to complete the system.
(d) All sealing and flushing including sealing at junctions with other trades to achieve complete
water tightness in the system. Gaps up to 10 mm between the peripheral aluminum member
and masonry / R.C.C./ Stone shall be sealed by inserting Backer Rod and weather silicon:
wherever the gaps are be more than 10 mm the same shall be sealed by providing and fixing
1.5 mm thick Aluminium sheet flashings bent to required profile as per approved design and
duly Anodised with 25 micron Anodising in approved colour.
(e) Isolation of dissimilar metals and moving parts.
(f) Anticorrosive treatment on all metals used in the system.
(j) The Expansion joints between two mullions at every beam level should be created by inserting
300 mm long (minimum) Aluminium Expansion Sleeve Tube and bolted with the main mullion
member, and the expansion joint gap should be minimum 10 mm . The Expansion joint must
be properly sealed all around with weather sealant to make it water tight.
(iv) The contractor shall also be responsible for providing the following:
a. Engineering proposal, shop drawings, engineering data and structural calculations in

connection with the design of the curtain wall system.
b. Mock-ups, samples and test units.
c. Performance testing of the curtain wall framing and glazing assembly.
d. Co-ordination with the work of other trade.
e. Protection during construction.
f. All final exterior and interior cleaning and finishing of the curtain wall system.
g. As built record drawings and photographs.
h. Guarantees and warranties.
i. All hoisting, scaffolding, staging and temporary services.
j. Conceptualizing and design of a suitable maintenance system for curtain glazing.
(v) The water tightness and structural stability of the whole curtain wall system is the prime
responsibility of the contractor. Any defect or leakage found within the guarantee period shall
be sealed and made good at the risk and cost of the contractor.
(vi) The curtain wall system shall be designed to provide for expansion and contraction of
components which will be caused by an ambient temperature range without causing buckling,
112
stress on glass, failure of joint sealants, undue stress on structural elements or other
detrimental effects, specific details should be designed to accommodate thermal and building
movements.
9.3.2 Design Requirements
(i) Curtain wall shall comply with all government codes and regulations, building bye-laws, if any.
(ii) All curtain walling, individual aluminum and glass components and all completed work shall be
designed and erected to comply with the following requirements.
9.3.3 Basic Requirement.
The basic design and architectural requirements shall consist of the size of window, net glass
area, ventilator, configuration of windows and spandrels to be retained. However the contractor
may propose alternatives on the construction details provided that all basic functional and
architectural requirements are fulfilled.
Measurement :- The height and width of structural glazing as fixed in place shall be measured
correct to one centimeter and area calculated in sqm., correct to second place of decimal shall be
taken for payment.
Rate:- The rate shall include the cost of all material, hardware & labour involved in the operations as
described in nomenclature of item and particular specification. The rate to be quoted by the
Contractor shall be inclusive of fabrication & fixing at all locations & at all heights as per
working drawing.
10 TOUGHENED GLASS
Providing 6 mm thick Solar control High performance soft coated toughened glass ST 467 (Saint-
Gobain or equivalent) (meeting the minimum glass specification mentioned below ) with coating on
face 2 . (1) Light Transmission - 56% (2) Reflection (Ext.) -15% (3)Reflection (Int.) -18% (4) Solar
Factor -0.50 (5) U value -5.6 W/Sqm K )
Materials:-
Glass :- 6 mm thick Solar control High performance soft coated toughened glass ST 467 (Saint-
Gobain or equivalent) as per specification mentioned above.
Silicon sealant structural grade and weathering grade : Dow Corning, GE, Wacker.
Gaskets EPDM or equivalent.
Installation: - The glass shall be cut to exact size, toughened and brought to site for installation.
The glass panes shall be so cut that it fits slightly loose in the frames. Glazing shall be provided on
the outside of the frame unless otherwise specified. Before fixing the glass all joints and glazing
pockets to be cleaned by removing all foreign matter and contaminants such as grease, oil, dust,
water, frost, surface dirt or glazing compounds and protective coatings. Fixing of glass panes may
be done with Aluminum beading / section as shown in structural glazing detail. Areas adjacent to
joints shall be masked to ensure neat sealant lines. Masking tape shall not be allowed to touch
clean surfaces to which the silicone sealant is to adhere. Tooling shall be completed in one
continuous stroke immediately after sealant application and before a skin forms. Masking tape shall
be removed immediately after tooling. Installation of backer rod of appropriate size and application
of silicone sealant in a continuous operation using a positive pressure adequate to properly fill and
seal the joint. The silicone sealant shall be tooled with light pressure to spread the sealant against
backing material and the joint surfaces before a skin forms. A tool with convex profile shall be used
to keep the sealant within the joint. Soap or water shall not be used as a tooling aid. All the glass
work shall be installed by a company authorized system integrator only.
Measurement: - The height and width of glass as fixed in place shall be measured correct to one
centimeter and area calculated in sqm., correct to second place of decimal shall be taken for
payment.
113
Rate:- The rate shall include the cost of all the material, labour involved in all operations as
described in nomenclature of item and particular specification including wastage, scaffolding etc. at
all heights and locations as given in the drawings
114
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PHE WORKS
PHE- TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER SUPPLY & SANITARY FIXTURES
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK:
The general character and the scope of work to be carried out under this contract is illustrated
in the drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall carry out and complete the said work
under this contract in every respect in conformity with the rules and regulations of the local
authority. The Contractor shall furnish all labour, supply and install all materials, appliances,
tools, equipments etc, necessary for the complete provision and testing of the whole plumbing
services installation as specified herein as per the relevant ISI codes and shown on the
drawings. This also includes any material, appliances, equipment not specifically mentioned
herein or noted on the drawings as being furnished or installed but which are necessary and
customary to make a complete installation as shown on the drawings or described herein,
properly connected and in working order. In general, the work to be performed under this
contract shall comprise of the following :
1.1 All incident jobs connected with plumbing services installation, such as excavation in trenches
and back filling, cutting chases in concrete, brick etc. and making good, cutting/drilling holes
through walls, floors, and grouting for embedding of fixtures, equipment, etc.
115
1.2 Furnish and install a complete workable, plumbing services installation as shown on the
drawings and described in this specification and as per the latest ISI specifications including
all that which is reasonably inferred.
1.3 Complete installation of internal and external water supply system.
1.4 Complete installation of the sewerage & sewerage appurtenances internally and around the
building.
1.5 Complete installation of all sanitary and plumbing fixtures.
1.6 Co-operation with other crafts in putting the installation in places. Any work done without
regard or consultation with other trades, shall be removed by the Contractor without any
additional cost to the Employer, to permit the proper installation of all other work, as desired
by the Employer.
1.7 Repair all damage done to the premises as a result of his installation and remove all debris
left by those engaged for this installation to the satisfaction of Employer.
1.8 Cleaning of all plumbing fixtures, testing and showing satisfactory performance of all the
fixtures at the time of handling over to the Employer.
1.9 Take care of all the fixtures fitted until the time of handing over to the Employer.
1.10 Painting of all concealed and exposed pipes as specified.
1.11 Wrapping and coating of all underground pipes for GI pipes.
1.12 Assume full responsibility of all required applications and costs, to connect to Municipal water
mains, sewers and storm water drains, to the extent these are applicable to this installation.
2.0 REGUALTIONS AND STANDARDS :-
2.1 The installation shall conform in all respects to the following broad list of standards in general :
IS 1726 - 1991 : Code for cast iron manhole frame and cover.
IS 1742 - 1983 : Code of practice for building drainage.
IS 246 - 1962 : Code of practice for selection, installation & Maintenance of

sanitary appliances.
IS 1172 - 1971 : Code of Basic requirements for water supply, drainage &
sanitation (revised)
IS 2065 - 1963 : Code of Practice for Water Supply in buildings.
IS 4111 - 1967 : Code of Practice for Ancillary structures in Sewerage system.
IS 3989 - 1984 : Centrifugally cast spun iron and socket soil and ventilating
pipe, fittings and accessories.
IS 1239 - 1990 : Specifications for mild steel tube, tubular and other steel pipe
fittings.
116
IS 554 1975 : Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joint are
required on the threads.
IS 4985 2000 : Specifications for PVC pipes & pipe fittings.
IS 13592 - 1992 : UPVC for soil, waste and rain water(SWR) drainage system
IS 729 - 1978 : Specification for Water Meter.
IS 4127 - 1967 : Code of practice for Laying Glazed Stoneware Pipes.
IS 1626 - 1960 : Specifications for AC building pipes, gutters & fittings ( Spigot &
Socket type ).
th
IS 651 - 1992 : Specifications for salt Glazed Stoneware pipes & Fittings ( 5
Revision ).
IS 1729 - 1979 : Specification for sand cast iron spigot & socket soil waste &
Ventilating pipe, fittings & accessories.
IS 1538 - 1976 : Specifications for CI fittings for pressure pipes for Water, Gas &
Sewage.
IS 1536 1989 : Specification for centrifugally cast ( spun ) Iron pressure pipes for
& IS 1537 - 1967 & Water, Gas & Sewage.
IS 782 - 1979 : Specification for Lead for Caulking.
IS 10221 Specification for anticorrosive treatment.
2.2 The installation shall also be in conformity with the byelaws and requirements of the local
authority in so far as these become applicable to the installation, Wherever this specification
calls for a higher standard of materials and/or workmanship than those required by any of the
above regulations and standards, then this specification shall take precedence over the said
regulations and standards. Wherever drawings and specifications require something, which
will violate the regulations, the regulations shall govern.
3.0 FEES, PERMITS AND TESTS :
The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any and all fees and permits required for the
installation of this work. On completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to
the Employer, certificates of final inspection and approval by the local authority. The Employer
shall have full power to require the materials of work to be tested by an independent agency
at the Contractor's expenses in order to prove their soundness and adequacy.
4.0 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS :
4.1.1 The drawings and specifications shall be considered as part of this contract and any work or
materials shown on the drawings and not called for in the specifications or vice versa shall be
executed as if specifically called for in both. The contract drawings indicated the extent and
general arrangement of the fixtures, drainage system etc, and are essentially diagrammatic.
The drawings indicate the points of supply and termination of pipe runs and broadly suggest
the routes to be followed. The work shall be installed as indicated on the drawings, however
any changes found essential to coordinate this work with other trades shall be made without
any additional cost. The date given herein and on the drawings is as exact as could be
secured, but its complete accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings and specifications are of
the assistance and guidance of the Contractor, and exact location distance and levels will be
governed by the individual building and site condition therefore approval at the architects shall
be obtained before commencement of work.
117
4.2 At the completion of the work, contractor shall furnish final completion drawings to the
employer on tracing paper including all product catalogues, maintenance manual in the
desired format.
4.3 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION :

Where manufacturers have furnished specified instructions, relating to the materials used in
this job, covering points not specifically mentioned in these documents, these instructions
shall be followed in all cases.
4.4 CHANGE IN DIMENSIONS :
If the size of the fixtures mentioned is not available then the nearest available size shall be
fixed with due consent of the Employer.
5.0 MATERIALS :
5.1 Materials shall be of the best approved quality obtainable and unless otherwise specified they
shall conform to the respective Indian Standards Specification.
5.2 Samples of all materials shall be as per the list of approved brand manufacture. The samples
shall be got by the Project Managers approved before placing order and the approved
samples shall be deposited with the Employer.
5.3 In case of non-availability of materials in metric sizes, the nearest size of FPS units shall be
provided with prior approval of the Architects, for which no extra will be paid.
6.0 DRAINAGE :
6.1.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS :
PVC pipe and fittings shall comply, with IS 4985 - 1988 in every respect and all PVC pipes,
bends, etc, shall be of the best variety. Pipes shall be jointed using good quality rubber
lubricant & tested for leakage as per class of pipe.
All internal sewage and waste pipes shall be of PVC 1 MPA pressure rating TYPE B SWR .
All external sewage Pipes connecting chambers shall be HDPE PE 100 joined with electro
fusion welding.
All internal water pipes and shaft pipes shall be PPR .
The water supply line to over head tank and the exposed piping on the terrace from the
overhead tank to till vertical shaft shall be GI class Pipe as per the BOQ quantities.
6.1.2 Stoneware pipes & fitting shall comply with IS 651 1992 in every respect & all stoneware
pipes, bends, etc shall be of best salt glazed variety, glazed inside as well as outside, hard,
smooth, even textured, free from fine cracks, air blows & blisters. The pipe shall be truly
circular in cross section perfectly straight & of standard nominal diameter, length & depth of
socket.
6.2 TRENCHES FOR PVC / SW PIPE DRAINS :
6.2.1 Alignment and Grades : The drains are to be laid to alignment and grade shown on the
drawings but subject to such modifications, as shall be ordered by the Architect from time to
time to meet the requirements of the works. No deviations for the lines, depths of cutting or
gradients of sewers shown in the drawings shall be permitted except by the express direction
in writing of the Architects.
6.2.2 Opening Out Trenches : In excavating the trenches etc, the road metalling, Pavement
kerbing etc, are to be placed on one side and preserved for reinstatement when the trench or
other excavation shall be filled up and laid back to original conditions at no extra cost. Before
118
any road metal is replaced, it shall be carefully shifted. The surface of all trenches and holes
shall be restored and maintained to the satisfaction of the Employer. The Contractor shall not
cut or break down any live fence or trees in the line of the proposed works but shall tunnel
under them unless the Employer shall order to the contrary. The Contractor shall scrub up
and clear the surface over the trenches and other excavations of all stumps, roots and all
other encumbrances affecting execution of the work and shall remove them from the site to
the approval of the Project Managers. All works across the roads shall be carried out as per
directions of the Employer.
6.2.3 Excavation to be taken to Proper Depth : The trenches shall be excavated in all conditions of
soil and to such a depth that the sewers shall rest as described in the several clauses relating
thereto and so that the inverts may be at the levels given in the drawing. In loose soil, the
Architect/Project Engineer may order the Contractor to excavate to a greater depth than
shown on the drawings to fill up the extra excavation with concrete, sand, gravel or other
materials. For such authorized filling of materials the Contractor shall be paid extra at the rate
laid down as per the General Conditions of Contract, if the extra work was ordered by the
Employer in writing. If the contractor should excavate the trench to a greater depth than is
required without a specific order to that effect in writing, the extra depth shall have to be filled
up with concrete at the Contractor's own cost to the requirements and satisfaction of the
Employer.
6.2.4 Refilling : After the sewer or other work has been laid and proved to be water tight, the trench
or other excavation shall be refilled. Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that no
damage shall be caused to the sewer and other permanent works. Filling in the trenches and
upto 50 cms. Above the crown materials placed carefully and consolidated. After this has
been laid, the trench and other excavation shall be refilled carefully in 15 cms. Layers with
materials taken from the excavation, each layer being watered and consolidated.
6.2.5 Settlement and damages : The contractor shall, at his own cost make good promptly, during
the whole period of the works that are in hand, any settlement that may occur in the surfaces
of roads, berms, foot paths, gardens, open spaces, etc, whether public or private caused by
his trenches or by his other excavations and also shall at his own expenses and charge,
repair and make good any damage done to the buildings and other properties.
6.2.6 Disposal of surplus soil : The Contractor shall at his own cost and charge, dispose within
the site all surplus excavated material not required to be used on the works to within a
distance of 300 m.
6.2.7 Timbering of sewer and trenches : The Contractor shall at all times support efficiently and
effectively the sides of the sewer trenches and other excavations by suitable timbering, piling,
sheeting, etc., without any extra cost. All timbering, sheeting and piling with their wallings and
supports shall be of adequate dimensions and strength and fully braced and subsidence of
the walls of the trench. The Contractor shall be held accountable and responsible for the
piling used and for all damages to persons and property resulting from the improper quality,
strength, placing, maintenance or removing of the same.
6.2.8 Removal of water from sewer, trenches, etc : The contractor shall at all times during the
progress of work keep the trenches and excavations free from water which shall be disposed
of by him in a manner as will neither cause injury to the public health nor to the work
completed or in progress nor to the surface of any roads or streets nor cause any interference
with the use of the same.
6.2.9 The width of excavated trench shall be as per the table given below.
WIDTH AT BOTTOM
Upto 100 mm dia pipe Upto 150 mm dia pipe
Excavation upto :
90 cm depth 65 Cm 65 Cm
90 to 150 cm depth 65 Cm 65 Cm
119
150 to 300 cm depth 90 Cm 90 Cm

300 to 500 cm depth 100 Cm 100 Cm
6.2.10 Protection of existing services : All pipes, water mains, cables, etc., met in the course of
excavation shall be carefully protected and supported.
6.2.11 Concreting : All pipes at shallow road crossings and made up ground shall be laid on a bed
of 15 cm concrete with one part of cement four parts of sand and 2 parts of 40 mm gauge
stone metal properly consolidated. Concrete shall be laid to the full width of the trench and
also in haunches.
120
6.3 LAYING AND JOINTING PVC / SW PIPES :
6.3.1 Laying : The pipes shall be carefully laid to the levels and gradients shown on the plans and
sections by making use of sight rails and boning rods, with socket up the gradient.
6.3.2 JOINTING :
For PVC pipes jointing shall be carried out with solvent cement. A uniform coat of solvent
cement shall be applied on outer surface of the pipe and internal surface of fitting. The
spigot of the pipes must be forced well home into its socket, and rotated to ensure even and
proper spreading of the solvent cement. The excess solvent cement shall be removed.
All such joints shall be further protected on the outside by a layer of Chopped Strand matt
Fiber Glass Paste. No rubber ring joints shall be permitted.
For SW pipes hemp rope soaked in neat cement wash shall be passed round the joint &
inserted in it by means of caulking tool. More skins of yarn shall be added & well rammed
home. Cement mortar with one part of cement & one part of sand & with minimum water
content but on no account soft or sloppy, shall be carefully inserted by hand into the joint
with more cement mortar. The joint shall then be finished off neatly outside the socket at an
angle of 45 deg.
The joint shall be cured atleast for seven days.
HDPE pipe shall be Joined by electro fusion welding.
6.3.3 Testing : All lengths of the sewer and drain shall be fully tested for water tightness by means
of water pressure maintained for not less than 30 minutes. Testing shall be carried out from
manhole / chamber to manhole / chamber. All pipes shall be subjected to a test pressure at
least 1.5M head of water at the highest point of the section under test. The pipes shall be
plugged preferably with standard drain plugs (with rubber rings) on both ends. The upper end
shall, however be connected to a pipe for filling with water and getting the required head. The
Contractor shall give water test to the drains and sewers at his own expenses and charges,
as directed by the Architects.
6.4 CAST IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS :
6.4.1 Cast iron soil, waste and vent pipes and fittings shall be heavy quality conforming to IS. 3989
- 1984 or IS 1729 - 1979. C.I water main shall conform to IS 1536 - 1967 and fittings to IS
1537, and 1538 - 1960.
6.4.2 Laying and jointing : The pipes shall be laid, underground, under the floors, or on walls
either buried or exposed as the case may be as shown on the drawings. Pipes shall be laid
and jointed in conformity with the code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes IS :
3114 - 1965. Cast iron pipes shall be jointed by best quality caulking lead free from all
impurities. In wet trenches, joints shall be made with lead wool. The spigot shall be centered
in the adjoining socket by tightly caulking in sufficient turns tarred gaskin to leave unfilled the
required depth of socket for lead. Where the gaskin has been caulked tightly home, a jointing
ring shall be placed round the barrel and against the face of the socket. Molten lead shall
then be poured in to fill the remainder of the socket in one operation. The lead shall then be
solidly caulked with suitable tools by hammering right round the joint, to make up for the
shrinkage of the molten metal on cooling and shall preferably finish 3 mm behind the socket
face. Lead for caulking shall conform to IS 782-1966. The quantity of lead to be filled per
joint in various sizes of cast pipes shall be as follows.
A. Drainage Pipes : Lead/Joint (kg)
50 mm (2) pipe 0.7 Kg/joint (25mm deep)
121
80 mm (3) pipe 1.2 Kg/joint (25 mm deep)

B. Water Main Pipes : Lead/Joint (Kg)
80 mm (93) pipe 1.8

100 mm (4) pipe 2.2
125 mm (5) pipe 2.6
150 mm (6) pipe 3.4
200 mm (8) pipe 5.0
6.4.3 The joints and pipes laid for water supply systems shall be tested to a pressure of 12
Kg/Sqcm for two hours without developing leaks/fall in pressure. The drainage pipelines and
joints shall be tested to a head of 150 cms for two hours without developing leaks/fall in
pressure. In case of leaks the piping shall be redone in such portion and the test repeated till
achieving satisfactory results.
6.4.4 Fixing : Pipes and fittings shall be fixed to walls using proper holder bat clamps, if directed.
The pipes shall be fixed perfectly vertical or in approved alignment. The spigot end shall about
the shoulder of the socket and shall leave no angular space in between. Soil pipes carried up
above the roof shall have A.C/C.I vent cowl. Connections between the main pipe and the
branch pipes shall be made by using appropriate branches and bends invariably with access
doors for cleaning.
6.4.5 Testing : All C.I pipes and fittings, including joints shall be tested by smoke test and left in
working order after completion. Such test shall be recorded jointly by the Project Managers
and Contractor and handed over to the Employer.
6.4.6 Painting : Pipes laid under floor / ground, concrete, etc, shall be given two coats of bitumastic
paint.
6.4.7 Asbestos Cement Pipes :

Where specified, asbestos cement pipes & fittings may be used for vent pipes & rain water
pipes. Asbestos cement pipes shall be of best of quality confirming to IS 1626 1960.
Asbestos cement pipes & fittings shall be jointed by inserting a gasket of hemp saturated with
bitumastic jointing compound & caulked to about 25 mm depth & grouted with stiff cement
mortar of 1:1.
6.6 INSPECTION CHAMBERS AND MANHOLES :
6.6.1 Size of chambers/ manhole : The size given in bill of quantities and drawings shall be
internal size of chamber. The work shall be done strictly as per standard drawing and
following specifications .
6.6.2 Bed Concrete : Shall be in 1:4:8 cement concrete 150 mm thick for inspection chambers, 230
mm for depths upto 2.1 m and 300 mm for greater depths in case of manhole.
6.6.3 Brick Work : Shall be with best quality table molded bricks in 1:6 cement mortar as per
specification for brick masonry.
6.6.4 Plaster : Inside of the walls of chamber/ manhole shall be plastered with 15 mm thick cement
plaster 1:3 and finished smooth with a floating coat of neat cement.
6.6.5 Benching : Channels and benching shall be done in cement concrete 1:3:6 rendered
smooth with neat cement. The following sizes of channels for the bench shall be adopted :
Size of Drain Depth at Center Depth at sides

i.e at walls
122
10 cms (4") 15 cm (6") 25 cm (10")

15 cm (6") 20 cm (8") 30 cm (12")
6.6.6 Chamber/manhole covers : Covers shall be of heavy duty cast iron with lifting hooks as per
IS 1726 - 1991, the details given in the drawing and fixed on the CI frame embedded in
concrete. Cover placed on the frame shall be airtight. Weight of the cover on frame shall be
specified in the schedule of quantities.
6.6.7 Steps : CI steps duly painted shall be provided whenever the depth of the manhole/chamber
is more than 1.2 m as shown in drawing.
6.7 GULLY TRAP CHAMBERS :
PVC gully traps of specified size and as per IS 651-1992 shall be provided. It shall be fixed
on 15 cm.thick and 70 cm square 1:4:8 cement concrete bedding and gully outlet shall be
jointed similar to the jointing of PVC pipes. A brick masonry chamber 300 x 300 mm
(internally) shall be constructed with half brick trap and the wall shall be filled up with 1:3:6
concrete with neat cement. The corners and bottom of the chamber shall be rounded off so
as to slope towards the grating. The clear space between the top of the grating and the
bottom of the inspection cover shall not be less than 280 mm. In addition to 15cm x 15 cm CI
grating, the chamber shall have a CI frame cover (30 cm x 30 cm). It shall be placed on the
top of the brick masonry.
6.8 MODE OF MEASUREMENT :
6.8.1 Excavation (General) : The width of excavation shall be limited as shown in the table. The
Excavation done within the building shall not be measured & paid for.
6.8.2 PVC Pipes/PPR/HDPE PIPES : PVC / SW pipes shall be measured along the center line of
the pipe line including the special in Rmt. length between the inside of the one chamber to
inside of another chamber.
These shall be recorded between socket pipe near gully trap and inside of chamber. The
quoted rate shall be per Rmt. and shall include the following :
a) The cost of pipes, specials and other jointing materials.
b) Laying, jointing and curing.
c) Testing and making good the defects if any.
6.8.3 C.I & AC Pipes : These pipes shall be measured along the center line of the pipe including
all special in Rmt. The quoted rate for respective item shall be per Rmt. and shall include the
following :
6.8.3.1 Cost of respective pipes and specials and jointing materials.
6.8.3.2 Laying, fixing, jointing with necessary clamps, brackets, screws, etc, and curing.
6.8.3.3 Making good all damages to the parts of the building to suit the surroundings.
6.8.3.4 Painting the buried surface of C.I. Pipe with bitumastic paint.
6.8.8.5 Testing and making good the defects if any.
6.8.4 Inspection Chambers : These shall be measured per number and rate quoted also shall be
per number only. The quoted rate shall include all the cost of items specified in the bill of
quantities and specifications viz.
6.8.4.1 Bed concrete.
123
6.8.4.2 Brick work.
6.8.4.3 Plastering.
6.8.4.4 Concrete benching and channeling.
6.8.4.5 Inspection chamber cover and frame including PCC bed for fixing the frame.
6.8.4.6 Keeping holes and embedding pipes for all connections.
6.8.4.7 Excavation, refilling, necessary dewatering and disposing of extra stuff to a

place as directed by the Project Managers.
6.8.4.8 Testing.
6.8.4.9 Curing.
6.8.5 Manhole : These shall be measured in numbers as indicated in the schedule of quantities.
The depth of manhole shall be reckoned from invert of channel to the top of manhole cover.
Quoted rate shall cover the range of + or - 0.24 m on the depth specified in schedule and also
all the cost of items specified in the bill of quantities and specification viz.
6.8.5.1 Bed concrete

6.8.5.2 Brick work.
6.8.5.3 Plastering.
6.8.5.4 Concrete benching and channeling including drop connections.
6.8.5.5 Supply and fix C.I steps.
6.8.5.6 Keeping holes and embedding pipes for all the connections.
6.8.5.7 Excavation, refilling, necessary dewatering and disposing of extra stuff to a place as
directed.
6.8.5.8 Testing.
6.8.5.9 Curing.
6.8.5.10 Cost of CI cover and frame including embedding the frame in concrete bed.
6.8.6 Gully trap chamber : These shall be measured per number and the rate quoted shall be per
number only. The quoted rate shall include all the cost of the items specified in the bill of
quantities and specifications, viz.
6.8.6.1 Bed concrete
6.8.6.2 Brick work.
6.8.6.3 Plastering.
6.8.6.4 Gully trap and grating.
6.8.6.5 Concrete to embed the gully trap.
6.8.6.6 Chamber cover and frame.
6.8.6.7 Keeping holes and embedding pipes for all the connections.
6.8.6.8 Excavation., refilling, necessary dewatering and disposing of extra stuff to a
place as directed.
6.9 Cement Concrete Pipes:
The pipes shall be with or without reinforcement as required and of the class NP2 as
specified. These shall confirm to IS 458-1961. The reinforced cement concrete pipes shall
be manufactured by centrifugal (or spun) process. All pipes shall be true to shape, straight,
perfect sound and free from cracks and flaws. The external and internal surface of the pipes
shall be smooth and hard. The pipes shall be free from defects resulting from imperfect
grading of the aggregate, mixing or molding.
6.9.1 Laying of pipes:
124
Loading, transporting and unloading of concrete pipes shall be done with care. Handling
shall be such as to avoid impact. Gradual unloading by inclined plane or by chain block is
recommended. All pipe sections and connections shall be inspected carefully before being
laid. Broken or defective pipes or connections shall not be used. Pipes shall be lowered into
the trenches carefully. Mechanical appliances may be used. Pipes shall be laid true to line
and grade as specified. Laying of pipe shall proceed upgrade of a slope.
If the pipes have spigot and socket joints, the socket end shall face upstream. In the case of
pipe with joints to be made with loose collars. The collar shall be slipped on before the next
pipe is laid. Adequate and proper expansion joints shall be provided where directed.
In case where the foundation conditions are unusual such as in the proximity of trees or
holes, under existing or proposed manholes etc., the pipe shall be encased all round in
15cm thick cement concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement, 5 fine sand, 10 graded stone aggregated
40mm nominal size) or compacted sand or gravel.
In cases where the natural foundation is inadequate the pipes shall be laid either in
concrete suitably designed structure as specified. If a concrete cradle bedding is used the
th
depth of concrete below the bottom of the pipe shall be at least 1/4 of the internal dia and
shall extend upto the sides of the pipe at least to a distance of of the outside diameter of
pipes 300 mm and in dia.. The pipes laid in trenches in earth shall be bedded evenly and
firmly and as far up the haunches of the pipe as to safely transmit the load expected from
back fill through the pipe to the bed. This shall be done either by excavating the bottom of
the trench to fit the curve of the pipe or by compacting the earth under around the curve of
the pipe to form an even bed. Necessary provision shall be made for joints wherever
required.
When the pipe is laid in the trench in rock, hard clay, or other hard material, the space
below the pipe shall be excavated and replaced with an equalizing bed of concrete, sand or
compact earth. In on place shall pipe be laid directly on such hard material.
When the pipes are laid completely above the ground the foundations shall be made even
and sufficiently compacted to support the pipe line without any material settlement.
Alternatively the pipe line shall be supported on PCC saddle blocks. Similar arrangement
shall be made to retain the pipe line in the proper alignment, such as by shaping the top of
the supports to fit the lower part of the pipe, the distance between the supports shall be no
case exceed the length of the pipe. The pipe shall be supported as far as possible close to
the joints. In no case shall the joint come in center of the span. Care shall be taken to see
that superimposed loads greater than the total load equivalent to the weight of the pipe
when running full shall not be permitted.
6.9.2 JOINTS OF PIPES :
Joints are generally of rigid type. When specified flexible type joints may also be provided.
1. SPIGOT AND SOCKET JOINT (RIGID) :
The spigot of each pipe shall be slipped home well in to the socket of the pipe previously
laid and adjusted in the correct position. The opening of the joints shall be filled with stiff
mixture of cement mortar in the proportion 1:2 (1 cement, 2 fine sand), which shall be
rammed with caulking tool.
125
After a days work any extraneous material shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and
the newly made joint shall be cured.
6.9.3 THE TESTING OF JOINTS & REFILLING OF TRENCHES :

The testing of joints, refilling of trenches for concrete pipes shall be as per IS.
126
6.10 MANHOLES, INSPECTION CHAMBERS, STORM WATER GULLIES, ETC.,
6.10.1 INSPECTION CHAMBERS :
Where depth of sewer is less than 1.5m rectangular chambers shall be used having size as
specified. Usual sizes are 600 x 450 or 600 x 600 or 600 x 900 or 1200 x 1200. These shall
be constructed in the sewer line at such places and dimensions as indicated on the drawing
sizes specified shall be clear internal dimensions of the chamber.
6.10.2 MANHOLES :
Where depth of sewer exceeds 1.5m, circular conical manholes shall be provided. Various
types and sizes of the manholes are specified for different depths typical drawing of various
types of manholes shall be supplied to the successful bidder. In the absence of such
drawings the standard drawings of the CPWD or local body, if available, shall be followed.
Manholes and inspection chambers which are provided on roads or where heavy vehicular
traffic is expected are provided with heavy duty CI air tight frame and cover. For those built
on foot paths, carriage drives and cycle tracks, medium duty covers are provided. For
locations within domestic premises or areas not subjected to wheel traffic loads they shall
be provided light duty cover.
6.10.3. Storm water gullies shall be constructed for admitting storm water from the court yard area.
It is constructed of specified size and is provided and pre-cast RCC or CI grating on top of
admitting storm water run off into it. A typical drawing shall be provided to the successful
bidder giving all details of construction to the successful bidder.
7.0 WATER SUPPLY :
7.1 GI / UPVC PIPES AND FITTINGS :
UPVC pipes shall be Blue threaded (Schedule 80) pipes as per IS 4985 1988 with GI
specials of screwed type of approved makes.
The GI pipes shall be of class C unless otherwise specified and shall be of galvanized iron,
screwed socketed and shall conform to IS: 1239 - 1990. All fittings shall be malleable iron
galvanized fittings of approved make.
7.1.1 Laying and Fixing :
7.1.2 Where pipes have to be cut or rethreaded, ends shall be carefully filed out so that
no obstruction to bore is offered. For internal work all pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly
vertical and horizontal, either by means of standard pattern holder bat clamps keeping the
pipes (12mm) clear of the wall everywhere or concealed as directed.
For external work, G.I/ UPVC pipes and fittings shall be laid in trenches. The width of the
trench shall be the minimum width required for working. The top level of pipes laid
underground shall not be less than 60 cms from the finished ground level. The work of
excavation and refilling shall be done as specified elsewhere, or concealed as directed.
7.1.3 Painting : Painting the completed line with one coat of Primer and two coats of synthetic
enamel paint of approved colour and make as per IS Code.
7.1.4 Under Ground Piping : Pipes shall be buried in earth shall be wrapped with pipe coat
membrane consisting of seven layers of polyethylene polymerized bitumen and polyester mat
127
(2 mm thk wall embedded) laid over a suitable primer of fiber and solvent based rubber
modified bituminuous primer. Material to be laid strictly as per manufacturers specification
and laid under technical assistance of manufacturers representatives as per IS 10221.
7.1.5 Testing : Before any pipes are painted or covered, they shall be tested to a hydrostatic
pressure of 7 Kg/sqcm. Pressure shall be maintained for at least eight hours without
appreciable drop in pressure. In addition to the sectional testing of water supply pipes, the
Contractor shall test the whole installation to the entire satisfaction of the Project Managers.
The contractor shall rectify any leakages, failure of fittings or valves.
7.1.6 Mode of Measurements : GI/ UPVC pipes above and below ground shall be measured
along the center line of the pipes and fittings. The quoted rate for respective item shall be per
Rmt and shall include the following :
a) Cost of respective pipes and specials.
b) laying, fixing and jointing with necessary clamps.
c) Cutting holes and chases in walls, floors, etc, and making good the same.
d) Testing and making good the defects, if any.
7.2 SOIL, WASTE VENT AND ANTI-SIPHONAGE PIPES AND FITTINGS :
7.2.1 SOIL, WASTE PIPES INSIDE THE TOILET :
All soil, waste and anti-siphonage pipes and fittings used within sunken floor areas or below
floor slabs (suspended pipes). Shall be UPVC socket and spigot type pipes conforming to
relevant IS 4985 and 13592 or its subsequent revision.
All 75mm /90mm/110mm/160mm pipes being laid below the floor, in earth or in sunken
areas and also suspended from slabs shall be of 6 kg/cm2 classification. These shall be
supported within sunken areas by slab, shall be done so by using 3mm dia hot dip
galvanized Hi Tech Supports and anchored by means of Anchor fasteners.
Where specified rigid PVC/ SWR PVC pipes & fittings may be used for vent, condensate,
waste pipes. Rigid PVC pipes shall be of best of quality confirming to IS 4985 1988. PVC
pipes shall be jointed by using good quality rubber lubricant & tested for leakage as per the
class of pipe.
7.2.2 JOINTING :
Jointing shall be carried out with solvent cement. A uniform coat of solvent cement shall be
applied on outer surface of the pipe and internal surface of fitting. The spigot of the pipes
must be forced well home into its socket, and rotated to ensure even and proper spreading
of the solvent cement. The excess solvent cement shall be removed.
All such joints shall be further protected on the outside by a layer of Chopped Strand matt
Fiber Glass Paste. No rubber ring joints shall be permitted within sunken floors/ below
slab.
7.2.3 The sizes of the branch waste pipes for different fitting shall be generally as follows :-
Lavatory Basin : 40 dia

Urinal : 40 dia
Sink : 40 dia
Nahani Trap : 50 dia / 75 dia
Special Floor Trap : 75 or 100 dia as required with or without inlet
receiving cap.
128
All waste pipes of 40mm/50mm/63mm/75mm shall be of 10 Kg/cm2 classification.

All such pipes shall be supported and clamped at 100cm c/c.
All waste pipes being connected to a floor trap, shall be connected only through an inlet
receiving cap, with a inlet connection joint of appropriate diameter, capable of being pasted
to the floor trap providing for a leak proof joint.
The inlet receiving pipes shall extend to the toilet finished floor where its joints with the floor
shall be sealed with Silicone Sealant.
7.2.4 W.C. Pan connectors shall be as to suit the requirement with 75 dia, vent horn for
connection to the antisiphonage pipe with pan connector of PVC.
7.2.5 Connection to the sewage or storm water collection sumps to be perfectly water tight and as
specified in the drawing.
7.2.6 The floor traps for toilet blocks shall be molded PVC/ CI or fabricated from UPVC 6 kg/cm2
pipes with or without an inlet receiving cap. The traps shall have a minimum water seals of
40mm to 50mm.
7.2.7 Bathroom CP grating shall be of SS of the cockroach free design, of the best approved
standard and design.
7.2.8 The pipes shall be laid to a slope of minimum 1 in 100 and preferably in 1 in 50, and
connected to the drain.
7.2.9 SOIL, WASTE PIPE AND ANTI-SIPHONAGE VERTICAL, EXTERNAL PIPES :
All soil, waste and anti-siphonage pipes and fittings used as vertical external pipes within
the shafts shall be PVC SWR Grade socket and spigot type pipes confirming to relevant IS
or its subsequent revision.
All pipes being used on exposed surface shall be UV protected with a UV inhibitor built in
during Molding / extrusion in case of PVC pipes.
All such pipes shall use only Rubber Ring Joints.
No pasted joints shall be permitted on external piping.
All external pipes shall be mounted on special sliding brackets of Galvanized MS grouted to
the Duct wall, with the pipes being held to it using GI U clamps. These brackets shall
provide for a least 50mm clear working space behind the pipes.
129
7.3 BUTTERFLY VALVES :
Butterfly valves shall confirm to the following specification
BODY Heavy duty CI to IS 210 Gr FG 220 & BS 1452

Seating Molded insitu resilient lining of black Nitrile rubber
Disk Nylon coated SG iron to IS 1865/SF 400 /12 7 BS 2729 Gr 420/12
Shaft shafts are made of SS AISI 410 only, flanged end valves to be used with flanges,
drilled to BS10 table F, valves shall be capable of being locked in open position. Hand
wheel shall be with vertical gear unit for smooth opening & closing of the valve, key rod with
MS coated extended spindle to be provided where ever the valves are not approachable
from the ground surface
Mode of measurements:
The valves will be paid in numbers along with companion flanges & shall include.
Cost of valve with jointing materials

Fixing & jointing with necessary bolts, nuts, washers, Rubber gasket, etc
Testing & making good the defects, if any,
7.4 WATER FITTINGS ( BIB COCK, STOP COCK, ETC. ) :
7.4.1 All water fittings shall be of approved quality and design and shall generally comply to latest
I.S specifications. The fittings and joints shall be tested as specified for pipeline to ensure that
the joints are leak proof. Defective fittings and the joints shall be repaired or re-done/replaced
as directed.
7.4.2 Mode of Measurement : These items shall be measured in number unless not included in
other items viz. wash basins, inlets to cisterns, etc, and shall include.
a) Cost of material.
b) Cost of fixing accessories like bolts, nuts, washers.
7.5 VALVES :
7.5.1 The body covers of the valve shall be of tough, homogeneous gun metal, the spindle of
forged bronze and nut and valve seats of high graded gun metal machine faced. It shall be
fitted with C.I wheel or a cap of standard type, marked with an arrow to show the direction of
turn for opening of the valve. It shall have flanged ends drilled to Indian Standard
Specifications or screwed ends as specified.
7.5.2 The valves shall work easily and smoothly under all conditions and shall be water tight when
closed under head of 92 mtrs or such greater head as may be specified.
7.5.3 The diameter of the water way, when the valve is fully opened shall not be less than the
diameter of the pipe.
7.5.4 Fixing of the valve shall be done by means of bolts, nuts and 3 mm thick rubber insertions
with flanges, for flanged ends and with GI collars and unions for screwed ends. Rate includes
bolts, nuts, washers and insertion, if any.
7.5.5 Mode of Measurements : Valve shall shall include
a) Cost of valve and jointing materials.

b) Fixing and jointing with necessary bolts, nuts, washers, rubber gaskets, insertion,
130
etc.
c) Testing and making good the defects if any.
7.6 Ball Cocks :
7.6.1 Ball cocks used for storage tanks shall be high pressure brass with brass lever rods and PVC
floats.
7.6.2 Measurements : Ball cocks shall be measured by the number unless called for with the item
in the schedule of quantities.
7.7 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE :
Pressure reducing valves shall be Leader/ITZAP make brass pilot operated spring loaded
valves for reducing pressure from 6.0 kg/cm2 suitable for specified dia of pipe.
7.8 RAIN WATER PIPES :
7.8.1 RIGID PVC PIPES :
a) GENERAL :
PVC pipes shall confirm to the relevant specification of IS 4985-1988 or they should be of
class II (4 KSC) type pipes. They shall be made of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and shall be
sound with good surface finish, mechanical strength and capacity. During manufacture only
those additives may be added to produce and above characteristics. No additives shall be
added separately or together in quantities sufficient to constitute a toxic hazard, or impair the
fabrication or welding properties of the pipe or impair its physical or chemical properties.
Addition of the manufacturers own re-work material during manufacture is permissible only
upto 10%. All pipes shall be spigot and socket type (bell type).
b) Pipes sizes and wall thickness : shall be as specified in the tender/ IS 4985 1988.
c) Tolerances :
Tolerances on diameters and wall thickness shall be as per IS 4985 - 1988.
d) Fittings :
All fitting shall be injection molded socket fittings with or without inspection doors as specified
and shall be in accordance with the requirements of the relevant IS 13592. Pressure ratings
and tolerances shall be as per IS 4985.
131
e) Laying and Jointing :
Pipes shall be cut to length required including the portion to be inserted in the socket with a
hacksaw. The pipe shall be cut square. Pipes and sockets shall be clean and dry and burrs
removed both inside and outside with a file. The surface to be in contact shall be roughened
with emery paper, and dry fit checked.
A thick coat of solvent cement shall be applied to the outer surface of the pipe and a thin coat
on the inside surface of the socket by means of a brush. Solvent cement shall be of approved
make. The fitting shall be turned for 90 degree to ensure even distribution of cement while
applying. Excess cement shall be wiped off.
All such joints shall be further protected on the outside by a layer of chopped strand mat
fiberglass paste.
GI clamps shall be used for clamping to walls, etc., pipe shall be clamped at least 2 away
from the wall surface using GI clamps screwed to the wooden plugs, not more than 1 meter
apart.
F) Clean Outs :
PVC collar ring shall be fitted to the spigot end of the PVC pipe by means of solvent cement.
The spigot end of the pipe to be joined shall then be inserted into the socket and aligned.
Tarred spun yarn shall be caulked into the angular space between the spigot and socket upto
a height of 20mm. The remaining space shall be filled with CM 1:2 using very little water and
well caulked using wooden caulking tool and finished off neatly. Joints shall be kept for 24
hours. Alternatively, if so directed by Architects, the following method may be adopted.
The spigot end of the PVC pipe should be jointed to a PVC collar using solvent cement as
detailed. The other end of the collar is then jointed to the socket of the CI pipe using solvent
cement.
7.9 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS :
Supports, pedestals and base for inspection chambers, gully traps and pipes shall be in 1:2:4
cement concrete mix.
7.9.1 Pipes sleeves and inserts, etc., through RCC walls either external or internal shall be of CI or
MS provided with puddle flange. M.S Puddle flange shall be galvanized.
7.9.2 During concreting threaded ends of the pipes are to be blinded with threaded blind plug.
7.9.3 Connection to the sewage or storm water collection sumps to be perfectly water tight and as
specified in the drawing.
7.9.4 Rain water flashing shall be of 150/100 dia with CI dome shape grating and extension piece.
7.9.5 The floor traps for toilet blocks shall be PVC with SS grating, bolted down design. The traps
shall be provided with minimum water seals of 2 to 2.
7.9.6 Bathroom CP grating shall be of bolted down design out of heavy cast brass with a chromium
plating of the best approved standard.
7.9.7 Cast iron gratings shall be flat with perfect edge of the best quality procurable of the specified
width and thickness and in the available lengths.
8.0 SANITARY INSTALLATION AND FIXTURES :
132
8.1 All fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workman like manner true to line and as recommended by
the manufacturer or shown on the drawings. Care shall be taken to fix all fixtures, brackets
and accessories by proper wooden cleats, rawl plugs, bolts and nuts as each fixtures will
warrant with the correct size of screws, nuts or bolts.
8.2 Care shall be taken in fixing all approved chromium plated fixtures and accessories so as not
to leave any tool marks or damages on the finish. All such fixtures shall be tightened with
fixed spanners. Use of Stiltson type pipe wrenches with toothed jaws shall not be allowed for
this purpose.
8.3 All fixtures shall be thoroughly tested after connecting up the drainage and water supply
system. All fixtures shall be thoroughly finished and any leakage in piping, valves and waste
fittings shall be corrected to the entire satisfaction of the Architects.
8.4 Upon completion of the work, remove all labels, stickers, plasters etc, from the fixtures and
clean all fixtures with soap and water so as to present a neat and clean toilet.
8.5 INDIAN WATER CLOSET :
8.5.1 Indian Water Closet sets with 'P' or 'S' trap shall be the type as given in the schedule with 32
mm PVC flush pipes, high level cistern, PVC inlet connection and brass strip cock. India
Water Closet and trap shall be set in lime surki concrete 1:4 and flush with the floor.
8.5.2 Measurement : Indian Water Closet shall be measured per number and quoted rate shall
include,
a) The cost of W.C pan with 'P' or 'S' trap, cistern, PVC inlet pipe, CP brass stop
cock and pair of white glazed foot resets.
b) Setting the closets in lime surki concrete including the cost of surki concrete.
c) Painting the brackets and cistern.
8.6 EUROPEAN TYPE WATER CLOSET :
8.6.1 The closet shall be of vitreous China wall hung box rim pattern having back inlet and P/S trap.
Each closet and cistern shall be provided with the following accessories :
a) Seat : Double flapped heavy plastic seat cover of approved quality and color
with rubber buffers with C.P brass bar and screws and fixed to the pan.
b) 32 mm CP flush Valve set / Cistern.
c) CI chair with bolts / bidet bolts for mounting the closet.
8.6.2 MEASUREMENT : These items shall be measured per number and the rate quoted shall be
per number only. The quoted rate shall include.
a) The cost of W.C pan, trap with brackets / bolts and C.P flush pipe, CP brass flush valve
Set / Cistern.
b) Plastic seat cover.
c) Jointing and fixing material.
d) Painting of brackets.
8.7 WASH BASINS :
133
8.7.1 These shall be of white vitreous China of best quality manufactured by an approved firm of
size as specified in the schedule of quantities. The basins shall be supported on a pair of C.I
brackets of approved design.
8.7.2 Each wash basin shall be provided with 1 No. 15 mm CP brass Pillar cock,15 mm CP brass
stopcock, 8 mm PVC/CP inlet pipe, 32 mm CP waste coupling, 32 mm CP bottle trap, GI pipe.
8.7.3 Measurement : This item shall be measured per number and the rate quoted shall be per
number only. The quoted rate shall include:
a) The cost of wash basin with bracket and other items stated above.
b) Jointing and fixing materials.
c) Painting of brackets.
8.8 SINK :
8.8.1 These shall be white vitreous China of best quality and sizes as per the schedule of
quantities. The sink shall be supported on necessary brackets.
8.8.2 Each sink shall be provided with 40 mm CP waste coupling & 40 mm GI waste pipe with bottle
trap.
8.8.3 Measurement: Sink shall be measured by number including all items stated and shall include
the cost of all fixing materials.
8.9 URINALS:
These shall be of vitreous China of best quality manufactured by an approved firm of size as
specified in the schedule of quantities. Each Urinal shall be provided with 1 No. CP dome
coupling, 1 No. 15mm CP brass angular stop cock with wall flange/ urinal flush valve set
complete with control cock and connected CP pipe to the urinal spreader. Large flat urinal
should be supported with CI brackets of approved design.
8.9.1 Measurement: Urinals shall include.
a) 15mm CP brass urinal flush valve set complete with control cock/ 15 mm CP push
cock/ 15 mm CP angular stop cock with wall flange and 300 mm long connecting pipe
with nut, CP urinal spreader, CP waste dome grating.
b) 32mm CP brass bottle trap of casted type/ 32 mm PVC waste pipe.
c) 40 mm OD PVC waste pipe concealed in wall.
d) GI pipe concealed in wall with required specials for water supply.
e) Jointing and fixing material.
f) Painting the brackets.
9.0 TOILET REQUISITES :
9.1 MIRROR :
The mirror shall be of the best quality India make 5.5 mm thick. The size shall be as specified
and of approved design and make. 8 mm thick commercial plywood shall be fixed to the back
of the mirror and wall with C.P side clips and screws.
134
9.2 TOWEL RAIL :
Towel rail shall be of anodized aluminum C.P with reinforced bends and circular flanges. The
size of the rail shall be as per Schedule of Quantities. The bracket shall be fixed by means of
CP brass screws to wooden cleats firmly embedded in the wall.
9.3 TOILET PAPER HOLDER :
Toilet Paper Holder shall be of white vitreous China or as specified in Schedule of Quantities.
9.4 FLOOR TRAPS :
The trap shall be of CI/PVC, self cleaning and deep water seal type with 50 to 65 mm water
seal. It shall have a 100 mm dia grating. These shall be fixed in concrete to the required level
and position.
9.5 SHOWER :
These shall be C.P finish swivel type as specified in Schedule of Quantities.
9.6 TOWEL RING, SOAP TRAY, CLOTH STAND ETC :
These shall be of CP/anodized aluminum as described in the schedule of quantities and as

per the displayed sample. These shall be fixed by means of C.P brass screws to wooden
cleats, firmly embedded in the wall.
9.7 BOTTLE TRAPS :
Bottle traps (for wash basins, sinks, urinals, etc.,) shall be deep seal (minimum 6 cms seal)
cast brass bottle traps, heavy chromium plated. All bottle traps shall be provided with suitable
cleaning eye, extension piece, flare nuts all chromium plated. Bottle traps shall be of
approved make and design. Traps for wash basins shall be 32mm for urinal and wash basin
and 40mm for sinks.
9.8 MEASUREMENT :
All these items shall include :
a) The cost of respective materials.
b) Necessary fixtures.
c) Fixing in position.
10.0 WATER HEATER :
These shall be of best approved make and type and capacity as per schedule of quantities.
They shall be mounted on the wall/left with necessary bolts of approved make. They shall
have 8 mm PVC inlet pipe, 12 mm lead/copper pipe outlet, 15 mm non-return valve. These
shall be measured per number and the quoted rate shall include.
a) Cost of water heater with all the built -in electrical accessories like pilot lamp,
thermostat, standard length of cable and 3 pin 15A plug.
b) PVC inlet lead outlet pipe and non-return valve.
c) Fixing accessories like bolts, nuts, etc.
135
11.0 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS :
11.1 HANGERS & SUPPORTERS:
11.1.2 GENERAL:
Provided proper solid angle iron/channel section, supports for all pipes complete with clamps.
Wherever comes, provided wooden guide to support pipe on the angle iron hangers/supports.
For attachment in concrete, use Hitech fasteners or anchor plug type inserts of equipment.
Provide hangers with in 900 mm of all changes in direction of pipes. A minimum of three
hangers per expansion band wherever shown in drawing.
Provided all additional structural steel angles, channels of the members whether specifically
shown or not but are required for proper support.
Where necessary additional hangers to be provided to arrest water hammers or hydraulic

resonance with proper rubber padding.
Space hangers as noted below, except on all soil pipes, which shall have a hanger of multiple
fittings.
Sufficient hangers shall be provided to maintain proper slope without sagging. In case of
angle suspended line, the following is suggested.
Pipe Sizes Hanger Rod Dia.
20 through 50 mm 6 mm
65 through 125 mm 10 mm
150 and over 15 mm
Pipe size Spacing of supports
12 to 40 mm 1.0 m apart
50 and above 1.5 m apart or as per IS
Provide floor stands, wall brackets of masonry pillars etc. for all lines running near the floor or
near walls for those lines which cannot be properly supported or suspended from the walls or
floors. Pipe lines near concrete or masonry walls may be hung also by hangers carried from
wall brackets at a higher level than pipes. Hanging of any pipe from another pipe is prohibited.
11.1.3 HANGERS :
Band type hangers shall be provided. Hot water piping is to be provided with suspended
supports as far as possible. Note that strap hangers are not permitted and clamps should be
of removable type.
136
PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES
1. All items of work mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities shall be read and executed strictly
in accordance with the description of the item in the Schedule of Quantities & read in
conjunction with the appropriate IS and conditions of Contract.
2. The rate for each item of work included in the bill of quantities shall unless expressly stated
otherwise included cost of: -
a) All materials, fixing materials, accessories, hardware, operations, tools, equipment,

consumables, civil works wherever involved and incidentals required in preparation
for in the full and entire execution and completion of the work called for in the item as
per specification and drawings completely.
b) Wastage on materials and labour.
c) All taxes, duties, octroi, including works contract tax, sales tax, transit insurance,
packing and forwarding charges, loading, transportation, unloading, handling,
hoisting, to all levels, setting and fixing in position, disposal of debris and all other
137
labour necessary in accordance with contract documents, good practice and

recognized principles.
d) Liabilities, obligations and risks arising out of conditions of contract.
e) Liason service charges.
f) Preparation of shop drawing, As built drawing, O & M Manuals, Soft Copies CD to

be submitted after final completion of work.
3. All requirements of system whether such of them are mentioned in the item or not the
specifications and drawings are to be read as complimentary to and part of the schedule of
quantities and any work called for in one shall be taken as required for all.
4. In the event of conflict between the bill of quantities and other documents, the most stringent
shall apply and interpretation of the Architect shall be final and binding.
5. The installation price of switchboards, metering panels, DB's or any other items shall include
supply and fixing of supporting steel structures/MS channels grouting of the same civil works
etc., as required.
6. No change in unit rate shall be allowed for any change in quantity or for any other reason
whatsoever.
7. Supply of materials shall mean supply of materials at site. The rate for supply shall include all
taxes, octroi, insurance, packing and forwarding charges, transportation, unloading at site.
However the quote should indicate the tax structure separately with necessary details.
8. The successful contractors shall submit the Schematic diagrams, fabrication drawings with
details of all equipments wirings diagrams etc., for approval prior to supply/commencement of
such works. The approval of these drawings will be general and will not absolve to contractor
of the responsibility of the correctness of these drawings. Atleast four copies of the approved
drawings shall be supplied to Consultants for their distribution to various agencies at site at no
cost of Owner.
9. The tenderers must see the site conditions such as type of soil, locations etc., and take all
factors into consideration while quoting the rates as no extra cost will be allowed on any
ground arising out of or relating to the site conditions.
10. Any error in description or in quantity or omission of items from the contract shall not vitiate
this contract but shall be corrected and deemed to be a variation required by the
Architect/Owners.
11. The Liason Service Charges shall include the following:

i) Follow up expenses with the Local Statutory authorities from the drawing approval
upto servicing the installation and getting the safety certificate.
ii) Preparation of detailed drawings required by the Local Statutory Authorities.
iii) Obtaining approval of drawings and installation from Local statutory Authorities as
applicable.
iv) Obtaining route drawings from Local Statutory Authorities as applicable.
v) All incidental charge/expenses associated with the above work as applicable.
Official deposits paid to the above agencies will be reimbursed separately at actuals by the
Owners.
138
12. The tenderer shall take into account the expenses of pre-commissioning tests to be
conducted as per specification of the complete installation by licensed agencies.
13. Tenders to submit performance curves, Schematic & GA drawing of pumps, Hydropneumatic
system and other bought out components along with offer for proper evaluation.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FIRE PROTECTION WORKS
139
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM.
B. SPECIFICATION FOR ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION

AND ALARM SYSTEM.
C. SPECIFICATION FOR PHOTOELECTRIC TYPE ANALOGUE

ADDRESSABLE SMOKE DETECTORS
D. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE TYPE

HEAT DETECTOR
E. SPECIFICATION FOR ANALOGUE ADRESSABLE PUSH BUTTON TYPE

MANUAL CALL POINT
F. SPECIFICATIONS FOR OTHER ACCESSORIES OF ALARM SYSTEM
140
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK
Following are the different items of work which have to be designed, supplied, erected, tested
and commissioned along with getting the entire system approved from Local Statutory
Authority.
1.1 Automatic Fire Hydrant System consisting of Diesel Engine (Main pump), Electrical Pump &
Jockey Pumps, M.S. Piping with fittings, Valves, Yard Hydrants, Hose Cabinets and Hose
Reels.
1.2 Automatic sprinklers system consisting of Sprinklers, Installation control valve, G.I
Piping, Supports and etc.,
2.0 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS:
The installation shall conform in all respects to the following broad list of standards in general
and in particular the materials used shall bear prevailing ISI marking :-
a) IS: 901-1975 : Specification for coupling, double male

and double female, instantaneous pattern for fire
fighting.
141
b) IS: 902-1974 : Specifications for suction hose coupling for fighting

purposes.
c) MSS SP 67 : Butterfly Valves.
d) API 609 : Butterfly valves, lug type and wafer type.
e) IS 1536-1976 : Centrifugally cast (spun) cast iron pressure pipe for water
gas & sewage.
f) IS: 1239 : Mild steel tube, tubular and other wrought steel
fittings.
g) IS 1538 1978 : Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water gas & sewage.
h) IS: 8423-1977 : Controllers per collating hose for fire fighting.
i) IS: 5290-1983 : Landing valves.
j) IS: 5306 : Code of practice for fire extinguishing installation
and equipment on premises.
k) API: 610 : Centrifugal pump for general refinery service.
l) IS: 1648-1966 : Code of practice for fire of building (General) fire
Lighting equipments its maintenance.
m) IS: 3844-1966 : Code of practice for installation for internal fire
hydrants in multi storey buildings.
n) IS: 2871-1983 : Branch pipe, universal for fire fighting purposes.
o) IS: 884-1969 : First Aid hose reel for fire fighting.
p) IS: 5132-1968 : Hose reel tubing for fire protection system.
q) BS: 5155 : Cast iron and carbon steel butterfly valves for
general purpose.
r) IS: 2190-1979 : Code of practice for selection, installation and

maintenance of portable fire extinguishers.
s) IS: 8090-1992 : Specification for coupling branch pipe, nozzle used

in hose reel tubing for fire fighting.
t) IS: 3582-1984 : Specification for basket strainer for fire fighting

purpose.
u) IS: 908-1975 : Specification for fire hydrant, stand post type.
v) IS: 884-1985 : Specification for first aid hose reel for fire fighting.
w) IS : 780 : Specification for CI Sluice Valve.
x) IS : 10221 : Specification for Anticorrosive Treatment.
y) Latest edition of Fire Protection Manual and Sprinkler Hand Book of the Tariff
Advisory Committee/NFPA.
3.0 DRAWINGS:
The drawings enclosed herewith are for the general guidance to the tenderers. The
Contractor shall upon the award of the work, furnish detailed shop drawing necessary to
carryout the work at site within 15 days. These shall be submitted for approval to the
Architects/Owners. The work shall be commenced only after the approval of drawing by the
Architects/Owners.
142
3.1 Drawing/Information Required from Successful Tenderer within 15 days after award of
work:
a) Pump GA and Cross sectional drawings.
b) Performance curve for the pump.
c) Necessary civil scope drawing for the system.
d) Bar chart showing engineering, manufacturing and dispatch of each equipment

and erection services.
e) Drawing, literature and technical particulars of all bought out items.
f) Control logic diagram for the pump to start.
g) Schedule for valves and piping material.
4.0 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
The contractor shall arrange all necessary inspection by the Local fire authority. He
shall also arrange for all the test, obtain and deliver to the Owner any approval
required as per the local by-laws. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to
prepare and submit the drawings.
5.0 PAINTING All piping, equipment, cabinets furnished under this specification shall be properly
painted with two coats of synthetic enamel paint after installation and shall meet the
requirements as outlined in Fire Protection Manual. Paint used for this work will be lead free
quality. The cost of painting deemds to be inclusive in the respective items.
6.0 GUARANTEE:
The contractor shall guarantee the material and workmanship of the entire system are of first
class quality and shall correspond to standard Engineering Practice. All the
equipments/apparatus shall be guaranteed to yield the specified rating and design capacities,
speeds. Any defective equipment/material/workmanship found short of the specified quality
shall be rejected contractor shall make good the rejected items at his own cost. Guarantee
certificate of equipments from suppliers/manufacturers shall be handed over to the Owner.
7.0 Defects & Liability
All the equipment/material and the system shall be guaranteed against defective material and
workmanship for a period of 12 months from the date of commissioning and handling over the
the Owners along with all relevant documentation. The contractor shall repair/rectify or
replace all the defective materials, components free of cost. In addition, normal maintenance
shall be carried out periodically during the defects and liability period including replacement of
spares, as required.
8.0 Instruction Manual/Completion Drawings/Training:
At the completion of the work, contractor shall furnish final completion drawings to the
desired format if any. The contractor shall train the Employer's personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the system for one month.
9.0 Testing:
The contractor shall arrange to test the entire system as per the procedure enumerated under
particular specifications, after the erection is completed. The tests shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of Architects/Owners. The results of the tests shall be submitted to the Owner in
triplicate. If the results of the tests are not found to be satisfactory by the
143
Architects/Engineer-in-charge, necessary rectifications shall be done until the test results are
found to be satisfactory. The installation shall be deemed to be completed only after the
successful completion of the tests.
10.0 Technical Data:
The tenderers shall furnish data of their equipments as per the proforma under 'Technical
Data'. The tenders without technical data is liable to be rejected.
11.0 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS:
11.1 Data:
a) Type : Automatic Fire Hydrant System.

b) No. of Fire Pumps : 1 Jockey Pump, 1 Electrical Pump & 1 No.
: Diesel Main Pump.
c) Static Water Storage : 200,000 Ltrs in two compartments.
11.2 Piping :
Under ground piping shall be Tyton sockets spigot type conforming to class A IS 1536. The
piping shall be laid not less than one meter below the ground level, suitable masonry
supports, concrete anchor blocks of suitable design shall be provided at every change in
direction of pipeline both horizontal or vertical and near every pipe joints, where soil conditions
are unsatisfactory. All fittings shall be cast iron heavy grade confirming to IS :1538.
Above ground piping shall be mild steel tubes of heavy grade unless and until specified
confirming to IS:1239 Part I. Mild steel pipes shall be provided with welded joints only
unless flanges are warranted. All fittings shall be medium grade wrought or mild steel
confirming to A 234 Gr. WPB sch.40 (IS:1239 Part II). The flanges shall be drilled as per
relevant Indian standards.
Flanges shall be faced and shall have jointing of rubber insertion of Neoprene Gasket. In case
of Tyton pipes, the joint shall be made by using rubber gaskets as per manufacturer,s
specification. The joints shall be capable of withstanding a pressure of 10.5 KSC. All the
above ground piping shall be supported by angle iron brackets on walls or suspended by
hangers from ceiling or concrete pedestals at some places. Piping above ground shall be
painted with two coats of approved enamel over a coat of primer after the installation and
testing.
144
Anticorrosive Treatment For Underground Piping:
M.S pipe laid outdoor in trenches / burried in earth shall be wrapped with pipe coat membrane
consisting of seven layers of polyethylene polymerized bitumen and polyester mat laid over a
suitable primer of fiber and solvent based rubber modified bituminous primer of density 0.9
gems/cum applied at the rate of approx 200 -250 gms/sq.m. Material to be laid strictly as per
manufacturer's specification and laid under technical assistance of manufacturer's
representative.
Pipes passing through masonry walls,foundation, beams shall be taken through embedded
pipe sleeve of same material. The pipe sleeve size to be atleast 11/2 times the diameter of
the crossing pipeline. The pipeline running below floor shall be given anticorrosive treatment
same as for underground piping.
11.3 Butterfly Valves :
Butterfly Valves shall conform the following specification :
Body : High duty cast iron to IS 210 Gr. FG 220 and BS 1452 Gr. 220.
Seating : Molded insitu resilient lining of black nitrile rubber.
Disk : Nylon coated S.G. Iron to IS 1865/SG 400/12 and BS 2729 Gr.
420/12.
Shaft : The shafts are made of stainless steel AISI 431.

Only flanged end valves to be used with flanges drilled to BS 10 Table F.
Valves shall be capable of being locked in open position. Hand wheel
shall be with vertical gear unit for smooth opening and closing of the valve.
Key rods with M.S. coated extended spindles to be provided whenever the
valves are not approachable from the ground surface.
11.4 Non-return Valves:
Non-return valve shall be of cast iron with gunmetal seat, non-return valves shall be of flanged
type. Spring-loaded valves shall not be used. The valves shall be suitable for a test pressure
of 21 Kgs/cm.
11.5 Hydrant Valves (Landing Valves):
Landing valves shall be Gun Metal 63mm dia oblique female instantaneous pattern with caps
and chains. Landing valves shall conform to IS:5290 in all respects. Double headed landing
valves shall have separate control valves. Landing valves shall be of gun metal and fitted
with instantaneous coupling conforming to IS:901. The coupling shall be fitted with an internal
plug secured by a chain. Landing valves shall be installed on hydrant risers at a height of 1.0
to 1.2 Mtrs from the floor level. The landing valves shall be connected to the wet riser stand
pipes by means of a suitable tee, the cost of which is deemed to be included in the unit rate
for piping.
11.6 Hose Pipes:
All hose shall be of 63 mm dia meter made of RRL hose as per IS: 636, Type-I.
11.7 Branch Piping and Nozzle:
145
Branch pipes shall be of gun metal to fit into the instantaneous coupling. Nozzle shall be of
spray or fog type of diameter of not less than 16 mm and not more than 25mm. Branch pipe
and nozzle shall be of instantaneous pattern.
11.8 Hose Cabinet:
Hose cabinet shall be glass (4 mm thick) fronted with double hinged door and lock. The
cabinet shall be made of 16 SWG M.S sheet and spray painted to scarlet red colour with
word fire. The hose cabinet shall be of suitable size to accomodate the following :-
a) Landing valves (Single Headed).
b) 63 mm hose pipe (2 lengths of 15 Mtrs each).
c) Branch pipe and nozzles (one set).
d) Two keys of break glass recess for keys.
12.0 TESTING :
After laying and jointing, the piping shall be pressure tested by hydrostatic method. The
piping shall be slowly filled with water in order to expel all the air. The piping shall then be
allowed to stand full of water for 24 hours. Any leakages at flanges or elsewhere shall be
rectified. The pressure shall then be applied by means of a test pump (either hand operated).
The test pressure shall not be less than 1.5 times the working pressure of the system.
2
However, the test pressure shall not exceed 10.5 Kgs/cm in any case.
Pressure gauges used for the test shall be accurate and shall preferably have been
recalibrated before the test. The open ends of the piping shall be plugged during the test.
Capacity of pumps shall be checked with respect to the contractor's piping and equipment
layout. Tests shall be conducted to determine the delivery head, flow and bhp of pumps after
installation. All the test results shall correspond to the performance curves. All the leaks and
defects in joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Owner.
The system shall also be tested for its desired performance and function by opening hydrant
valves on each floor separately and four landing valves simultaneously. The flow of water at
the top most hydrant shall be checked when three landing valves below are open. The
cutting in and cutting out pressure setting of starting device shall also be checked for its
correct operation.
The test results shall be recorded and countersigned by Owner's representatives and
submitted in triplicate for approval by the Owner.
14.0 FIRE BRIGADE INLET CONNECTION:
Fire brigade inlet connection to the tank shall be comprised of four instantaneous pattern 63
mm dia. make inlets with caps and chains complete with non-return valves housed in a 16
Gauge MS cabinet with 4mm thick glass fronted door. The cabinet shall be 1000 x 300 mm x
400 mm size for recess mounting.
15.0 BASE PLATE:
Pumps and motors shall be mounted on a common structural base plate with antivibration
mounting.
16.0 YARD HYDRANTS:
Yard hydrant shall comprise of 80 mm dia M.S. flanged stand pipe, 63 mm dia gun metal
instantaneous landing valve. The buried protection shall be anticorrosive treatment as per
specification.
146
17.0 FIRST AID FIRE EXTINGUISHERS :
17.1 Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour material appliances
and equipment necessary and required to install fire extinguishing hand appliances.
17.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the work shall consist of the following.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS :
Fire Extinguishers shall conform to the following Indian Standard Specifications as revised
and amended upto date.
Soda Acid Type : IS 934-1967

Foam Type : IS 933-1967
Dry Powder Type : IS 2171-1962
Fire Buckets : As per ISI
Carbon Di-oxide : IS 2878/1976
Water Base ABV : IS 940/1976
Mech Foam Type : IS 10204
17.3 Fire Extinguishers shall be installed as per Indian Standard Code of practice for selection,
installation and maintenance of portable first aid appliances IS 2190-1971.
17.4 The appliances shall be installed in readily accessible locations with the appliances brackets
fixed to wall by suitable anchor fasteners.
17.5 Each appliances shall be provided with an inspection card indicating the date of illuminated
and caused all reset or silenced, the control panel trouble buzzer will sound until such time as
the manual station or automatic initiating device is returned to normal and the control reset
switch is operated.
17.6 Operating instruction shall be provided and mounted in a brushed stainless steel frame with a
clear plastic cover adjacent to the control panel. The instructions shall include the following :-
17.6.1 Procedure to follow when fire is detected.

17.6.2 How to reset and test the entire system after trouble or fire is detected.
17.6.3 Scaled sketch of the building showing location, type and the zone to which all detector and
manual pull stations are connected.
B SPECIFICATION FOR ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

SYSTEM:
1.0 SCOPE:
1.1 This specification covers the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Analogue
Intelligent Addressable Fire Detection and Alarm System and various components which
constitute the system. This system shall be micro computer based utilizing distributed
147
processing technique. The system shall generally include central processing unit, power
supplies, indicating devices, fault isolation modules, control modules net work interface
module, loop connector, cable and accessories, video display units etc., complete.
1.2 The equipments shall be properly packed for transportation, supply and delivery of the
equipment at site.
1.3 Microprocessor loop control panel located in reception / lobby area.
1.4 Fire command will be interfaced with panel by means of network integrator.
1.5 Incase of actuation of devices due to smoke / fire condition system shall be such that HVAC
systems and also deactivates Acess control system, Fire door panic bar /switch etc will be
switched off thus avoiding circulation of smoke from affected areas to other areas.
1.6 Fire command center / loop panel should have sufficient number of potential free contacts
with terminal blocks for receiving/transmitting signals to/from external devices. Wiring from
these terminal blocks to external devises such as AHU/HVAC Control panel Access control
panel, CCTV monitors, fire door panic bar/switch etc to be carried out by the fire alarm
contractor. Termination of wiring to external devices will be done by fire alarm contractor in
presence of respective agencies.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1 The design, manufacture, testing, performance, etc. of the various components of the Fire
Detection and Alarm System shall comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations,
and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be installed. Nothing in this
specification shall be construed to relieve the tenderer of his responsibility.
2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the Fire Alarm System and the components shall conform to the
latest applicable relevant Standards. The relevant Indian Standards are.
a) Code of Practice for Automatic Fire Alarm System - IS 2189.

b) Heat Sensitive Fire Detectors - IS 2175.
c) National Building Code 1997 (Latest Edition)
d) Fire Officers Committee regulations.
e) NFPA-72
3.0 LIST OF COMPONENTS:
3.1 The following is the list of various components which generally constitutes the Fire Detection
and Alarm System, but not limited to it. The specific requirement of various equipments shall
be as per enclosed specification.
a) Photoelectric type Analogue Addressable Smoke Detectors

b) Analogue Addressable type Heat Sensitive Fire Detectors.
c) Addressable Push Button type manual call points.
d) Addressable Electronic hooters.
e) Addressable Remote response indicators.
f) Cables, conduting and wiring.
g) Maintenance free battery and battery charging system of adequate capacity.
h) Fault isolation module, control module & monitor module.
i) Micro processor based fire alarm panel i.e, loop panels.
k) Central processing units, video display unit, built in printer with required software.
l) Combination type Analogue Addressable Detector ( Combination of
Heat & Photoelectric type )
148
4.0 TESTS:
4.1 All routine tests as per relevant standards shall be conducted before dispatch of the materials.
4.2 Copies of test certificates of tests conducted shall be furnished and approval obtained before
dispatch of the equipment.
5.0 DETAILS\ DRAWINGS\ DOCUMENTS:
5.1 The following details/drawings/documents shall be furnished by the successful tenderer

battery etc., and weights, fixing arrangement of equipments .etc. quantity, type, make, etc. to
Owners and one set to The Project Managers).
5.2 Four copies of all drawings for Micro processor based Control Panels shall be furnished for
approval prior to fabrication.
5.3 Three copies of final approved drawings and one reproducible print of all final and approved
drawings shall be furnished.
5.4 Any other details/information required.
6.0 CHANGE IN QUANTITY:
Owner reserves the right to amend the quantities to be supplied and for such amendments if
any, the unit rates offered by tenderers shall apply. The tenderer shall verify the exact
quantities of all items from "GOOD FOR CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS" / Site
Measurements before procurement
7.0 AS BUILT DRAWINGS:
The tenderer shall submit one complete set of original (tracing) drawings along with soft
copies in the form of CD, three copies of the same to the Owners/Architects after completion
of works with following information.
7.1 Complete layout indicating location of various items, mounting heights, etc.
7.2 Complete schematic diagram with Isometric Layout.
7.3 Cable routing, cable sizes, cable schedule, connecting cabling details, cable route lengths,
etc.
7.4 Conduit layout, size and routing, size and number of wiring in conduits, etc.
7.5 Technical specification of devices, operation, maintenance schedule, O&M manual, Checklist
for routine maintenance. Test & Guarantee certificates for all brought out components etc.,
C SPECIFICATION FOR PHOTOELECTRIC TYPE ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE SMOKE

DETECTORS:
These Detectors should be able to detect fire by sensing smoke at incipient stage. The
sensor should be able to sense the visible and invisible aerosol of fire. Photoelectric smoke
detector shall have nominal sensitivity of 0.5 gms/Cum. Essential features of this type of
smoke detectors shall be as follows: -
1.0 Smoke Detector shall be of photoelectric type with dual chamber, dual source.
2.0 Operating voltage of system should be 24 V DC and Quiescent and alarm current should be
minimum, so that the alarm current on the standby battery (in case of mains failure) should be
minimum.
3.0 There has been a base LED seen at the base level and this should be 'OFF' under healthy
condition (Quiescent conditions) and should be red in colour. The visible alarm signal shall be
149
capable of remoting LED annunciation. This LED will remain lighted until the system is reset
at the control panel after clearance of fire/fault. The failure of visual signal should not prevent
the detector from giving alarm.
4.0 Data transmission to and from the fire control panel from the detector shall be via
communications modules which is factory fitted to the detector by the original detector
manufacturer and forms a complete and integral part of the detector.
5.0 The detector shall not go into alarm when exposed to wind velocities upto 2500 feet per
minute (12.7 m/sec.).
6.0 It shall be possible to perform a calibrated sensitivity and performance test on the detector
without the need of generating smoke.
7.0 The detector shall be suitable for operation, without any malfunction at humidity levels upto
90% RH continuously and 95% RH for a period upto 2 Hours.
8.0 The detector shall be housed in a compact fire retardant module. The detectors shall have
built in time delay to avoid undesired response due to transient smoke.
9.0 The detector construction shall be rugged and the performance of the detector shall not be
affected by levels of vibration and shock normally encountered in buildings/industries due to
various movements/ equipment /machineries etc.
10.0 If one or more numbers of detectors are located in a closed room, the fault in any one or
group of detectors shall be indicated with a common external response indicator.
11.0 Functional testing should be possible with these types of detectors.
12.0 The sampling chamber opening to receive smoke should be minimum so that no false alarms
are initiated there.
13.0 Detectors shall be designed as plug in units, which fit into various bases according to place
and type of mounting. This would also enable interchangeability.
14.0 Any metal parts used for detector construction shall inherently resistant to corrosion and shall
suitably be treated to afford protection against corrosion. The plating or treatment shall in no
way affect the detector performance.
15.0 Any plastic material used in the detector shall not deform or fail under the maximum
temperature to be expected.
16.0 Any sealing compound used for the detector shall not melt at the temperature to be expected.
17.0 Detector removal or pilferage (lead removal or pilferage) should be monitored and should give
alarm indication at the zonal level of a open circuit fault.
18.0 The terminals in detectors shall be suitable for connections of copper conductor wires of
minimum size of 2.5 Sqmm.
19.0 The detector shall be capable of being remotely tested from the control panel by transmission
of bit codes to the addressed detector. This shall result in a healthy detector transmitting
back an analogue value in excess of the recommended fire alarm threshold. The control
panel shall recognise this as a test signal and shall not raise an alarm against this signal.
20.0 An identification number (on a number plate / sticker) shall be provided for each
detector/device. This will be same as the number given in the fire alarm panel/ repeater panel.
The details of numbering scheme will be site specific / location specific which will be approved
by owner / consultant prior to implementation.
D SPECIFICATION FOR ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE HEAT DETECTOR:
150
1.0 The Heat Detector shall be able to detect fire by sensing the heat in the immediate
atmosphere.
2.0 Data transmission to and from the fire control panel from the detector shall be via a
communication module which is factory fitted to the detector by the original detector
manufacturer and forms a complete and integral part of the detector.
3.0 The Heat Detectors shall be combined rate of rise of temperature and fixed temperature type.
4.0 Operating voltage of the system shall be 24 V D.C. and Quiescent and alarm current should
be minimum so that the alarm current on standby battery (in case of main power failure) shall
be minimum.
5.0 An indicted LED lamp (red in colour) shall be provided at the base of detector. This shall be
seen at ground level and should be 'OFF' under healthy/normal conditions (Quiescent) and
should be constantly ON under fire/fault condition. The visible alarm signal should be capable
of remote LED annunciation. This LED will remain lighted until the system is reset at the
control panel after clearance of fire/fault.
The failure of visual signal should not prevent the detector from giving alarm.
6.0 The electronic circuitry shall be fully solid state and there shall be no moving parts and
suitable for connecting a 2 wire 24V central system which can operate within voltage range of
17V - 28V DC.
7.0 The detectors shall automatically restore to normal open circuit position once the heat
activating the detector is removed.
8.0 The detector shall respond/activate and give alarm when the rate of rise of temperature
exceeds 15 degree F per minute or when the ambient temperature exceeds the
pre-determined temperature level.
9.0 It shall be possible to adjust the temperature range of detector at site.
10.0 Detector removal or pilferage (lead removal or pilferage) should be monitored and should give
alarm indication at the zone level of a open circuit fault.
11.0 The detector construction shall be rugged and the performance of the detector shall not be
affected by levels of vibration and shock normally encountered in buildings/industries due to
various movements/equipment/machineries, in which detectors etc. are located.
12.0 If one or more numbers of detectors are located in a closed room, the fault in any one or
group of detectors shall be indicated with a common external response indicator.
13.0 Functional testing should be possible with these types of detectors.
14.0 Detectors shall be designed as plug in units, which fit into various base according to place
and type of mounting. This would enable interchangeability.
15.0 Any metal parts used for detector construction shall be inherently resistant to corrosion and
shall be suitably be treated to afford protection against corrosion. The plating or treatment
shall in no way effect the detector performance.
16.0 Any plastic material used in the detector shall not deform or fail under the maximum
temperature to be expected.
17.0 Any sealing compound used for the detector shall not melt at the temperature to be expected.
18.0 The terminals in detectors shall be suitable for connections of copper conductor wires of
minimum size 2.5 Sqmm.
151
19.0 The detector shall be capable of being remotely tested from the control panel by the
transmission of bit code to the addressed detector. This shall result in a healthy detector
transmitting back an analogue value in excess of the recommended fire alarm threshold. The
control panel shall recognise this as a test signal and shall not raise an alarm against this
signal.
20.0 An identification number (on a number plate / sticker) shall be provided for each
detector/device. This will be same as the number given in the fire alarm panel/ repeater panel.
The details of numbering scheme will be site specific / location specific which will be approved
by owner / consultant prior to implementation.
E: SPECIFICATION FOR ANALOGUE ADRESSABLE PUSH BUTTON TYPE MANUAL CALL

POINT:
1.0 Each manual call point unit shall comprise of a push button of approved make with minimum
1 NO + 1 NC contacts. The push button shall not be shrouded and the same shall be
projecting out from the surface of the enclosure. This whole assembly of push button shall
again be enclosed in an external cast aluminum enclosure with all side covered except from
the front side. The front side shall be sealed with breakable glass cover using neoprene or
equivalent gasket. The glass cover shall be fixed in such a way that the actuating push button
is kept depressed (with 'NC' contact closed and 'NO' contact opened) so long as the glass
cover is intact. In case of fire, when glass cover is broken to give fire warning, the push
button shall be released due to spring action hence giving remote fire alarm through the 'NO'
contact which has now changed over.
1.2 The enclosure shall be completely dust, damp, weather and vermin proof with IP 65
protection.
1.3 The complete unit shall be suitable for wall/column mounting with necessary surface/recess
mounting accessories as required.
1.4 The complete unit and the push button shall be painted 'Signal Red' (Shade No. 537 as per
IS:5). The internal surface shall be painted with 'White' Colour.
1.5 Clear inscription reading (in English) and also in specified vernacular language "FIRE ALARM
IN CASE OF FIRE, BREAK GLASS" shall be provided for each manual call point unit, either
on the enclosure or on a separate metal plate mounted behind the glass cover. In addition to
152
this, a "RED" Lamp response indicator is provided which will light up on actuation of the
Manual call point to help to locate the Manual Call Point station that is operated.
1.6 Each manual call point unit shall be provided with the following accessories:-
a) An iron hammer of sufficient weight, which could be used to break the glass cover. The iron
hammer shall be suspended on a hook fixed to the enclosure by means of a non- corrodible
iron chain of sufficient length and ply to facilitate easy breaking of the glass cover.
b) The enclosure shall have provision for conduit entries/cable glands at 2 places of 2 core 2.5
Sqmm PVC armored cable.
c) An identification number (on a number plate) shall be provided for which each push button
station will be same as the number given to the fire alarm indicating point on the remote fire
alarm indicating panel. The details of numbering scheme will be intimated later.
F. SPECIFICATIONS FOR OTHER ACCESSORIES OF ALARM SYSTEM
1.0 MONITOR MODULE :
Monitor module shall provide a two or four fault tolerant initiating circuit for normally open
contact fire alarm devices, supervisory devices and either normally open or normally closed
security devices. It should be able to perform assigned point address (via two direct dial
decade switches), address and circuit status (Normal, open, short) and output to the
microprocessor panel. An integral LED should blink each time when the above parameters
are scanned and LED latches on by input from the panel.
2.0 CONTROL MODULE :
Control module shall provide a supervised two or four wire fault tolerant output indicating
circuits such as audible devices, strobes, etc., and responds to normal, open or short
conditions on the circuit. This module shall be provided on an addressable loop or radial for
purpose of monitoring sounder/hooter circuit and operating sounders from any location. It
shall be possible to set an unique address to these devices. The controller shall monitor
open/short circuit in the wiring to the sounders as well as the external power supply to the
sounders. It should be able to perform assigned point address (via two direct dial decade
switches).
3.0 FAULT ISOLATION MODULE :
Isolators shall be provided to electrically isolate different sections of an addressable detector

loop in order to isolate short circuit in the loop. It should be possible to use such isolators in
both loops and radials.
4.0 ANALOGUE ADRESSABLE TYPE ELECTRONIC HOOTERS/SPEAKERS:
153
These should be wall/ceiling mounted, electronic speakers with solid state circuitry with 2 tone
system (viz. alert and evacuation working on 24V. D.C. The sound should be distinct and
against background noise audible range of at least 30 Mtrs in an interior of Office/Factories
etc. These speakers shall be suitable for fire alarm signal.
5.0 ADDRESSALBE REMOTE RESPONSE INDICATOR:
Whenever a detector is housed in an enclosed space or a number of detectors are housed in

an enclosed space each detector or a group of detectors must have a single indicator outside.
This will be of spring loaded filament lamp type with RED covered lens. This should be
suitable for both surfaces and recess wall or ceiling mounting and of dust proof construction.
6.0 MICRO PROCESSOR BASED FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS AND LOOP PANELS :
The panels should be of free standing floor/wall mounting consoles as required and made out
of 16 SWG CRCA sheet steel with dust, damp and vermin proof construction with neoprene
gaskets. The panels shall be designed for IP-54 protection. The panels shall be
painted/powder coated in even baked enamel paint after suitable primer treatment. The panel
shall be covered with a glass door with lock and key. The panel shall have a separate
junction box mounted on top of the panel for terminating the cables/conduits. This junction
box shall have suitable size of knockouts for cable/conduit connections. Suitable terminal
blocks shall be provided for termination of external cables/wires. The panel shall essentially
consist of a) Fire Alarm System, b) Fault Alarm System and complete with all equipments
necessary for the reception, control, monitoring, recording and relaying of signals originating
from the trigger devices and for the activation of fire alarm sounders. The panel shall identify
open circuit, short circuit, earth fault, removal or failure of detectors, components or
connection failure as a fault and shall provide a fault warning and indication.
The panel shall be suitable for input supply of 240 Volts +/- 10% A.C. single phase, 50 Hz and
24 V D.C. standby battery supply, in the event of mains failure. The batteries with automatic
charger & charger circuit shall be provided in the panel. The standby power shall be provided
by means of batteries of sufficient ampere hour capacity.
The change over from A.C. main supply to stand by power shall be fully automatic in either
direction and shall be instantaneous, uninterrupted. The panel shall provide necessary
stabilized D.C. voltage to the individual zone circuits as well as to the internal circuits.
The control panels shall also incorporate the following salient features: -
6.1 Fire alarm control panel shall function as a communications interface between Central
processing unit and sensors and controlled devices. Control panel shall be intelligent each
with its own microprocessor and memory.
6.2 Fire alarm control panel shall have main processor board necessary loop modules for
detector loops, alarm output modules power supply module, power transformer for external
hooter/lamp, control output modules for various control functions through relay contacts and
communication module for interacting with CPU.
6.3 Fire alarm control panel shall have facility to process the input signals and also have facility to
control all the input data received from addressable analogue type detectors/addressable
interface unit located in various loop at different locations and from different field
devices/switches.
6.4 Addressable analogue Detectors/manual call point and required field devices in the various
areas shall be connected to fire alarm panels by Class A or Class B wiring to the loop module.
However, the number of such sensors per loop shall not be more than 99 or as per system
integrator, manufacturers recommendations.
154
6.5 The conventional detectors, manual call point. No alarm initiating devices can be connected to
the fire alarm control panel through addressable interface unit in the addressable loop.
6.6 Fire alarm control panel shall have number of electronic filters to ignore false alarm and
increase sensitivity to real fires for sensors. The sensitivity of each analogue addressable
detector should be automatically raised if detectors are gradually polluted due to dust and
other particles entering inside the detector. If detectors are more polluted, the control panel
shall give warning that the detectors need service. The electronic filters shall recognize the
unwanted alarm from detectors due to electrical spikes, pipe smokes etc., and raise the
sensitivity limit accordingly.
6.7 The fire alarm control panel shall have separate fluorescent display area to indicate the
address of each devices and clear text about the location of alarm/trouble.
6.8 The fire alarm control panel shall have optional printer facility, & suitable network module for
connecting external printer to print out the alarm/trouble occurrences with suitable fire fighting
measures.
6.9 Control panels shall also have the following features.
6.9.1 Logging an alarm, time and action text on printer.
6.9.2 Status check of disable alarm addresses before they are restored.
6.9.3 Storing of alarms and the possibility of internal organization of alarms.
6.10 Microprocessor based fire control panels offered shall have high degree of flexibility with:
6.10.1 The possibility of expanding to a bigger system with several control panels, network integrator
modules and control and information units.
6.10.2 Programmable activation of control output relays for tripping ventilators and closing of fire
doors in the event of fire.
6.10.3 Individually controlled, monitored alarm outputs for external hooters, lamps, etc.,
6.10.4 The possibility of connecting to non-addressable (conventional) detectors, manual call points.
No alarm initating devices, etc., through interface unit.
6.11 Fire control panel shall have facility to brief user guide menu to enable the operator for proper
use of various menu functions.
6.12 Users menu structure for carrying various events shall be provided in the fire alarm control
panel.
6.13 The fire alarm control panel display shall have facility of brief user guide menu to enable the
operator for proper use of various menu functions.
6.14 The sensitivity of each addressable analogue detector shall be changeable from control panel
from normal to low or normal to high. The sensitivity of each addressable detector will be
readable at the control panel.
6.15 The control panel shall have facility to set date and time and display the same.
6.16 Each addressable detectors, interface units can be disabled from panel for maintenance
purpose and restore the same whenever required.
6.17 The status check of each detector, interface units for alarm, pre-warning, trouble, disabling
shall be possible from control panel.
155
6.18 The control panel shall have memory storage for last 126 events, or more as per
manufacturers recommendation & specification and an alarm counter for number of alarms
occurred after the control panel is installed.
6.19 Minimum software changed shall be possible from the fire alarm control panel without re-
burning the EPROM.
6.20 The fire alarm control panel shall have mains on, disable, fault, pre-warning, more alarm (for
two or more alarms) LEDs and flashing fire signs on front panel.
6.21 Fire alarm control panel shall have the sounder silence, reset, more alarm, push buttons and
also push buttons for user menu structures.
6.22 Power supply to the fire alarm control panel shall be 240V, 50 Hz, 1 Ph AC supply & 24 V DC
battery back up.
7.0 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT :
7.1 Central processing unit shall be special purpose computer utilizing microprocessor
operating under software program which is to be provided for central monitoring
functions in the entire fire alarm system.
7.2 Central processing unit shall be communicate with various micro processor based fire
alarm control panel/peripherals of the system and executes/receipt of technical
alarms, control the activation of outputs, start the printer and control text in the
information units.
7.3 CPU shall also communicate with printer and video display unit through RS-232C or
Current loop.
7.4 Indications/information received from detectors/field devices, switches, etc.,

(connected through microprocessor based fire control panels) to CPU shall be
repeated to other panel.
7.5 The CPU shall serve as an interface between controller for operator peripherals and
remote fire alarm control panels. CPU shall consist of a micro computer based
master unit, processing units, signaling module and power supply.
7.6 The CPU serves as the systems central processor. System software shall be
designed specifically for fire alarm and annunciation system applications and shall
provide to monitor status: Processing alarms according to priorities,
controlling/processing communications with operator peripherals, and synchronizing
all system activity.
7.7 For reason of reliability and preventing in-advertent changes, system software
(operating system and data files) shall be maintained in non-volatile memory. System
shall permit reprogramming by authorized personnel only.
7.8 Power supply to the CPU shall be 240V, 50 Hz, 1 Ph AC and 24 V DC batteries back
up.
8.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS :
8.1 Unless otherwise specified Fire Detection Alarm System shall be microprocessor
base computer aided addressable system which shall use addressable analogue
type detectors.
8.2 Microprocessor based Addressable Analogue system shall use special types of
detection unit with special analog feature.
156
8.3 Addressable system shall monitor individually addressable analog detection devices
connected on two wire circuit loops.
8.4 Each detector shall use a specific address and communicates with fire alarm control
unit providing analogue signals which corresponds to its condition.
8.5 Addressable analogue system control panel shall have intelligent interfaces to
facilitate the display of address and conditions of fire alarm sensors/detectors.
8.6 Addressable analogue detector shall have suitable address unit for providing
continuous, analogue signals to fire alarm control units.
8.7 The fire alarm control panel shall have scanning facility. While scanning, the system
shall read each sensors/detectors detected smoke or heat level and compares the
reading to the alarm threshold for that sensor/detector. When the threshold is
reached, the system shall identify the sensor type and location by the assigned
address and commands to respond an alarm.
9.0 INTERFACE:
Adequate number of potential free change over contacts with terminal blocks are to be
provided for each zone in each Local/Main Control Panel as necessary for automatic
operation of various devices such as fire pump, automatic carbon-dioxide extinguishers,
sprinkler system, exhaust fans, external siren, shutting off of air handling units, access control,
CCTV, fire door panic switch etc. These shall activate in case of fire and shall be annunciated
in the appropriate zone of the control panel.
All potential free contacts shall be brought out to a common termination point neatly wired,
with proper markings so that the interconnecting control cables from various auxiliaries could
be neatly terminated.
10.0 POWER SUPPLY UNIT:
A built in power supply unit shall be provided inside the control panel to feed voltage to the
system as below :
The control panel along with its detection, hooter, speaker and alarm circuits shall get its
operating power from the normal supply source at 240 Volts single phase. In case this supply
source fails, it should automatically change over to its power supply unit consisting of battery,
battery charger. The battery charger unit shall be automatic dual rate (trickle and boost)
charging type.
a) The capacity of the charger shall be such that the same can boost charge the battery (within 8
hours) while supplying the rated load of the fire alarm system. Facilities shall be provided to
limit the voltage supplied to fire alarm equipment to their rated values during the time of boost
charging. The charger shall normally supply the battery trickle charging current and the D.C.
load of the fire alarm system. The battery shall normally float. In case the A.C. supply on the
input side of the charger fails, the complete fire alarm system shall be supplied by the battery.
b) Battery bank shall be 24V D.C. scaled maintenance type conforming to IS and adequate
capacity to supply fire alarm system power for a period of 24 hours in non-alarm state
followed by 60 minutes operation of all soundless and other connected equipments from the
instant of charger/charger A.C. failure.
c) Switches, fuses, overload, devices, 0-30 V D.C. voltmeter, DC ammeter indicating lamps for
mains and DC output and discharge test facility shall be provided in the power supply system.
d) Visible and audible annunciation for trouble or failure in the power supply system like 'Charger
failure', 'battery low voltage', etc. shall be provided.
157
Battery reverse indication shall also be incorporated.
11.0 TESTING OF CONTROL PANELS:
Acceptable tests for main control panel and local control panels.
The contractor shall produce laboratory test certificates to the effect that the Main Control
Panel and Local Control Panels offered have been subjected to tests given below and that
they are upto the performance requirements. Copies of such certificates and approval
recognized laboratories shall be submitted to Engineer-in-charge wherever demanded.
A standard production sample of main control panel and local control panel excluding the
batteries and sounders external to the equipment shall be subjected to all functional tests :
11.1 Pre-conditioning Procedures:

Before and after each environment test, the temperature of the local control panels and main
control panel shall be stabilized in an environment having the normal conditions of the place
where the equipment is to be used. Usually temperature variations between 20 degree C to
50 degree C and humidity of 45% to 75% should be allowed for. The temperature and
humidity should be substantially constant during the precondition.
158
11.2 Functional Tests for Each Zone to be Carried out at Site:
Operate a smoke detector from any zone to ensure current functioning of main control panel
and local control panel. The smoke shall be generated locally to test the performance of the
detectors.
a) Operate alarm silencing control to ensure correct functioning.
b) Operate another detector from another zone to ensure correct functioning of

local control panel and main control panel.
c) Operate 'Reset' Control to ensure correct functioning.
d) Check the audible and visible warning given on disconnection of power.

c) Restore normal supply and check audible/visible warning by disconnecting standby
supply.
f) Restore to quiscent condition.
g) Audio test for sounders and alarms.
h) Battery and Battery charging system test.
i) Open circuit test on removal of detector.
j) Short circuit test on detector cables.
The complete installation shall be carried out as per relevant standards, with high degree of
competency.
On commissioning of the system, the test results shall be logged and handed over.
12.0 LOCATION:
The location of the main and local control panels shall be in an easily accessible position as
well continuously monitored area.
Adjacent to each panel, a specially prepared plan of the building with zone numbered list shall
be mounted on a teakwood frame with glazed cover without any extra cost.
13.0 INSTRUCTION MANUAL AND DRAWINGS:
Manufacturer shall supply three sets of instruction manual detailing all the circuit diagrams,
component, specifications, operational instructions, routine and periodical test methods and
frequencie
TECHNICAL DATA
159
A. SMOKE DETECTORS : PHOTOELECTRIC

HEAT
1. Type, make and model No. :
2. No. of chambers :
3. Radio active source :
4. Operating voltage :
5. Alarm voltage :
6. Is the detector dual chamber dual source

:
7. If detector is not an ionization type, give
working principal details. :
8. Operating temperature :
9. Whether circuit diagram is enclosed :
10. Can sensitivity be set at site :
11. Coverage area of each detectors in Sqmt

:
11.1 At 4 - 5 Mtrs :
11.2 At 10 - 13 Mtrs :
12. Response time in Seconds and range of
adjustment. :
13. Max. allowable air velocity Mtr/Sec. :
14. Max. allowable relative humidity :

15. Is the electronic circutary completely solid
state? :
16. Can a response indicator be put with a

group of detector :
17. What is the resistance in ohms. with

external response indicator ? :
18. How many response indicators can be put

in the same zone :
19. Is the smoke detector head and base

completely imported :
HEAT Photoelectric
20. Are you approved installators of these
detectors in India? :
(Attach certificate copy) :
21. Material enclosure :
160
22. Mounting arrangement :
23. Approximate dimensions and weight :
24. Whether locking arrangement provided ? :
25. Sensitivity of detector :
26. Is the detector fire officers committee :

approved
27. Is the detector approved by local statutory

body? :
28. Is the detector approved by underwriters

laboratory
29. Give a list of installation by you using this :

particular type of detectors (having more :
than100 Nos.) with name of authority to :
whom reference can be made. :
:
B. HEAT DETECTORS:
1.0 Type, make and Model No. :
2.0 Does the detector conform to IS 2175-1977 ? :
3.0 Sensing element :
4.0 Coverage area in Sq. mtrs :
5.0 Operating voltage. :
6.0 Quiscent current in mA :
7.0 Alarm current in mA :
8.0 Operating temperature :
8.1 Fixed temperature in C :
8.2 Rate of rise in C/min. :
9.0 Range of temperature adjustment :
HEAT PHOTOELECTRIC
10.0 Can operating temperature be :

adjusted at site.
11.0 Maximum allowable relative humidity :
12.0 Material of enclosure :
13.0 Mounting arrangement :
161
14.0 Whether locking arrangement provided :
15.0 Response time seconds and range :

of adjustment.
16.0 Can a response indicator be put with a :

single or group of detectors ?
17.0 Is the detector Fire Officers Committee :

approved? :
18.0 Is the detector approved by local statutory body? : :

19.0 Is the detector UL approved ? :
20.0 Give a list of installations done by you :

you using this particular type of :
detectors (having more than 25 :
numbers) with name of authority to :
whom reference can be made. :
C. MANUAL CALL POINT (MCP):
1.0 Make :
2.0 Type of Enclosures :
3.0 Material of construction :
4.0 Dimensions and weight :
D. ELECTRONIC HOOTER :
1.0 Make :
2.0 Operative voltage :
3.0 Sound audiable range :
4.0 Material of construction :
5.0 Current required in watts :
1. All items of work mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities shall be read and executed strictly
in accordance with the description of the item in the Schedule of Quantities, Local Statutory
Authority requirements, etc., read in conjunction with the appropriate IS and conditions of
Contract.
otherwise included cost of: -
a) All materials, fixing materials, accessories, hardware, operations, tools,

equipment, consumables, civil works wherever involved and incidentals required in
preparation for in the full and entire execution and completion of the work called for in the
item as per specification and drawings completely.
162
b) Wastage on materials and labour.
c) All taxes, duties, octroi, including works contract tax, sales tax, transit insurance,
packing and forwarding charges, loading, transportation, unloading, handling, hoisting, to all
levels, setting and fixing in position, disposal of debris and all other labour necessary in
accordance with contract documents, good practice and recognized principles.
d) Liabilities, obligations and risks arising out of conditions of contract.
e) Liason service charges.
specifications and drawings are to be read as complimentary to and part of the schedule of
4. In the event of conflict between the bill of quantities and other documents, the most stringent
shall apply and interpretation of the Architect shall be final and binding.
5. The installation price of loop panel, M.C.C, control panel or any other items shall include
supply and fixing of supporting steel structures/MS channels grouting of the same civil works
etc., as required.
whatsoever.
taxes, octroi, insurance, packing and forwarding charges, transportation, unloading at site.
8. The successful contractors shall submit the Schematic diagrams, fabrication

drawings with details of all equipments wirings diagrams etc., to Local
Statutory Body/Consultants for approval prior to supply/commencement of
such works. The approval of these drawings will be general and will not
absolve to contractor of the responsibility of the correctness of these
drawings. Atleast four copies of the approved drawings shall be supplied to
Architects for their distribution to various agencies at site at no cost of Owner.
9. The tenderers must seet the site conditions such as type of soil, locations etc., and take all
factors into consideration while quoting the rates as no extra cost will be allowed on any
ground arising out of or relating to the site conditions.
10. Any error in description or in quantity or omission of items from the contract shall not vitiate
this contract but shall be corrected and deemed to be a variation required by the
Architect/Owners.
11. The tenderer shall take into account the expenses of pre-commissioning tests to be
conducted as per specification of the complete installation by licensed agencies.
At the completion of the work, contractor shall furnish final completion drawings to the
desired format.
NOTE: All bought-out items shall be of makes approved by Local by Architect/ Consultant/ Owner
prior to placement of order.
SIGNATURE OF THE TENDERER
163
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL WORKS
164
3. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS TECH SPECIFICATONS
INDEX SHEET
1. GENERAL SCOPE OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

WORKS
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 415V SWITCHBOARDS

(INDOOR / OUTDOOR)
3. SPECIFICATIONS FOR ERECTION, TESTING &

COMMISSIONING OF 415V SWITCHBOARDS
4. SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTING & POWER DISTRIBUTION
BOARDS
5. SPECIFICATION FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, CONDUITS,
WIRING & ACCESSORIES
6. SPECIFICATION FOR DUMMY CONDUITS FOR LAN &

TELEPHONE SYSTEM
7. SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
8. SPECIFICATION FOR LOW TENSION CABLES
9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHT FITTINGS &

ACCESSORIES
10. SPECIFICATION FOR CABLE TRAYS
12. SPECIFICATION FOR EARTHING SYSTEM
13. SPECIFICATIONS FOR MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT

BREAKERS (MCCBs)
14. SPECIFICATION FOR STREET LIGHT POLES & POSTS
15. SPECIFICATION FOR POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT

SYSTEM
16. SPECIFICATION FOR INVERTERS
165
GENERAL SCOPE OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORK

1.0 SCOPE
This specification details the broad guidelines for supply, receive, store, erect, testing and
commissioning of all the equipments required for the Electrical Installation. The contractor shall
furnish all the materials, labour, tools and equipments for the electrical works, as shown in the
accompanaying drawings and in the bill of quantities and specifications hereinafter described
and execute the works as directed by the Owner Architects and completed to their entire
satisfaction.
2.0 CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall be a licensed Class One or 'A' class Electrical Contractor, possessing a
valid Electrical Contractor's license in the State, employing licensed supervisors and skilled
workers having valid permits as per the Regulation of Indian Electricity Rules and Local
Electrical Inspectors requirements. He should have execute electrical works of this magnitude
earlier and shall have qualified engineer's to produce execution drawings and to supervise the
work at site.
3.0 MINIMUM REQUIREMENT OF TECHNICAL STAFF :-(AT SITE)
One qualified, and competent experienced Engineer - Minimum 10 years experience in

executing similar installations acceptable to the Owners/Architects.
Diploma Holders with atleast 5 years site experience.
Experienced and certified cable jointers. - Minimum of 1 No.

Experienced Wireman. - Detail manpower loading chart to be furnished.
4.0 Minimum Equipment required at Site.:-
Multimeter, 500/1000/2500/5000 V Megger, Earth : 1 No. Each Duly calibrated

Resistance Meter : and certified by third party agency.
Tool kit containing, Double end spanners, Ring : 1 Set for each Technician.
Spanners, Screw Drivers, Hammers, chisels etc. :
5 Mtr. Steel tapes : 1 No. for each skilled

: Technician.
30/100 M steel tape for recording measurements : 1 No.
Spirit level 450 mm long metal body : 1 No. (Per Batch)
Hand Grinder : 1 No. (Per Batch)
Hand drilling machine 1/2" HSS/Masonry : 1 No. (Per Batch)
Pedestal drilling machine 5/8" : 1 No.
Vices fixed to Tables : as required.

H.S.S / Masonry (mm) drill bits upto 16 mm : 1 Set (per Building)
Hydraulic cable crimping device : Size / Quantity (As required)
Any other testing equipment as required : 1 Set. Each.
First Aid approved kits : 1 Set per Building & additional

quantities as required.
166
5.0 DEFINITIONS
The following abbreviations used in the bill of quantities, specifications and drawings represent
:-
IS : Indian Standard Specifications.

BS : British Standard.
HRC : High Rupturing Capacity.
GI : Galvanized Iron.
MS : Mild Steel.
CI : Cast Iron.
APLSTS : Aluminum Conductor, Paper Insulated Lead.
: Sheathed, Double Steel Tape Armoured & Served.
XLPE : Cross Linked Polyethylene
PVC : Polyvinyl Chloride.
HT : High Tension.
LT : Low Tension.
AMP : Ampere.
KV : Kilo Volts.
PT : Potential Transformers.
CT : Current Transformers.
MOCB : Minimum Oil Circuit Breakers.
SF6 : Sulfur Hexa Fluroide Breaker
VCB : Vaccum Circuit Breaker
ACB : Air Circuit Breaker
MCCB : Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
ELCB : Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers.
CFS : Combination Fuse Switch.
MCC : Motor Control Centre
PMCC : Power and Motor Control Centre
MLP : Main lighting Panel
MCB : Main Circuit Breaker
FDB : HRC Fuse Distribution Board.
LDB : Lighting Distribution Board.
PDB : Power Distribution Board.
KVA : Kilo Volts Ampere.
KW : Kilo Watts.
HP : Horse Power.
SWG : Standard Wire Gauge.
6.0 DETAILED SCOPE OF WORK
Supply of various equipment, unloading, receiving inspection, storing, transportation to work

site, handling, assembling, cleaning, mechanical erection, chipping of foundations, installation,
alignment, testing and commissioning and handing over in working condition of all items
covered below but not limited to it.
a) HT/LT Power and Control Cables.
b) Metal Clad Switches, Sockets, conduiting, wiring.
c) Lighting fixtures and accessories and lighting installation.
d) Lighting and Power Distribution Boards, Feeder Pillars.
e) 415 V MCC/PCCs, Automatic Capacitor Control Panels, Lighting
Panels, Bus Ducts, etc.,
f) Cable trays, earthing station/materials, lightning protection system.
g) Transformers, Double Pole Structures.
h) HT Switchgear and accessories
i) Battery, Battery Charger, Annunciator, UPS, Invertor.
j) Street Lighting, Security Lighting, Emergency Lighting & Indoor Lighting.
k) Communication / Data Wiring.
167
l) Any other items specified in Schedule of Quantities.
6.1 Minor civil works like drilling and punching holes and openings in concrete floors,slabs,
chasing of brick walls,fabrication of supporting structures,drainage of water from cable
trenches,cleaning and clearing of all debris due to electrical installation.
6.2 Excavation,scaffolding,back filling for direct burial of cables and earthing conductors as
applicable.
6.3 Preparation of execution drawings and as built-in- drawings.
6.4 Coordination with other contractors with regard to installation of items in Electrical
Contractors scope.
6.5 The extent of work services under the contract include all items shown on the
drawings,indicated in companion with specifications,not withstanding the fact that such
items have been omitted from the price schedule. All equipments and services which are
required to complete the intent of the contract shall also be deemed to be within the scope
of the contract.
6.6 After receiving/inspections of not only the materials supplied by him but also those supplied
by the Owner ,shall be reported to the Owner/Architect with his comments.
7.0 MATERIALS
The materials listed under "APPROVED MAKE" only shall be used.

A1.materials,equipments,fittings,etc.used in the installation shall conform to the latest relevant
IS. In case of materials for which standard specifications do not exist, the material shall be got
approved by the Architects before start of work.
8.0 CODE,REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
The installation shall conform in all respects to Indian Standard Code of Practice for Electrical
Wiring Installation I.S.732-1982. It shall also be in conformity with the current Indian Electricity
Rules Safety Codes and the Regulations and requirements of the Local Electrical Supply
Authority. Wherever this specification calls for a higher standard of materials and/or
workmanship then those required by any of the above regulatons,this specification shall take
precedence over the said regulations and standards. In general,the materials, equipments and
workmanship not covered by the above shall conform to the following Indian
Standards(latest),unless otherwise called for.Nothing in the enclosed specification shall be
construed to relieve the contractor of this responsibility.
Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures of 12063:1987 06

electrical equipment
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 8 Secondary cells and

batteries (first revision) (Superseding IS:1174) 1885 (Part 8):1986 04
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 9 Electrical relays (Second

revision of IS:1885) 1885(Part 9):1992 07
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 10 Power system protection

(first revision of IS 1885) 1885 (Part 10):1993 03
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 11 Electrical measurements 1885 (Part 11):1966 09
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 16 Lighting, Section 2 General

illumination, lighting fittings and lighting and traffic and signalling. 1885 (Part 16-Section
168
3):1967 10
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 17 Switchgear and controlgear

(first revision) 1885 (Part 17):1979 08
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 28 Instrument transformers

(first revision of IS 1885) 1885 (Part 28):1992 04
Electrotechnical Vocabulary : Part 32 Electric cables (first

revision of IS 1885) 1885 (Part 32): 1992 05
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 35 Rotating machinery 1885 (Part 35):1973 11
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 38 Transformers (first edition)

1885 (Part 38):1977 05
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 42 Power Capacitors (second

revision of IS 1885) 1885 (Part 42):1992 04
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 54 Insulators (First revision of

IS 1885) 1885 (Part 54):1993 03
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 55 Electric fans 1885 (Part 55):1981 03
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 69 Generation, transmission

and distribution of electricity - Generation 1885 (Part 69):1993 04
Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part 71 Generation, transmission

and distribution of electricity Substation 1885 (Part 71):1993 06
Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of electrotechnology :

Part 3 Conductors and connecting devices 12032 (Part 3):1987 05
Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of electrotechnology:

Part 7 Switchgear, control gear and protective devices.
12032(Part 7):1987 12
Graphical symbols for diagrams in the field of electrotechnology:

Part 8 Measuring instruments, lamps and signalling devices.
12032(Part 8):1987 07
Guide for colour coding of electrical mimic diagrams 11954:1987 02
Guide for limits of temperature rise of the windings of electrical

equipment when tested by different methods. 9677:1980 02
Guide for preparation of diagrams, charts and tables for

electrotechnology :Part 1 Definitions and classification. 8207(Part I):1976 02
Air circulator type electric fans and regulators (with amendment

No.5) 2997:1964 06
Industrial cooling fans (man coolers) (first revision) (with

amendment No.1) 6272:1987 05
Roof extractor units (first revision) (with amendment No.1) 3963:1987 06
AC supplied electronic ballasts for tubular florescent lamps :Part

I, General and safety requirements. 13021(Part 2):1991 05
169
Ballasts for high pressure mercury vapour lamps (first revision) 6616:1982 08
Bayonet lamp holders (third revision)(with amendment no.2) 1258:1987 10
High pressure mercury vapour lamps:Part 3, Dimensions of lamp

caps (superseding IS:2183 and IS:7023) 9900(Part 3):1981 03
Code of practice for earthing 3043:1987
Code of practice for electrical wiring installations(third revision) 732:1989
Code of practice for the installation of electric bells and call

system 8884:1978 03
Code of practice for the protection of buildings and allied

structures against lighting (second revision) 2309:1989 15
Danger notice plates (first revision) 2551:1982 05
Guide for electrical layout in residential buildings (with

amendment No.1) 4648:1968 04
Guide for improvement of power factor in consumer installation

Part I, Low and medium supply voltages 7752 (Part I):1982 06
Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work: Part

2, Life saving techniques (first revision) 5216(Part 2):1982 06
Guide for short-circuit current calculations in three-phase AC 13234:1992/IEC 909

system, (Superseding of IS5728:1970) (1986)
Special publication - National Electrical Code 30:1984
Special publication Chart on treatment for electric shock 31:1986
Warning symbol for dangerous voltges 8923:1978 01
Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (first

revision) 3837:1976 04
Adaptors for flexible steel conduits 4649:1968 03
Applicance-connectors and applicance-inlets (non-reversibe

three-pin type): Part 1, Appliance connectors (with amendment
No.6) 3010(Part 1):1965 05
Boxes for enclosure of the electrical accessories:Part 1, Steel

and cast iron box (with amendment No.2) 5133(Part 1):1969 03
Boxes for the enclosure of electrical accessories:Part 2, Boxes

made of insulating material 5133(Part 2):1969 03
Ceiling roses (second revision) (with amendment No.4) 317:1979 05
Conduits for electrical installations:Part I,General requirements 9537(Part 1):1980 05
Conduits for electrical installations:Part 3, Rigid plain conduits of

insulating materials (superseding IS:2509) 9537(Part 3):1983 04
Conduits for electrical installation:Part 2, Rigid steel conduits
170
(superseding IS:1653)(with amendment No.2) 9537(Part 2):1981 04
Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits (second revision) 3419:1988 07
Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (first revision)
2667:1988 05
Interlocking switch socket outlet (with amendment No.2) 4160:1967 06
Plugs and socket outlets of rated voltage upto and including 250
volts and rated current upto and including 16 Amps (second
revision) (with Amendment No.3) 1293:1988 09
AC electricity meters:Part 2, Single-phase whole-current watt

hour meters, Class II (first revision)(with amendment No.4) 722(Part 2):1977 02
AC electricity meters:Part 3, Three-phase whole current and

transformer operated and single-phase transformer operated
watt-hour meters, class 2(Second revision)(with amendment
No.2) 722(Part 3):1977 03
AC electricity meters:Part 5, Volt-ampere hour meters for

restricted power factor range, class 3.5 (first revision) (with
amendment No.2) 722(Part 5):1980 05
Guide for testing, calibration and maintenance of AC electricity

meters:Part 1, Single phase whole current wat hour meters,
Class 2.o (first revision) 9792(Part 1):1987 06
Maximum demand indicators (class 1) 8530:1977 04
Testing equipment for AC electrical energy meters 12346:1988 05
Application guide for the selection of High Voltage fuses for

transformer circuit applications. 12534:1988 02
Carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses for

voltages upto 650 V (third revision) (Superseding IS:8724) 2086:1993 07
High voltage fuse-links for motor circuit applications) 10624:1983
High voltage fuses for the external protection of shunt power

capacitors. 9402:1980 04
High voltage fuses:Part 1, Current limiting fuses. 9385(Part I):1979 10
High Voltage fuses:Part 3, Application guide for high voltage

fuses. 9385(Part 3):1980 07
LV Fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000 V AC or 1500 V

DC:part I, General requirements {Superseding IS 9224 (Part 13703(Part 1):1993/IEC
1):1979} 269-1(1986) 15

DC:Part 2, fuses for use by authorized persons, Section 1, 13703(Part 2-Section
Supplementary requirements {Superseding IS 9224 (Part 1):1993/IEC-269-
2):1979} 2(1993)
LV Fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000 V AC or 1500 V 13703(Part 2-Section

DC:Part 2, fuses for use by authorized persons, Section 2, 2):1993/IEC-269-2-
171
examples of standardized fuses. 1(1987)

DC:Part 4, Supplementary requirements for fuselinks for the 13703(Part 4) : 1993/
protection of semiconductor devices {Superseding IS 9224 (Part IEC-26942(1980)
4):1980}
Application guide for measuring devices for high voltage testing

8690:1977 09
Methods of high voltage testing:Part 1, General definations and

test requirements, (first revision) (Superseding IS:2070-1972)
2071(Part 1):1993
AC contactors of voltage above 1000 V upto and including

11000 V 9046:1978 08
Alternating current disconnectors (isolators) and earthing

switches for voltage above 1000 V:Part 1, General and
definitions. 9921(Part 1):1981

switches for voltage above 1000 V:Part 2 Rating. 9921(Part 2):1982

switches for voltages above 1000 V:Part 3, Design and
construction 9921(Part 3):1982

switches for voltages above 1000 V: Part 4, Type tests and
routine tests. 9921(Part 4):1985
Dimensions of terminals of high voltage switchgear and

controlgear. 10601:1983
General requirements for circuit breakers for voltages above

1000 V. 13118:1991
General requirements for switchgear and controlgear for

voltages exceeding 1000 V 12729:1988
Guide for testing of circuit breakers with respect to out-of-phase

switching. 9135:1979
Interconnecting busbars for AC voltage above 1 kV upto and

including 36 kV 8084:1976
Metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for voltage above

1000 V but not exceeding 11000 volts (with amendment No.1) 3427:1969
Methods of synthetic testing of high voltage alternating current

circuit breakers. 13516:1993
Switches and switch isolators for voltabes above 1000V: Part 1

General and definitions. 9920(Part 1):1981
Application guide for voltage transformers (first revision) 4146:1993
Current transformers: Part 1, General requirements (second

revision) 2705(Part 1):1992
172
Current transformer:Part 2, Measuring current transformers

(second revision) 2705(Part 2):1992
Current transformers:Part 3, Protective current transformers

Current transformer:Part 4, Protective current transformers for

special purpose applications (Second revision) 2705(Part 4):1992
Voltage transformers:Part 1, General requirements (second

revision) 3156(Part 1):1992
Voltage transformers:Part 2, Measuring voltage transformers

Voltage transformers:Part 3, Protective voltage transformers

(second revision) 3156 (Part 3):1992
Voltage transformers:Part 4, Capacitor voltage transformer

Circuit Breakers for over current protection for household and

similar installations (first revision) 8828:1993
Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of

switchgear and controlgear:Part 1, General 10118(Part 1):1982

switchgear and controlgear:Part 2, Selection 10118(Part 2):1982

switchgear and controlgear:Part 3, Installation. 10118(Part 3):1982

switchgear and controlgear:Part 4, Maintenance. 10118(Part 4):1982
Distribution pillars for voltages not exceeding 1000 Volts (first

revision) 5039:1983
Enclosed distribution fuseboards and cutouts for voltages not

exceeding 1000 V (second revision) 2675:1983
Guide for marking of insulated conductors (first revision) 5578:1983
Identification of terminals of contactors and associated overload

relays 10705:1983
LV switchgear and controlgear, Part I, General rules

(Superceding IS 4237:1982 & IS 2147:1962) 13947(Part 1):1993
LV switchgear and controlgear, Part 2, Circuit breakers

(superceding IS 2516(Part 1 & 2/ Section 1):1985 13947(Part 2):1993
LV switchgear and controlgear Part 3, Switches, disconnectors, 13947(Part 3):1993

switch-disconnectors and fuse combination unit (Superceding IS
4064(Part 1 & 2)
LV switchgear and controlgear Part 4, Contactors and motor

starters Section 1, Electromechanical {Superceding IS 2959 and 13947(Part 4-section
173
IS 8544 (all Parts)} 1):1993
LV switchgear and controlgear Part 5, Control circuit devices and

switching elements, Section 1 Electromechanical control devices 13947(Part 5-Section
{Superceding IS 6875 (All parts)} 1):1993
Miniature circuit breaker boards for voltage upto and including

1000 volts AC. 13032:1991
Specification for low voltage switchgear and controlgear

assemblies:Part 1, Requirements for type-tested and partially
type tested assemblies (first revision) 8623(Part 1):1993
Specification for low voltage switchgear and controlgear

assemblies:Part 2, Particular requirements for busbar trunking
systems (busways) (first revision) 8623(Part 2):1993
LV Switchgear and controlgear assemblies:Part 3, Particular

requirements for equipment where unskilled persons have
access for their use. 8623(Part 3):1993
Brass glands for PVC cables 12943:1990
Cast iron joints boxes for tee and branch trouser joints suitable
for paper insulated cables for voltages upto and including 11 kV.
10606:1983
Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power

cables upto and including 33 kV rating (second revision) 1255:1983
Compression type tubular in-line connectors for aluminium

conductors of insulated cables (first revision) 8308:1993
Compression type tubular terminal ends for aluminium

conductors of insulated (with amendment No.1) 8309:1993
Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords (first

revision) 8130:1984
Crosslinked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables:Part 1

for working voltage upto and including 1100 V (first revision) 7098(Part 1):1988
Crosslinked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables:Part 2

for working voltage from 3.3 kV upto and including 33 kV (first
revision) (with amendment No.2) 7098(Part 2):1985
Drums for electric cables. 10418:1982
Methods of test for cables :Part 0, General 10810(Part 0):1984
PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including

1100 V (third revision) 694:1990
Application guide for electrical relays for AC systems:Part 1,

Overcurrent relays for feeders and transformers 3842(Part 1):1967

Overcurrent relays for generators and motors 3842(Part 2):1966
Application guide for electrical relays for AC systems: Part 3,
174
Phase unbalance relays including negative phase sequence

relays (with amendment No.1) 3842(Part 3):1966

Thermal relays (with amendment No.1) 3842(Part 4):1966

Distance protection relays 3842(Part 5):1968

Power relays. 3842(Part 6):1972
Application guide for electrical relays for AC systems:Part 7) 3842(Part 7):1972

Frequency relays.

Voltage relays. 3842(Part 8):1976

Relays for busbar protection. 3842(Part 9):1977

Relays for transverse differential protection 3842(Part 10):1976

Differential relays for transformers. 3842(Part 12):1976
Specification for electrical relays for power system protection

(with amendment No.4) 3231(Part 0):1986
Application guide for on-load tap changers 8478:1977
Application guide for power transformers 10561:1983
Cable selaing boxes for oil immersed transformers suitable for

paper insulated lead sheathed cables for highest system
voltages from 12 kV upto and including 36 kV. 9147:1979

transformers:Part 1, Selection. 10028(Part 1):1985

transformers:Part 2, Installation (Superseding IS:1886) 10028(Part II):1981
Outdoor type three-phase distribution transformers upto and

including 100kVA,11kV, Part 1 Non-sealed type (third revision) 1180(Part I):1989
Outdoor type three-phase distribution transformers upto and

including 100kVA,11kV:Part II,Sealed type (first revision) 1180(Part II):1989
Power transformers:Part 1, General (first revisio)(with

amendment No.3) 2026(Part I):1977
Flame proof enclosures of electrical apparatus (First revision) 2148:1968
Guide for selection of electrical equipment of hazardous area

(First revision) 5571:1979
Classification of hazardous areas for electrical installations : Part

I, Areas having gases & vapours (first revision) 5572(Part I):1978
175
Intrinsically safe electrical apparatus & circuits (first revision) 5780:1980
Construction & testing of electrical apparatus with type of

protection e 6381:1972
Intrinsically safe magneto-telephones for use in hazardous

atmospheres 6539:1972
Bolted flame proof cable couplers and adaptors 6789:1972
Pressurised enclosures of electrical equipment for use in

explosive atmospheres 7389:1974
Pressurised enclosures with no internal source of flammable gas

or vapour (first revision) (Part I):1976
Oil immersed apparatus for use in explosive gas atmospheres 7693:1975
Sand filled protection of electrical equipment for use in explosive

atmospheres 7724:1975
Methods of test for ignition temperatures 7820:1975
Classification of maximum surface temperatures of electrical

equipment for use in explosive atmospheres 8239:1976
Guide for electrical equipment for explosive atmospheres 8240:1976
Methods of marking for identifying electrical equipment for

explosive atmospheres 8241:1976
Electrical equipments with type of protection n 8289:1976
Spark test apparatus for intrinsically safe circuits 9166:1979
Classification of flammable gases or vapours with air according

to their maximum experimental safe gaps and minimum igniting 9570:1980
currents
9.0 DRAWINGS
The drawings,specifications and bill of quantities shall be considered as a part of this contract
and any work or materials shown on the drawings and not called for in the specifications or
vice-versa,shall be executed as if specifically called for in both. The contract drawings indicated
the extent and general arrangement of various equipment and their wiring,etc.and are
essentially diagramatic. The drawings broadly suggest the routes to be followed. The work
shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. However, any minor change if foun d essential
to coordinate the installation of this work with other trades shall be made without any additional
cost to the Owners. The drawings and specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the
contractor only and the exact location,distances and levels,etc.will be governed by the space
conditions.
The contractor shall examine all Architectural, Structural, Plumbing and Sanitary, Air
Conditioning and Electrical drawings before starting the work and prepare execution drawings
containing all details mentioned under. These drawings will be approved by Architects. Any
discrepancies which in his opinion appear on them have to be reported to the Architects/Owners
and get them clarified. He shall not be entitied to any extras,for omissions or defects in
electrical drawings or when they conflict with other work.
176
10.0 SUBMISSIONS
10.1 DRAWINGS : The contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architects for their approval
execution drawings and shop drawings of all switch boards,distribution boards,cable trays,
conduit layouts and any fabricated items within 10 days of signing the contract.
10.1.1 EXECUTION DRAWINGS:
The contractor shall submit six sets of blue prints to the Architects within 10 days of the Letter of
Intent from the Owner. These drawings shall contain the following :-
a) Routing and runs of conduits, diameter of conduits, number of wires run in each conduit, size
of wires for point wiring, circuit mains, sub-mains, etc.
b) The layout drawing shall include location of lighting fixtures,switch boards,distribution

boards, socket outlets,conduit arrangement,number of wires and size,junction boxes,pull
boxes,etc. The drawing shall also include a table furnishing the make and quantity of
submains circuits, point wiring,lighting fixtures,socket outlets,etc.
c) Cable routing,cable size,number of cables,cable marker locations.
d) Cable schedule with details such as cable numbers,route lenghts,from and to,etc.
e) Earthing scheme/size layout,location of earth stations with calculations.
f) Complete layout drawings.
g) Complete schematic diagram of the installation.
h) Any other details as required.
i) Revision of drawings as and when required and obtain approval from Architects.
All the drawings shall be of A-1 standard size. Lettering shall be stencilled. Original tracings shall be
submitted. The drawings shall carry the Contractor's title block giving his company's name,address
and shall be signed by the Authorised representative.
10.1.2 AS BUILT DRAWINGS/OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS / INSPECTION

AND TEST REPORT : The contractor shall submit one complete set of original drawings and
three copies of bule prints of the latest revised execution drawings with updated details as per
site conditions blue. Operation and maintenance manual with ITP properly documented shall
be submitted in two sets for all equipments supplied and erected by the contractor.
NOTE : Failing to comply with the above,will result in withholding the release of the retention
money,and any other payments due to the contractor,and issue of virtual completion certificate.
11.0 SITE ENGINEER
The Contractor shall employ a competent,licenced qualified full time electrical Engineer to direct
the work of electrical installations in accordance with the drawings and specifications. The
Engineer shall be available at all times on the site to receive instructions from the
Architect/Owner in the day to day activities throughout the duration of the contract. The
Engineer shall correlate the progress of the work in conjuction with all the relevant requirements
of the supply authority. The skilled workers employed for the work should have requisite
qualifications and should possess competency certificate from the Electrical Inspectroate of
Local Administration.
177
12.0 APPLICATION FOR POWER SUPPLY, FEES, PERMITS, TESTS AND

INSPECTION/APPROVAL BY LOCAL AUTHORITIES :
The contractor shall be responsible for filing and follow up of application for getting the
drawings/scheme approved by the Electrical Inspector and finally the whole installation shall be
got approved by the Electrical Inspector. The contractor shall pay all fees and the same shall
be reimbursed by the Owners at actuals on submission of receipts, On completion of this
work,the contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Architects/Owners certificate of final
inspection and approval by the Local Electrical supply authority. The Architect/Onwers shall
have full powers to require the materials or works to be tested by an independent agency at the
Electrical Contractors expenses in order to establish their soundness and adequacy.
13.0 GENERAL SCOPE
13.1 The Contractor shall furnish all tools,welding equipment testing equipment,test connections and
kits,etc.required for complete installation,testing and commissioning of the items included in the
contract work.
13.2 The rates quoted by Contractor shall include all necessary MS channels, angles, etc.required for
erection of panels, distribution boards,etc.in floor / walls/ cable trenches as required.
13.3 The contractor shall co-operate through the Architect/Owner/Engineer with other contractors at
site,in all matters of common interest,so as not to obstruct operation of others and to ensure the
safety of all personnel and works covered under this specification.
13.4 The work shall be carried out strictly as per the instructions and execution drawings. In case of
any doubt/misunderstanding as to correct interpretation of the drawings or instructions,
necessary clarifications shall be obtained from the Owner/Architect. This contractor shall be
held responsible for any damage to the equipment consequent to not following the
Manufacturer's instructions correctly. All necessary drawings,Manufacturer's equipment
manuals shall be furnished to the owners and a copy to Architects.
13.5 All thefts of equipments/component parts,after take over by the Contractor,till the installation is
handed over to the Owner,shall be make good by the Contractor.
13.6 The Contractor shall have a separate cleaning gang to clean all equipment under erection and
as well as the work area at regular intervals to the satisfaction of the Owner/Architects. In case
the cleaning is not to the Owner's satisfaction he will have the right to carryout the cleaning
operations and any expenditure incurred by the Owner in this regard will be to the Contractor's
account.
13.7 In order to avoid hazards to personnel moving around the equipment such as
switchgear,etc.which is kept charged after installaion before commissioning,such equipment
shall be suitably cordoned off to prevent anyone accidentally going near it.
13.8 The Contractor shall carry out touch-up painting on any equipment indicated by the
Onwers/Architects,if the finish paint on the equipment is soiled or marred during installation
handling.
13.9 Equipment shall be installed in a professional manner so that it is novel,plumb,square and

properly aligned and oriented. No equipment shall be permanently bolted down to foundation or
structure until the alignment has been,checked and found acceptable by the Owner/Architects.
14.0 TOOLS,TACKLES AND OTHER MATERIALS
14.1 The Contractor shall also furnish all necessary consumables like anchor bolts and nuts, rawl
plugs, hacksaw blades, taps, dies, drills, files, wire brushes, necessary pipe scaffolding, ladders,
wooden and consumable material like oxygen, acetylene, greases, cleaning fluids, fasteners,
gaskets, temporary supports, cotton waste and all other miscellaneous supplies of every kind
required for carrying out the work under the contract.
178
14.2 The Contractor shall not dispose off transport or withdraw any tools, tackles, equipment and
material provided by him for the contract without taking prior written approval from
Owner/Architect. Owner/Architect at all times shall have right to refuse permission for disposal,
transport or withdrawal of tools, tackles, equipment and material if in his opinion, the same will
adversely affect the efficient and expeditious completion of the project.
15.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
15.1 All checks and tests as per the Manufacturer's drawings /manuals relevant code of installation
and commissioning for various types of equipments shall be carried out by the contractor as
part of installation work.
15.2 High voltage testing by voltage boosters, relay calibration by secondary injection and meter
calibration have to be carried out at site by authorised agencies before commissioning.
15.3 The Owner may ask for such additional tests on site as in his opinion are necessary to
determine that the works comply with the specifications, Manufacturer's guarantee/instructions
or the applicable code of installation. The contractor shall carry out such additional tests also.
15.4 The Owner's authorised representative shall be present during every test as called for by the
Owner. The Contractor shall record all test values and furnish the required copies of the test
data to the Owner. Electrical circuits and equipments shall be energised or used at nominal
operating voltage only after such reports have been accepted as satisfactory by the Owner.
16.0 HANDING OVER AND TAKING OVER OF WORKS/EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS
The Contractor shall hand over and the Owner shall take over the works/equipments/systems
covered under this contract only after they have been completely installed, tested and
commissioned in all respects by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction of the Owner/Architect
and after the said operation. And all relevant test forms/certificates operation and maintenance
manual's, as built drawings, etc. Incomplete/partly commissioned works/equipments/system will
not be taken over by the Owner. In this regard, the decision of the Owner/Architect will be final
and binding on the Contractor.
17.0 SAMPLES
The Contractor shall submit two sets of samples of accessories and apparatus proposed to
used in the installation to the Project Manager/Architects along with execution for approval.
Drawings of samples as required, shall be submitted by the contractor and this specification
shall not be departed from without the written instructions from the Project Manager/Architects.
The verbal approval given by the Architects to any drawings or samples submitted by the
contractor shall in no way exonerate the contractor from their liability to carry out the work in
accordance with the forms of contract.
18.0 CHANGE IN QUANTITY
Purchaser reserves the right to amend the quantities to be supplied and erected as necessary
and for any such amendments the unit rates offered by Contractor shall apply.
19.0 ACTUAL QUANTITIES
The Contractor shall verify the exact quantities of materials/equipments cables, etc., required
after site measurements as per execution drawings by the engineer before procuring the same.
179
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 415 VOLTS SWITCH BOARDS (INDOOR/OUTDOOR)
1. SCOPE
This specification is intended to cover the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at

manufacturer's works, properly packed for transportation, supply and delivery testing and
commissioning complete in all respects with all components, fittings and accessories for efficient
and trouble-free operation as specified hereinafter for the proposed project.
2. GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1. The equipments shall be designed, manufactured and equipped with accessories in
accordance with this specification and the applicable codes standards indicated below.
Materials and components not specifically stated in this specification but which are
necessary for satisfactory and trouble free operation and maintenance of the equipment
shall be supplied.
2.2. The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices
to ensure satisfactory performance and service life as specified herein.
2.3. Switchboards shall be suitable for an ambient temperature of 45 C.
3. CODES AND STANDARDS
3.1. The equipment covered by this specification shall unless otherwise stated be designed,
constructed and tested in accordance with the requirements of the Indian Electricity Act and
Rules and latest revision of the following standards.
IS 375 : Arrangement of bus bars, main connection and auxiliary wiring.
IS 335 : Insulating coils.
IS 722 : AC electricity meters.
IS 1248 : Direct acting electrical indicating :instruments.
IS 13947 : Motor starters AC, for voltage not IS 8544:exceeding 1000 V

(Part-4,Sec 1) : Direct-on-line AC starters.
IS 2099 : Bushings.
IS 13947 : Degree of protection provided by :enclosures for low voltage (Part :

- I) switchgear and control gear
IS 2419 : Dimensions of panel mounted electrical

: indicating and recording instruments.
IS 13947 : Circuit Breakers.

(Part 2)
180
IS 2607 : Air-break isolators for voltage not :exceeding 1000 Volts.
IS 2705 : Current Transformers.
IS 4201 : Application guide for CT's
IS 13947 : Contractors for voltages not exceeding

(part 4,sec 1) : 1000 V AC or 1200 V DC.
IS 3072 : Installation and maintenance of :switchgear
IS 3231 : Electrical relays for power system protection.
IS 13947 : Air-break switches, air-break disconnectors and fuse

(Part 3) : combination units for voltages not exceeding 1000 V
: AC or 1200 V DC.
IS 3842 : Application guide for electrical relays : for AC System.
IS 4047 : Heavy duty air break switches and composite units of air break
: switches and fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000 V.
IS 4146 : Voltage Transformers.

IS 3156
IS 13947 : General requirements for switchgear and control gear for

(Part 1) : voltages not exceeding 1000 Volts.
IS 4483 : Preferred panel cut-out dimensions for electrical relays.
IS 5124 : Induction motor starters, AC (voltage :not exceeding 1000 V)

: installation and maintenance of code of practice.
IS 5987 : Selection of switches (voltage not exceeding 1000 V)
IS 6875 : Control switches for voltages upto and including 1000V AC &
: 1200 DC.
IS 8588 : Code of practice for thermostatic bimetals Part-I general

: requirements and method of tests.
IS 8623 : Factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear for

: voltages upto and including 1000 V AC and 1200 V DC.
IS 8828 : Miniature air-break circuit breakers for voltages not exceeding

: 1000 Volts.
181
4. DESIGN_REQUIREMENT
4.1. The switchboards shall be designed for 415 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 c/s supply.
4.2. Switchboards shall be suitable for direct-on-line starting of all motors.
4.3. Switchboards shall be rated for minimum fault level as mentioned in data sheets /
Drawings.
4.4. Control power supply of the switchboards shall be 240 V, 1 Phase, 50 Hz AC supply
tapped from the respective module itself.
4.5. The switchboards manufacturers shall apply all derating factors necessary to all
components of the switchboards to comply with the conditions detailed in this
specification.
4.6. The ratings of motors, control-gears, fuse switches, etc. furnished in the drawings are
for tender purposes only. Any changes in the above will be intimated at the time of
placement of purchase order or before fabrication of panels.
4.7. The MCC shall be modular, nondrawout type with DOL starters.
5. CONSTRUCTIONAL_FEATURES
5.1. The switchboard shall be :
5.1.1. Of the totally metal enclosed, indoor, floor mounted, free standing cubicle type with
draw out ACB and fixed type fuse switch units, with compartmentalized design.
5.1.2. Made up of the requisite vertical sections, which when coupled together shall form
continuous dead front switch boards.
5.1.3. Provide dust and damp protection, the degree of protection being no less than IP 54
to IS 2147.
5.1.4. Readily extensible on both sides by the addition of vertical sections after removal of
the end covers.
5.1.5. Provided with access to the feeders, bus bars, cable termination, cable alley etc. from
front only.
5.2. Each vertical section shall comprise :
5.2.1. A front framed structure rolled/folded sheet steel channel section, of

minimum 3 mm thickness, rigidly bolted together. This structure shall house
the components contributing to the major weight of the equipment, such as
circuit breaker cassettes, fuse switch units, main horizontal busbars, vertical
risers and other front mounted accessories.
5.2.2. The structure shall be mounted on a rigid base frame of folded sheet steel of
minimum 3 mm thickness and atleast 75 mm height. The design shall ensure
that the weight of the components is adequately supported without
deformation or loss of alignment during transit or during operation.
5.2.3. Each compartment shall be provided with a hinged door interlocked with
switch/breaker housed inside the compartment so that door can not be
opened unless the switch/breaker is in 'OFF' position.
5.2.4. A cable chamber housing of minimum width 300 mm shall be provided for
the cable end connections, and power/control cable terminations. The
182
design shall ensure generous availability of space of ease of installation and

maintenance of cabling, and adequate safety for working in one vertical
section without coming into accidental contact with live parts in and adjacent
section.
5.2.5. A cover plate at the top of the vertical section, provided with a ventilation
hood where necessary. Any aperture for ventilation shall be covered with a
perforated sheet having less than 1 mm diameter perforations to prevent
entry of vermin.
5.2.6. Front and rear doors shall be fitted with dust tight neoprene gaskets with
easy operating type fasteners designed to ensure proper compression of the
gaskets. When covers are provided in place of doors, generous overlap shall
be assured between sheet steel surfaces with closely spaced fasteners to
preclude the entry of dust. The doors shall have concealed hinges.
Removable screwed covers shall be provided on the rear of the cubicles.
5.2.7. A set of horizontal main bus bars shall be provided at the top or bottom as
required. The vertical bus bars shall be housed in separate fully enclosed
chamber of min. width 350 mm and accessible from front and shall be tapped
off from main horizontal bus bars.
5.2.8. All incoming/outgoing terminals of the individual feeders shall be provided

with insulted shrouds to avoid accidental contact with live parts.
5.3. The height of the panel should not be more than 2200 mm. The working height shall
be limited to a maximum height of 1800 mm. The total depth of the panel should be
adequate to cater for proper cabling space. Panels arranged side by side or in same
room shall have same height and depth.
5.4. Covers and partitions shall be of minimum 16 Guage sheet steel, whereas doors shall
be of min. 14 gauge sheet steel. All sheet steel work forming the exterior of
switchboards shall be smoothly finished, leveled and free from flaws. The corners
should be rounded.
5.5. All switches, push buttons etc. shall be operatable from the front and shall be
flush/semi-flush mounted.
5.6. The apparatus and circuits shall be so arranged as to facilitate their operation and
maintenance and at the same time to ensure the necessary of degree of safety.
5.7. Apparatus forming part of the switchboards shall have the minimum clearances as
per relevant IS. Clearances shall be maintained during normal service conditions.
Creepage distances shall comply to those specified in relevant standards.
5.8. All insulating material shall be of DMC/FRP/SMC to withstand the effects of high
humidity, high temperature, tropical ambient service conditions etc.
5.9. Each module of the draw out type switch boards shall have draw out type contacts for
power termination both incoming and outgoing sides. The control leads shall also be
wired through withdrawable contacts.
5.10. Foundation bolts and nuts for each panel shall be supplied along with the respective
switchboard.
5.11. The lifting eyes for each shipping section and danger notice plates shall be provided
for each switchboards.
5.12. Functional units such as circuit breakers and fuse switches
183
5.13. Metallic/insulated barriers shall be provided within vertical sections and between
adjacent sections to ensure prevention of accidental contact with :
5.13.1. Main bus bars and vertical risers during operation, inspection or maintenance
of functional units and front mounted accessories.
5.13.2. Cable terminations of one functional unit, when working of those of adjacent
unit/units.
5.14. All covers providing access to live power equipment/circuits shall be provided with
tool operated fasteners to prevent unauthorized access.
5.15. Provision shall be made for permanently earthing the frames and other metal parts of
the switchgear by the independent connections.
6. METAL TREATMENT AND FINISH
6.1. All steel work used in the construction of the switchboards should have undergone a
rigorous metal treatment process.
All surface to be painted including interior and exterior of panels, and other metal
parts shall be chemically treated to remove all rust, scale, grease and other adhering
foreign matters. All parts shall be coated with two coats of highly corrosion resistant
primer followed by two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved colour of
approved manufacturer. The finish shall be glossy or matt as required.
The complete treatment, painting, and drying with compressed air operations shall be
done in dry and dust free atmosphere.
Should finished paint chip off or crinkle during transit/handling/installation, the

contractor shall arrange for repainting the equipment at site at his own cost.
7. BUSBARS
7.1. The busbars shall be air insulated and made of high conductivity, high strength
aluminium alloy complying with the requirements of grade E91E of IS 5082 and
suitable for 415 Volts, 4 wire 50 Hz system.
7.2. The busbars and connections shall be suitably supported/braced with

non-hygroscopic DMC/FRP/SMC supports to provide a fault withstand capacity as
specified.
7.3. High tensile bolts and spring washers shall be provided at all busbar joints.
7.4. The busbars shall be liberally sized and shall have uniform cross section throughout,
and shall be capable of carrying the rated current at 415 V continuously. The busbars
shall be designed to withstand a temperature rise of 45 C above the ambient. A
current density of 1.3 Amps/Sqmm for Copper busbars & 0.8 Amps/Sqmm for
Aluminium busbars shall not be exceeded.
7.5. All bus connections, joints and taps shall be short and as straight as possible, and
applied with contact grease in the mating surface.
7.6. The main horizontal busbars shall be run through the entire length of the panel and
shall be accessible for maintenance from the front as well as rear. Busbar chamber
shall have separately screwed covers. All busbars, links etc. shall be provided with
insulating cover to prevent accidental contacts. The natural busbars shall have a
continuous rating of atleast 50% of the phase busbars.
184
7.7. Busbars shall be encased in colour coded heat shrunk PVC sleeves (snug fit type).
An aluminium earth bus of size not less than 50 X 6 mm shall run through the length
of switch boards at top or bottom as required.
8. CIRCUIT_BREAKERS
8.1. Circuit breakers shall be triple pole, air break, horizontal drawout type.
8.2. The breakers shall comply with the requirements of IS 13947 (Parts II & II/Sec.
I) - 1977- Short Circuit Performance Category P-2, and shall have :
8.2.1. A short circuit breaking capacity of not less than 50 KA RMS at 415 Volts 50
Hz AC.
8.2.2. A short circuit making capapcity of 105 KA.
8.2.3. A short-time withstand circuit of 50 KA for 1 second.
8.2.4. Mechanical and electrical endurance for 2000 operating cycles out of which
100 cycles should be for electrical endurance.
8.2.5. Electrical overload performance at 6 times the rated current, 110% of the
rated voltage as recovery voltage and 0.5 power factor.
8.2.6. Dielectric test of 2.5 KV applied for one minute on main circuits.
Test evidence from a recognized independent Laboratory / Institution shall be furnished for
compliance of the breakers with the above requirements.
8.3. The circuit breakers shall be fitted with detachable arc chutes on each pole designed
to permit rapid dispersion, cooling and extinction of the arc. Interface barriers shall be
provided to prevent flashover between phases.
8.4. Arcing contacts shall be of hard wearing material of copper tungsten or silver
tungsten and shall be readily replaceable. Main contacts shall be of pure silver of high
pressure butt type of generous cross section.
8.5. The operating mechanism shall be of robust design, with a minimum number of
linkages to ensure maximum reliability. Manually operated circuit breakers shall be
provided with spring operated closing mechanism which are independent of speed of
manual operation. Electrically operated breakers shall have a motor wound spring
charged closing mechanism. Breaker operation shall be independent of the motor
which shall be used solely for charging the closing spring.
8.6. The operating mechanism shall be such that the breaker is at all times free to open
immediately the trip coil is energized.
8.7. Mechanical operation indicators shall be provided to show open and closed position
of the breaker. Electrically operated breakers shall be additionally provided with
mechanical indications to show charged and discharged conditions of the charging
spring.
8.8. Means shall be provided for slow closing and opening of the breaker for maintenance
purposes, and for manual charging and closing of electrically operated breakers
during emergencies.
8.9. Provision shall be available for fitting a minimum of five trip devices- three
overcurrent, a shunt trip and an undervoltage release or two overcurrent, and
earthfault release, a shunt trip and one undervoltage release. The breakers shall be
of the shunt or series trip type as specified. For static trip device either a shunt trip or
an undervoltage coil shall be provided.
185
8.10. Circuit breakers shall be individually housed in sheet metal cassettes provided with
hinged doors. The breaker along with its operating mechanism shall be mounted on a
robust carriage moving on guide rollers within the cassette. Isolating contacts for both
power and control circuits shall be of robust design and fully self- aligning. The
assembly shall be designed to allow smooth and easy movement of the breaker
within its cassette.
8.11. The breaker shall have three distinct positions within the cassette as follows :
a) 'Service' position : with main and auxiliary contacts connected.
b) 'Test' position : with power contacts fully disconnected and

: control circuit contacts connected.
c) 'Isolated' position : with both power and control circuit contacts fully
disconnected.
It shall be possible to achieve any of the above positions with the cassette door closed.
Mechanical position indicators shall be provided for the three positions of the breaker.
8.12. The moving portion of the circuit breaker shall be so interlocked that :
It shall not be possible to isolate it from the connected position, or to plug it in

from the isolated position with the breaker closed.
The circuit breaker can be closed only when it is in one of the three positions
or when it is fully out of the cassette.
It shall not be possible to open the hinged door of the cassette unless the
breaker is drawn to the isolated position.
Inadvertent withdrawal of the circuit breaker too far beyond its supports is
prevented by suitable stops.
8.13. Moving portions of breakers of the same ratings shall be interchangeable.
8.14. Provision shall be available for the padlocking of the circuit access flaps in any of the
three positions.
8.15. Automatically operated safety shutters shall be provided to screen the fixed isolating
contacts when the breaker is drawn out from the cassette.
8.16. The moving portion of the circuit breaker shall be provided with a heavy duty self
aligning earth contact, which shall make before and break after the main isolating
contacts during insertion into and withdrawal from the service position of the breaker.
Even in the isolated position positive earthing contact should exist.
8.17. Auxiliary switches directly operated by the breaker operating mechanism and having
4 NO and 4 NC contacts, shall be provided on each breaker. The auxiliary switch
contacts shall have a minimum rated thermal current of 10 Amps.
9. COMBINATION-FUSE_SWITCH_UNITS_(FSU's)
9.1. The fuse switch units shall be of the load break, fault make heavy duty, cubicle type.
9.2. The fuse switch units shall be double break and have quick make and quick break
mechanisms, designed to ensure positive operation even in the event of failure of
operating springs.
186
9.3. All fuse switch contacts shall be silver plated at current transfer surfaces.
9.4. The unit shall be provided with a front operating handle. The ON and OFF positions
of the switch handle shall be clearly marked.
9.5. Interlocks shall be provided so as to prevent opening of the unit door when the switch
is in the ON position, and also to prevent closing of the switch with the door not
properly secured. It should, however, be possible to defeat the interlock mechanism
to operate the switch with the door open intentionally.
9.6. The switches shall be capable of withstanding the thermal and electro-magnetic
stresses caused by short circuit currents for the time of operation of the associated
fuse links.
9.7. Fuse switch and air break switch operating handles shall be provided with padlocking
facilities to lock them in OFF position.
9.8. The interior arrangement of the switch unit shall be such that all 'live' parts are
shrouded.
10. INDICATING LAMPS (LED TYPE)
10.1. Filament type indicating lamps shall be provided wherever called for in the control
schematic diagrams. The lamps assembly shall be complete with cluster of LEDs,
holders and lenses.
11. SPACE_HEATERS
11.1. Each vertical section of the switch boards shall be provided with thermostat controlled
space heaters rated for 240 Volts + or - 10%, single phase, 50 Hz. The heaters shall
have individual ON-OFF switch.
11.2. Wiring of space heaters in each switchboards shall be grouped and brought out to
easily accessible terminals for connection to power supply, through switch-fuse unit.
11.3. Each switchboard shall be provided with plug-socket with switch fuse for connection
of hand lamp rated 240 V, 50 Hz. single phase.
12. FUSES
12.1. All control and power fuses shall be link type HRC fuses and they shall be provided
with visible indication to show that they have operated.
13. CURRENT_TRANSFORMERS
13.1. Current transformers shall comply with the requirements of IS 2705. They shall have
ratios, outputs and accuracys as specified/required.
13.2. Current transformers wherever required and called for in the single line diagram
and/or required shall be furnished.
13.3. The CTs shall be bar primary, in epoxy encapsulated type, rated for 415 V. The CTs
shall be designed to withstand the thermal and mechanical stresses resulting from
the maximum short circuit current.
13.4. The vendor shall ensure that the VA output of the CTs are adequate for the relays,
meters and loads connecting them.
187
13.5. The CTs shall be provided with Class A/Class B insulation and proper polarity
markings in a suitable manner.
14. INDICATING/INTEGRATING_METERS
14.1. All indicating instruments shall be of flush mounting industrial pattern, conforming to
the relevant standard.
14.2. The instruments shall have non-reflecting bezels, clearly divided and indelibly marked
scales and shall be provided witherto adjusting devices in the front.
14.3. Integrating instruments shall be of flush mounting switchboard pattern, conforming to

the relevant standards.
14.4. Meters shall be provided with circular 90 scale with square casing of specified size.
14.5. MT instruments shall have + or - 1% accuracy on full scale. Each meter shall be
magnetically screened.
15. CABLE_TERMINATIONS
15.1. Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the switchboard to suit the number,
type and size of aluminium conductor power cables and copper conductor control
cable specified in the detailed specifications.
15.2. Switch board shall be designed either for top or bottom or combined entries and
outgoings which will be confirmed by Architects at the time of drawing approval.
Generous size of cabling chambers shall be provided, with the position of cable gland
and terminals such that cables can be easily and safely terminated. Removable
undrilled plates shall be furnished for fitting the cable glands.
15.3. Sufficient space shall be provided to avoid sharp bending and for easy connection. A
minimum space of 200 mm from the gland plate to the nearest terminal block shall be
provided.
15.4. Multiway terminal blocks complete with screws, nuts, washers and marking strips
shall be furnished for terminating the internal wiring and outgoing cables.
15.5. Power and control terminals shall be washer head screw type or stud type complete
with crimping type connectors. Screw type terminals with screws directly impinging on
conductor are not acceptable.
15.6. Each control terminal shall be capable for connection of 2 Nos. 2.5 mm standard
copper wire at each ends.
15.7. Not more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal. If necessary a number of
terminals shall be jumpered together to provide wiring points.
15.8. Atleast 20% spare terminals shall be provided in each module.
15.9. Terminal blocks for current transformer secondary lead wires shall be provided with
shorting and earthing facility.
15.10. Barriers or shrouds shall be provided to permit safe working at the terminals of one
circuit without accidentally touching that of another live circuit.
15.11. Cable risers shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated short
circuit currents without damage and without causing secondary faults.
16. CONTROL_WIRING
188
16.1. The wiring shall be complete in all respects so as to ensure proper functioning of
control, protection and interlocking scheme.
16.2. All wiring shall be completed upto terminal blocks on the side of each unit-module.
16.3. All control wiring shall be carried out with 1100/660 V grade single core PVC cable
having stranded copper conductors of minimum 2.5 Sqmm.
16.4. Wiring shall be neatly bunched, adequately supported and properly routed to allow for
easy access and maintenance. Wires shall not be spliced or tapped between terminal
point.
16.5. Wires shall be identified by numbered ferrules at each end. The ferrules shall be of
the ring and of non- deteriorating material. They shall be firmly located on each wire
so as to prevent free movement, and shall be interlocking type.
16.6. All control circuit fuses shall be mounted in front of the panel and shall be easily
accessible.
16.7. All spare contacts of relays and switches shall be wired upto the terminal blocks.
16.8. Each of the DC circuit shall be provided with two fuses one in the positive and the
other in the negative for 2 wire DC underground system of specified voltage.
17. GROUND_BUS
17.1. An aluminium ground bus rated to carry maximum fault current shall be furnished
along the entire length of each switchboard. Each stationary unit shall be connected
directly to this ground bus by two separate and distinct connections in accordance
with Indian Electricity Rules.
17.2. Grounding terminals on the ground bus shall be provided. Connectors shall be
provided at either end of switch board for connection to station ground mat.
18. TERMINAL BLOCKS
18.1. Terminal blocks shall be of 660 Volts grade of stud type. Insulating barriers shall be
provided between adjacent terminals.
18.2. Suitable provision shall be made to terminate control/power connections in the

respective module.
18.3. Terminal blocks shall have a minimum current rating of 10 Amps and shall be
shrouded. Provisions shall be made for label inscriptions. The wire terminations to
the blocks shall be of screw type suitable for crimp type socket.
19. NAME PLATE
19.1. The panel as well as feeders compartments shall be provided with name plate of
anodized aluminium, with white engraving on black background. They shall be
properly secured with self tapping screws at the top of the cubicles. The panel/feeder
descriptions shall be as indicated in the drawings/employers. The size of the name
plates shall be proportionate to the respective equipments.
19.2. Also individual panel number and danger plate shall be furnished at back of panel.
20. ACCESSORIES
20.1. The following accessories shall be furnished along with each switchboard.
189
20.2. One (1) no. fuse pulling handle for each switchboard.
20.3. One (1) no. winding handle for withdrawing breaker from the cubicle.
20.4. Other accessories as deemed necessary for trouble free and efficient operation of the
equipment offered.
21. DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
21.1. The following drawings shall be supplied for each switchboard.
21.2. General arrangement drawing for each type of board showing constructional features
and space required in the front for withdrawal of breaker, power and control cable
entry points, location of various devices, terminal blocks, cross sectional details, bus
bar supports, number of buses, etc. shall be submitted within 15 days from the date
of letter of intent for approval.
21.3. Foundation plan and anchor hold details including dead load and impact load.
21.4. Drawing and data sheet for each component.
21.5. Electrical wiring diagram.
21.6. Terminal block arrangement drawing for outgoing feeders.
21.7. Complete relay technical particulars and recommended settings.
21.8. Operation, maintenance and installation manuals, (one set to Consultants).
21.9. Technical Catalogues/Leaflets of CTs, meters, lamps, etc. shall be submitted

alongwith offer.
21.10. The approval of the drawing does not absolve the vendor from his obligation of
ensuring proper and correctness of functioning/operation of the system.
22. TESTS
22.1. ROUTINE AND TYPE TEST
22.2. Type test certificates and results as per relevant Standards (Specification) for all the
equipment offered under the scope of this specification shall be furnished.
22.3. All routine tests on all major components shall be made as per relevant specification.
22.3.1. Inspection : Inspection of the Switchboards including inspection of wiring

and electrical operational tests by the Owner/Architect before dispatch
should be arranged by the tenderer. The cost of transport and incidental
expenses to be borne by the tenderer. Two weeks clear notice to be given
for carrying out the inspection.
22.3.2. Dielectric Tests

Insulation of the main circuit that is the insulation resistance of each
pole to the earth and that between the poles shall be measured.
Insulation resistance to earth of all control wiring should be tested

with 1000 V megger.
Insulation test shall be carried out both before and after high
voltage test.
190
22.4. Each switch board will be completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested for
operation under simulated conditions to ensure correctness of wiring and proper
functioning of all equipments.
22.5. All current carrying parts and wiring shall be subjected to a high potential test.
23. HIGH VOLTAGE TEST
A high voltage test with 2.5 KV for one minute shall be applied between the pole and earth.
Test shall be carried out on each pole in turn with the remaining poles earthed. All units
racked in position and the breakers closed. Originals test certificate shall be submitted along
with panel.
24. PACKING AND TRANSPORT
The switchboards shall be sent to site by Road Transport packed in Wooden Crates. The
packing should be of high quality to avoid any damage to the equipments during transit. They
shall be wrapped with polythene sheets before being placed in crates to prevent damage to
the finish.
25. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OUTDOOR KIOSK
This specification shall be followed while fabricating outdoor kiosk. Precautions to be taken in
providing a separate weather proof enclosure to bring it in conformity with IP55. This
enclosure shall be painted with two coats of primer and epoxy paint to make it weather
resistant.
26. HANDLING :
Switchgears and all its accessories shall be handled carefully in its upright position as
indicated in the packing case. Lifting lugs and jacking pads shall be used for lifting of the
switchgear. While using jacking pads utmost care shall be taken in proper application of
jacks. Where switchgears is dragged or pulled on sleeper or rollers of the traction eyes
provided at the bottom frame shall be used with suitable wire ropes and shackles.
27. STORAGE :
Equipments shall be stored under shelter in a well ventilated, dry place and covered by
suitable polythene or tarpaulin covers for protection against moisture.
28. ERECTION :
Panels shall be installed over a trench. The panels shall be aligned properly and bolted to the
flooring by atleast four bolts. The cables shall be terminated into the panel through bottom
plate. The panel shall be bonded to the earth by connecting earthing leads to the panel earth
bus.
Should finished paint chip off or crinkle during transit / handling/ installation, the Contractor
shall arrange for repainting the equipment at site at his own cost.
29. TESTS :
The following preliminary checks and precommissioning tests shall be carried out before
commissioning the Switchgears in the presence of Buyer/Architect's representatives.
29.1. PRELIMINARY CHECKS :
29.1.1. Check name plate details according to specification.
29.1.2. Check for physical damage.
191
29.1.3. Check tightness of all bolts, clamps and connecting terminals.
29.1.4. Check oil level, air pressure and leakage (wherever applicable).
29.1.5. Check earth connection.
29.1.6. Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings, arc chambers.
29.1.7. Check all moving parts are properly cleaned and lubricated.
29.1.8. Check space heaters provided.
29.2. PRECOMMISSIONING CHECKS :
29.2.1. Check alignment of breaker trucks for free movement. Check correct
operation of shutters.
29.2.2. Slow closing/opening operation.
29.2.3. Check control wiring for correctness of connections, continuity and IR values.
29.2.4. Manual operation of breakers.
29.2.5. ower closing/opening operation manually and electrically.
29.2.6. Breaker closing and tripping time.
29.2.7. Trip free and antipumping operation.
29.2.8. I.R. values, resistance and minimum pick up voltage of coils.
29.2.9. Contact resistance.
29.2.10. Simultaneous closing of all three phases.
29.2.11. Pole discrepancy tests.
29.2.12. Single and three phase auto-reclosse operation.
29.2.13. Check electrical and mechanical interlocks provided.
29.2.14. Check on spring charging motor correct operation of limit switches and time
of charging.
29.2.15. Check on C.Ts.
29.2.16. All functional checks with the relays, meters, alarm scheme, interlock as per
scheme with primary injection kits.
29.2.17. High voltage tests on Control and Power Circuits (2.5 KV).
30. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OUTDOOR KIOSK :
This specification shall be followed while fabricating outdoor Kiosk. Precautions to be taken in
providing a separate weather proof enclosure to bring it in conformity with IP 55. This enclosure
shall be painted with two coats of primer and epoxy paint to make it weather resistant.
192
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ERECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF

415 VOLTS SWITCHGEARS
1. SCOPE
Receiving Inspection,Unloading Storage,Installation,Testing and Commissioning of the

Switchgears shall be in accordance with the specified code of practice and manufacturer's
instructions. The panels shall be aligned properly and bolted,to the flooring by atleast four bolts
for each division of Transport. The cable shall be terminated into the panel through glands fixed
to bottom /top plate. The panel shall be bonded to the earth by connecting leads to the panel
earth bus.
2. HANDLING/UNLOADING
Switchgears and all its accessories shall be handled/unloaded carefully in its upright position as
indicated in the packing case. Lifting lugs and jacking pads shall be used for lifting of the
switchgear. While using jacking pads utmost care shall be taken in proper application of jacks.
Where switchgears is dragged or pulled on sleeper or rollers of the traction eyes provided at the
bottom frame shall be used with suitable wire ropes and shackles. Unloading from the lorry shall
be carried out using a mobile crane or tripod with chain pulley block or rolling over to a platform.
3. STORAGE
Equipments shall be stored under shelter in a well ventilated,dry place and covered by suitable
polythene or tarpaulin covers for protection against moisture.
4. ERECTION
Panels shall be installed over a trench. The panels shall be aligned properly and bolted to the
flooring by atleast four bolts. The cables shall be terminated into the panel through bottom plate.
The panel shall be bonded to the earth by connecting earthing leads to the panel earth bus.
5. TESTS
The following preliminary checks and Precommissioning tests shall be carried out before
commissioning the Switchgears in the presence of Buyer/Architects representatives.
5.1.0 PRELIMINARY CHECKS
5.1.1 Check name plate details according to specification.
5.1.2 Check for physical damage.
5.1.3 Check tightness of all bolts,clamps and connecting terminals.
5.1.4 Check oil level air pressure and leakage (wherever applicable)
5.1.5 Check earth connections.
5.1.6 Check the cleanliness of insulators and bushings,arc chambers.
5.1.7 Check that all moving parts are properly cleaned and lubricated.
5.1.8 Check if space heaters provided.
5.2.0 PRECOMMISSIONING CHECKS
5.2.1 Check alignment of breaker trucks for free movement.Check correct operation of
shutters.
193
5.2.2 Slow-closing/opening operation.
5.2.3 Check control wiring for correctness of connections,continuity and IR values.
5.2.4 Manual operation of breakers.
5.2.5 Power closing/opening operation manually and electrically.
5.2.6 Breaker closing and tripping time.
5.2.7 Trip free and antipumping operation.
5.2.8 I.R.Values,resistance and minimum pick up voltage of coils.
5.2.9 Contact resistance.
5.2.10 Simultaneous closing of all three phases.
5.2.11 Pole discrepancy tests.
5.2.12 Single and three phase auto-reclose operation.
5.2.13 Check electrical and mechanical interlocks provided.
5.2.14 Check on spring charging motor correct operation of limit switches and time of
charging.
5.2.15 Check on C.Ts
5.2.16 All functional checks with the relays,meters,Alarm Scheme,interlock as per

scheme with primary injection kits.
5.2.17 High voltage tests on Control and Power circuits (2.5 KV)
194
SPECIFICATION FOR POWER AND LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

1. GENERAL
This specification is applicable to 415 Volts, 3 phase 4 wire A.C supply and shall conform to the
following Indian Standards (Latest Version).
IS-8623 - Factory built assemblies of switch gear and control gear for voltages
upto and including 1000 V AC and 1200 V DC.
IS-8828 - Miniature circuit breakers for voltages not exceeding 1000 Volts.
IS-2675 - Specification for enclosed distribution fuse boards and cut outs for
voltage not exceeding 1000 Volts.
IS-2208 - HRC cartridge fuse links 650 Volts.
IS-732 - Code of practice for electrical wiring installation.
2. TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION
Distribution boards shall be made of Robust and rigid construction and of totally enclosed dead
front safety type. The enclosures shall be made of MS sheet steel of not less than 16 gauge. The
sheet steel shall be treated with a rigorous rust inhabitation process before fabrication, followed
by two coats of red oxide primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade.
The distribution boards shall comprise of switchfuse unit or miniature circuit breakers as incoming
and required number of circuit breakers or HRC fuses as outgoing.
The main switch and outgoing shall have rating as specified in the drawings and schedule. The
boards shall be designed to have adequate cabling space for either top or bottom entry of both
incoming and outgoing cables. Earthing sockets should be fitted to the casing of D.B.
3. BUS BARS
Suitable colour coded bus bars made of high conductivity aluminium strips and mounted on
non-hygroscopic insulating supports shall be provided. Neutral bus bars shall be of half the size
of phase bus bar. The earth bus shall be also provided of material and size as required.
4. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Miniature circuit breakers shall have a minimum breaking capacity of 9 KA. Circuit breakers shall
be equipped with individual insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front face of all the
breakers shall be flush with each other. The breakers shall have 'quick break trip free'
mechanism with current limiting and overload and short circuit tripping characteristics. The
mechanism shall be such that the circuit can not be held closed when a fault occurs or persists.
The contacts shall be silver tungsten or other suitable material to give long contact life. Multiple
units shall have an intertripping mechanism thereby ensuring complete isolation in the circuit in
the event of an overload or fault in anyone of the phases. The connectors shall be suitably
shrouded.
5. FUSES
Rating of the fuses and carriers shall be as per drawings and schedule of quantities. Fuse
carriers and bases shall be best grade phenolic moldings. They shall be non-inflammable and
non-hygroscopic, with hard gloss finish. HRC fuses shall have non-deteriorating type
characteristics. It shall be link type with rupturing capacity of not less than 35 MVA at 440 V.
6. SAFETY & INTERLOCKS
195
All the live parts be shrouded such that accidental contacts with live parts are totally avoided.
Distribution boards shall be provided with a front hinged door. Distribution boards interior
assembly shall be dead front with the front cover removed. Main lugs shall be shrouded. Suitable
insulating barrier made of arc resistant material shall be provided for phase separation. Ends of
the bus structures shall also be shrouded.
7. CABINET DESIGN
The distribution board cabinet shall be totally enclosed type with dust and vermin proof
construction. The interior surface shall be finished to a off-white shade. The interior components
shall be mounted on a separate sheet which is mounted and locked on to the studs provided
inside the cabinet. Over this, a cover made of hylam sheet or sheet steel shall be provided with
slots equipped with a front door with hinges on one side. Cabinets shall have undrilled
detachable glands plates at both top and bottom and sides. The door should be secured by
robust fasteners enabling dust protection gasket to be compressed quickly and easily. Unless
specified otherwise boards shall be flush mounted in walls.
8. TERMINALS
Distribution boards shall be provided with a terminal block of adequate size to receive mains
incoming cable and outgoing circuits. The location of the terminal block shall be so located that
crowding of wires in the proximity of live parts is avoided. A neutral link having rating equal to that
of phase bus shall be provided.
9. DIRECTORY
Distribution boards shall be provided with a directory indicating the description of loads served by
such circuit breaker, the rating of breakers, size of conductors, etc. The directory shall be
mounted in metal holder with a clear plastic sheet on inside surface of the front door. The DBs
shall be provided with inscription plates. The size of letters shall be as approved and the
wordings for inscription shall be given by Project Manager/Architects.
10. INSTALLATION
Distribution boards shall be surface mounted or recessed mounted as required by the

Consultants and at the locations shown on the drawings. The boards shall be fixed with suitable
angle iron clamps and bolts. All the cables/conduits shall be properly terminated using
glands/grips/checknuts, etc. Wiring shall be terminated properly using crimping/lugs sockets and
PVC identification ferrules. The DBs shall be installed as specified in IS 732 and National
Building Code.
11. FASTENERS
All the screws, nuts, bolts, washers, etc. used for the current carrying parts shall be of brass or
other approved non-ferrous material. Other fasteners shall be made of non-corroding materials.
The screws used for fixing the top plate and the washers shall be of MS with nickel plated.
12. TESTING
Distribution boards shall be tested at factory as per Indian Standard. The tests shall include
insulation test, high voltage test, etc. Distribution boards shall be tested for insulation resistance
after the erection.
13. DRAWING APPROVAL :
The contractor shall submit the drawings for approval before fabrication.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, CONDUITS, WIRING & ACCESSORIES

1. GENERAL
196
This Specification of Medium Voltage Distribution System shall be applicable for wiring 3 phase,
4 wire 415 Volts, 50 Hz AC and single phase, 2 wire 230 Volts, 50 Hz, AC supply.
2. RIGID STEEL/PVC CONDUITS & ACCESSORIES
2.1. MS conduits shall be of welded and screwed sheet steel construction. Conduits shall
be black stove enameled inside and outside. The conduits shall conform to the
requirements of relevant IS (latest edition) in all respects. The conduits shall have
uniform wall thickness/cross section throughout. Conduits shall bear the name, trade
mark of the manufacturer and size of conduit on each length. The conduits shall be
delivered to the site in original bundles. Conduits of less than 19 mm dia. shall not
be used. The minimum wall thickness of conduits shall be as follows :-
Rigid M.S Conduits : a) 19,25 & 32 mm - 16 gauge.

: b) 38 mm & above - 14 gauge.
Rigid PVC Conduits - 2 mm. (Heavy Duty)
2.2. Conduit Accessories : Conduit accessories such as bends, inspection bends,

inspection tees, elbows, reducers, draw boxes, junction boxes, etc. shall be of
approved makes. Boxes shall have internally tapped spouts, junction
boxes/inspection boxes shall be internally tapped table covers. Necessary pull boxes
of adequate sizes shall be provided wherever required at no extra cost.
2.3. All conduits shall be of ample size for easy 'draw in' and 'draw out' of all the wires in
the conduits. In no case the total cross section of wires measured over all be more
than forty percent of the area of the conduit.
2.4. All the conduits shall be adequately protected while stored on site prior to erection
and no damaged conduit shall be used.
2.5. All conduit accessories shall be made out of 16 Gauge thick MS enclosures..
3. PREPARATION OF CONDUIT :
The inside surface and ends of conduits and threads and fittings used shall be clean, smooth,
cut square and free from burrs and other defects. Powdered soap stone, talc or prepared
compounds shall be used as lubricants to facilitate the smooth pulling in of conductors.
4. ERECTION OF CONDUIT
4.1. The conduit shall be properly and tightly screwed between the various lengths and to
the boxes to which it runs and terminates. No part of the conduit shall be under
mechanical stress and the whole conduit system shall be electrically and
mechanically continuous throughout.
197
4.2. Conduits shall be installed with provision for ventilation self drainage in the event of
ingress of moisture due to condensation or any other reason and prevent sweating.
4.3. A suitable drainage hole shall be drilled in the bottom of the lowest conduit box in
every 9 Mtrs. of horizontal length.
5. INSTALLATION OF RECESSED CONDUIT SYSTEM
5.1. The conduits shall be installed in such a manner that running can be carried out from
the fittings boxes and switch boxes only.
5.2. Conduits which are to be taken in the ceiling slab shall be laid on the prepared
shuttering work of the ceiling slab before concrete is poured, and tied to bars at every
500 mm. The conduits shall be made water-tight by using bituminous compound at
the screwed ends. The conduits in ceiling slab shall be straight as far as possible.
5.3. Conduits recessed in walls shall be secured rigidly by means of steel hooks/staples
at 0.8 mtrs. intervals. Before conduit is concealed in the walls, all chases, grooves
shall be neatly made to proper dimensions to accommodate the required number of
conduits.
The outlet boxes, point control boxes, inspection and draw boxes shall be securely
fixed by means of counter sunk steel screws and rawl plugs. They shall be firmly
grouted in position prior to plastering fixed as and when conduit is being laid. The
recessing of conduits in walls shall be so arranged as to allow atleast 12 mm plaster
cover on the same. All grooves, chases, etc. shall be refilled with cement mortar and
finished upto the wall surface before plastering of walls is taken up by the general
contractor. The top edge of the conduit shall be atleast 25 mm below the finished
surface of wall. Wherever conduits terminate into point control boxes, distribution
boards, etc. conduits shall be rigidly connected to the boxes, boards, etc. with
checknuts on either side of the entry to ensure electrical continuity.
5.4. After conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes, etc. fixed in position their outlets shall be
properly plugged with PVC stoppers or with any other suitable materials so that
water, mortar, vermins or any other foreign material do not enter into the conduit
system.
5.5. To facilitate easy drawing of wires in conduit necessary GI pull wires of 16 SWG shall
be inserted into the conduit immediately after shuttering is removed.
5.6. The Electrical Contractor shall be present during the pouring of concrete to
ensure that the conduits and accessories are not displaced or blocked.
5.7. The conduits shall be swabbed out by drawing dry swabs of rag through the conduit
to remove all moisture prior to drawing of wires.
5.8. Where vertical concealed conduits pass through floors or beams and horizontal
concealed conduits required to pass through columns or beams, these shall be taken
through rigid PVC/GI pipes to be inserted in the floors /columns/beams, etc. during
casting for which no extra payment shall be entertained.
5.9. Extension collars of suitable depth shall be used as necessary to leave all boxes
absolutely flush with the finished wall or ceiling surface.
5.10. Conduits shall not be buried or plastered etc. unless and until the work has been
inspected by the Owner/ Architects.
6. INSTALLATION OF SURFACE CONDUIT SYSTEM
198
6.1. Conduits shall run in square and symmetrical lines. Before the conduits are installed,
the exact routes shall be marked at site and approval of the Architect shall be
obtained. Conduits shall be fixed by heavy gauge GI base plates, saddles, secured to
suitable rawl plugs, at an interval of not more than 1 Mtr. Conduits shall be joined by
means of screwed couplers and screwed accessories only. In long distance straight
runs of conduit, inspection type couplers or running type couplers or pull boxes shall
be provided.
6.2. Bends in conduit runs shall be done by bending conduits by pipe bending machine.
Bends which cannot be negotiated by pipe bends, shall be accompanied by
introducing inspection boxes or inspection bends. Not more than three equivalent 90
C bends shall be used in a conduit run from outlet to outlet.
6.3. All the conduit openings shall be properly plugged with PVC stoppers/bushes. The
conduits shall be adequately protected against rust by applying two coats of
approved synthetic enamel paint after the installation is completed.
6.4. Wherever conduits terminate conduits shall be rigidly connected to the box/board
with brass hexagonal checknuts with compression washers on either side of the entry
to ensure proper electrical and mechanical continuity.
6.5. The crossing of surface conduits shall not be generally permitted and to avoid such
crossings, adopter boxes shall be used at junctions/crossings.
6.6. All unused conduit entries shall be blanked off in an approved and where conduits
terminates in adopter boxes. All removable box covers shall be firmly secured to
provide complete enclosure.
7. CONDUITS ABOVE FALSE CEILING
7.1. In the false ceiling area, the conduits shall be run above the false ceiling frame work
supported by means of M.S straps secured and fixed to both conduits and structural
ceiling, keeping the outlet box as near as possible to the fittings/fans for connections.
The conduit boxes for fittings/fans are independently supported by means of separate
fixing arrangements to the box and structural ceiling so that the box is held rigidly.
8. ENCLOSURE FOR ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
8.1. Enclosure for electrical accessories shall conform to IS:5133-Part I. The wall
thickness of MS enclosures shall be not less than 1.6 mm. The enclosure boxes shall
be provided with a minimum of four fixing lugs located at the corners for fixing the
covers. All fixing lugs shall have tapped holes to take machined brass screws.
8.2. Sufficient number of knockouts shall be provided for conduit entries. The enclosures
shall be adequately protected against rust of corrosion both inside and outside. The
enclosures shall be provided with 5 mm thick overlapped white PVC or perspex sheet
cover with rounded corners and beveled edges for mounting switches, sockets etc.
Wherever different phase conductors are brought into the same enclosure, phase
barriers shall be provided.
8.3. Minimum size of the box shall be 75 x 75 x 75 mm.
8.4. Draw boxes of ample dimension shall be provided at convenient points on

walls/ceilings to facilitate pulling of long runs of wire. These boxes will be as few as
possible and located where found necessary and approved by Architects at no extra
cost.
8.5. Where flush conduits are required to terminate at surface mounted equipment, the
conduit shall terminate at a flush box and the back of the equipment should fully
199
cover the flush box and brass screws shall be used between the equipment and the
box in addition to any other means of fixing and earthing arrangement.
The alternative arrangement to the above shall be by means of fixing a terminal

extension box to the flush conduit box in which case a break joint ring shall be fitted
between boxes.
9. WIRING CONDUCTORS
9.1. All wiring conductors shall be PVC insulated, copper conductors of 1100 V grade,
and shall conform to IS:694 Part II (Latest Edition).
9.2. Wiring conductors shall be supplied in Red, Blue, Yellow, Black and Green colours
for easy identification of wires. The wires shall be supplied in sealed coils of 100 Mtrs.
length and shall bear manufacturer's trade mark, name, Voltage grade etc.
10. INSTALLATION OF WIRING CONDUCTORS/CABLES
10.1. The wiring conductors shall not be drawn into the conduits until all the works of any
nature that may cause damage to the wires are completed. The installation and
termination of wires shall be carried out with due regard to the followings
10.1.1. While drawing the wiring conductors, care shall be taken to avoid scratches and kinks
which cause breakage of conductors. There shall be no sharp bends in the conduit
system.
10.1.2. Strands of the wires shall not be cut for connecting to the terminals or lugs. The
terminals shall have adequate cross section to take all the strands.
10.1.3. Oxide inhibition grease shall be applied at all terminals and connections.
10.1.4. Brass flat washers of large area shall be used for bolted terminals.
10.1.5. Bimetallic connectors should be used wherever aluminium conductors are tapped
from copper mains or vise-versa.
10.2. Wiring for power and lighting circuits shall be carried out in separate and distinct
wiring systems.
10.3. The wiring system envisaged is generally shown on the layout drawings and line
diagrams. However, a brief account of the general wiring system is given below :
10.3.1. Submains wiring - Wiring from Meterboards/switch boards to the individual

distribution boards, and shall consist of wires, conduits, all conduit and fixing
accessories as required and specified. The sizes of conduits and number of wires
shall be as specified in Schedule of Quantities. Wires shall be drawn in conduits as
required without being damaged, with necessary draw boxes if required. The wire
lengths must be adequate for terminating at either end and identifying ferrules shall
be provided at termination. The wiring shall be colour coded. The rate shall include all
materials, connections, labour etc. as specified above.
10.3.2. Circuit wiring - Wiring from DBs to the first point control boxes for lighting, fans, 5A
sockets, call bells, etc. The scope of work shall be same as in submain wiring.
10.3.3. Power wiring : The wiring from DBs to heating supplies, 15 A 3 pin socket outlets,
etc. The scope of work shall be same as in sub-main wiring.
10.4. Each sub-main/circuit main/power wiring circuit shall also have its own earth
continuity wire as specified.
200
10.5. All the wiring shall be carried out in loop-in-loop system only and phase or line
conductors shall be looped at switch box and neutral conductor can be looped from
light, fan or sockets.
10.6. The maximum number of various size conductors that could be drawn into various
sizes of conduits shall be as per table II of IS:732 (Latest Edition). The wiring shall be
colour coded for easy identification of phases and neutral. The following colour codes
shall be adopted.
Phases - Red, Yellow and Blue.
Neutral - Black.
Earth - Green or Bare wire as specified.
10.7. All submains and circuit wiring shall be provided with printed PVC identification
ferrules at either end bearing the circuit number and designation.
11. SWITCHES, SOCKETS AND ACCESSORIES
11.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS : General control switches shall be of a 5 A rating and

shall be of approved make/type suitable for flush mounting. Switches shall have
either integral mounting plates or white PVC/perspex of min. 4.5 mm thick.
11.2. All sockets, 5A and 15A ratings shall be of flush mounting type with combined control
switches of the same rating as that of the sockets. All sockets outlet shall be of 3 pin
type.
11.3. The switch, plug socket or regulator boxes shall be made of GI/sheet steel of
minimum 16 SWG on all sides except in the front. Depth of boxes shall not be less
than 75 mm and suitably increased where fan regulators are mounted in flush
pattern. The boxes shall be provided with suitable earthing studs. Wherever required
switches/fittings shall be fixed on metal strip which in turn are welded to the box.
11.4. Fan regulators shall be flush type and earthed with earth continuity conductor. The
fan regulator shall be of electronic type.
12. LAMPHOLDERS, CEILING ROSES, ETC.
12.1. Accessories for light outlets such as lamp holders, ceiling roses, etc. shall be in
conformity with requirements of relevant IS specification. Only approved make of
accessories shall be supplied.
12.2. Screwed holder shall be used in brackets and pendants, light fittings shall have brass
holders on T.W. round blocks.
12.3. Ceiling roses for recessed system of wiring shall be porcelain make and flush type.
For surface type of wiring this shall be bakelite.
13. INSTALLATION OF SWITCHES, SOCKETS AND ACCESSORIES
All the switches shall be wired on phases. Connections shall be made only after
testing the wires for continuity, cross, phase etc. with the help of megger. Regulators
shall be fixed on adjustable MS flat straps inside the enclosure. The arrangement of
switches and sockets shall be neat and systematic. Covers for enclosures
accommodating switches, sockets etc. (point control boxes) shall be of 4.5 mm thick,
fine finished PVC/perspex material or laminated hylam sheet and fixed to the
enclosure in plumb with counter sunk head, chromium plated MS screws and
washers. Outlets shall be terminated into a flush type fan box for fan points. For wall
plug sockets, the conductors may be terminated directly into the switches and
sockets. The outlets point control boxes etc. shall be set out as shown on the
201
drawings. Before fixing these, the contractors shall obtain clearance from the
Owner/Architect with regard to their proper locations. The enclosures of
sockets/and 3rd pin of the sockets shall be connected to the ground through an earth
continuity wires, as specified.
14. CAPACITY OF CIRCUITS
14.1. Light points, 5A socket points, fans, and call bell points may be wired on a common
circuit. Such of those circuits shall not have more than 10 nos. of Light/fan/socket
points or a load of 800 W whichever is less. Not more than two numbers of 15A
socket outlets shall be wired on the same circuit.
15. POINT WIRING
15.1. Point wiring shall commence from the first point control box/local control box for the
points connected to the same circuit. Point wiring for lights, ceiling and exhaust fans,
5A sockets, call bells etc. shall be carried out with 1100 V Grade PVC insulated
wires. The point wiring shall be inclusive of conduits of not less than 19 mm size,
switches, wiring alongwith conduit accessories such as bends, inspections bends,
reducers, pull boxes, junction boxes, switch boxes, fan boxes, covers etc. together
with wiring accessories such as ceiling roses, brass lamp holders, T.W Blocks, loose
wires upto 1 Mtr. long at outlet end connectors point control boxes (enclosure for
electrical accessories) switches, etc. Point wiring shall be provided with earth
continuity wire as specified for earthing 3rd pin of sockets, luminaries and fan fixtures.
Light control shall be either single, twin or multiple points controlled by a switch, as
specified.
The point wiring for Light/Fans/5A sockets etc. shall include the supply and
installation of all materials specified above. Any item not specifically included but
required for satisfactory completion of the point wiring shall also be included. No
separate extra price will be allowed for any item under point wiring.
A dependent socket point shall mean the combination 5A switch socket outlet/point
mounted on the same switchboard as any other point/points and shall include the 5A
switch and socket.
The fan point shall be complete with fan hook box flush mounted in slab, control
switch mounted in switch box and electronic regulator, complete with cover. The
measurement will be numbers of each kind of point and as specified in Schedule of
Quantities.
16. FIXTURES/FANS :
16.1. LIGHT FITTINGS :
Unless otherwise specified, light fittings shall be generally fixed as directed by

Owner/Architects.
16.1.1. Fittings such as wall brackets shall be fixed at 2200 mm from FFL.
16.1.2. Bulk head fittings shall be flush with ceiling/wall as required and shall be at a height
as specified or directed.
16.1.3. Pendant fittings shall be suspended to a height of 2400 mm from FFL.
16.1.4. The fluorescent fittings shall be fixed in such a manner that the wiring conductors
shall not terminate in a ceiling rose but in a junction box 300 mm away from the
center of the fitting along the length of the fitting so that no exposed wiring is seen
from outside.
202
16.2. FANS
16.2.1. CEILING FANS
Ceiling fans shall be suspended from the special fan hook boxes. The fan wiring shall
be terminated in porcelain/PVC multiway connector.
Each fan shall have a separate switch and speed regulator. The canopy at the top of
the suspension rod shall effectively hide the suspension hook.
The control switch and the electronic regulator for the fan shall be included in the
point wiring.
17. TESTING OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
17.1. TESTING OF INSTALLATION SHALL BE AS PER IS 732-1982
17.1.1. The insulation resistance shall be measured by applying between earth and whole
system of conductors of any section thereof with all fuses in place and all switches
closed and except in earthed concentric wiring all lamps in position or both poles of
the installation otherwise electrically connected together, where a direct current
pressure of not less than twice the working pressure provided that it need not exceed
500 Volts for medium voltage circuits. Where the supply is derived from the three wire
(A.C or D.C) or a poly phase system, the neutral pole of which is connected to earth
either direct or through added resistance, the working pressure shall be deemed to
be that which is maintained between the outer or phase conductor and neutral.
17.1.2. The insulation resistance measured as above shall not be less than 50 megohms
divided by the number or points on the circuits provided that the whole installation
shall be required to have an insulation resistance greater than one megohm.
17.1.3. Control rehostats, heating and power appliances and electric signs may, if required
be disconnected from the circuit during the test but in the event of the insulation
resistance between the case or frame work and all live parts of each rheostat
appliances and all live parts of each rheostat and sign shall be less than that
specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specification or where there is no such
specification shall not be less than half a megohm.
17.1.4. The insulation resistance shall also be measured between all conductors connected
to one pole or phase conductor of the supply and all the conductors connected to the
middle wire or the neutral or to the other pole or phase conductors of the supply and
its value shall not be less than specified in sub-clause 17.1.2.
17.2. TESTING OF EARTH CONTINUITY PATH
The earth continuity conductor including metal conduits and metallic envelopes in all
cases shall be tested for electrical continuity and the electrical resistance of the same
alongwith the earthing lead but excluding any added resistance or earth leakage
circuit breaker measured from the connection with the earth electrodes to any point in
the earth continuity conductor in the completed installation shall not exceed one ohm.
For checking the efficiency of earthing, the earth resistance of each earth electrode
shall also be measured. This test shall preferably be done during summer months.
17.3. TESTING OF POLARITY OF NON-LINKED SINGLE POLE SWITCHES
In a two wire installation, a test shall be made to verify that all non-linked, single pole
switches have been fitted in the same conductor throughout and that such conductor
has been connected to an outer or phase conductor or to the non-earthed conductor
of the supply.
203
17.4. The contractor shall be responsible for providing the necessary instruments and
subsidiary earth for carrying out the tests. The earth coordinating tests shall comply
with the IS specifications as may be applicable. Should the above tests not complete
with the limits laid down, the contractors shall do the necessary rectification of the
fault till the required results are obtained.
SPECIFICATION FOR DUMMY CONDUITS, FOR COMMUNICATION
& DATA SYSTEM
The conduits for the telephone system as well as Intercom System and Data System shall be
same as explained and specified elsewhere for other work. The minimum size of conduits
used for Telephone System/Intercom shall be of 19 mm dia.
All distribution boxes shall be flush mounting, flat fronted, 16 Gauge sheet steel enclosed
boxes flush with wall and properly joined to conduits. The distribution boxes shall incorporate
terminal strips of the combined soldering screw type/tag blocks as required.
The telephone outlet boxes made of 16 Gauge sheet steel shall be of minimum 75 x 75 x 75
mm. These shall be flush mounting type installed with an approved cover matching with all
other outlets in the electrical system and consisting of a CAT 5 RJ 45 outlet and approved by
the structured data and communication cabling system.
The telephone boxes shall be generally mounted at 450 mm FFL unless otherwise
specified/indicated in drawing.
The contractor shall consult and co-operate with the telephone department when installing the
telephone wiring and conduit system and shall abide by their requirements, rules and
regulations, shall furnish all work and material to secure their approval of the completed
installation.
Detailed drawings showing the telephone terminal and junction boxes fabricated in
accordance with above requirements shall be submitted by the contractor for approval to the
telephone department and the Architects.
Rates shall include a GI fish wire left in the conduit to draw telephone wires. The end of
conduit shall be sealed to prevent dirt, dust, mortar or any foreign matter going into telephone
conduits.
The telephone indoor wires shall be 0.5 mm annealed tinned copper conductor, PVC
insulated, twisted into pairs, laid up, taped and overall PVC sheathed, or CAT 5# UTP/STP
cable.
The telephone outdoor cable shall be 0.5 mm annealed copper conductor, polythene
insulated, colour coded, twisted into pairs, laid up, jelly filled with petroleum jelly compound,
wrapped with non-hygroscopic tape under moisture barrier poly-al-laminated foil tape and
embedded with water proof polythene material.
204
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
lightning protection system in conformity with the requirements of IS:2309, consisting of vertical
air termination the horizontal air terminations, down conductors and earth stations.
2. AIR TERMINATIONS
The air terminations shall be provided at the points shown on the drawings. The vertical air
terminations shall consist of copper spikes fixed onto 25 mm dia. copper tubes of atleast 1.5
Mtrs. long grouted to the surface of the roof with base plate as approved by Consultants. The
horizontal air terminations shall consist of a rigid network of tapes fixed to the surface of the roof.
All exposed metal work and roof structures forming part of the structure to be protected shall be
bonded to the net work by the conductors of the appropriate cross section.
3. DOWN CONDUCTORS
Air terminations shall be connected to the earth terminations by tapes fixed onto walls of the
structures with spacers. The tapes shall be securely fixed to walls by means of brass saddles
and metallic fasteners. Where the down conductors are laid underground, they shall be laid at a
depth of 750 mm below the ground level, buried in trench, covered with a 100 mm thick layer of
sand and protected by cable protection tiles. All metallic parts of the building above the main roof
level including ducts, towers , pipes gutters and other mechanical equipments shall be bonded to
the down conductors.
4. GENERAL
4.1. The materials shall be free from rust, scale and other electrical and mechanical defects.
The size, materials and quantity shall be as specified.
4.2. Steel earthing conductors above ground shall be hot dip galvanized. If painted it shall be
given two coats of approved bitumastic paint/anti-corrosive paint.
4.3. Test links in suitable enclosures shall be installed by the contractor at no extra cost for
connection between each lightning conductor down conductor and earth electrode.
4.4. The scope of installation of lightning conductors on the roof of buildings shall include
laying, anchoring, fastening and cleating of horizontal conductors, grouting of vertical
rods where necessary, laying, fastening/cleating/welding of the down-comers on the
walls/columns of the building and connection to the test links above ground level, and
upto earh station.
4.5. Lightning protection conductors shall not be connected to other general earthing
conductors.
4.6. The lightning protection air termination rods and/or horizontal air termination conductors
shall be fixed in such a way that they remain in their installed position even during
adverse weather conditions.
205
4.7. The down conductors shall follow a direct path to earth. There shall not be any sharp,
turns and kinks in the down conductors.
4.8. All joints in the down conductors shall be of welded/brazed type. All metallic structures
within 2 m vicinity of down conductors shall be bonded to the lightning protection system.
4.9. Every down conductor shall be provided with a test link at about 1000 mm above ground
level. The test link shall be directly connected to the earthing system/electrode.
4.10. The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with the underground
metallic service ducts, cables, cable conduits and metal enclosures of electrical
equipments.
4.11. Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I conduits.
4.12. Wherever required, if indicated in drawings, for fuel oil and other inflammable liquid
storage tanks lightning and protection shall be provided with horizontal conductors
strung between tall poles covering the entire areas.
5. JOINTS BONDING
The system shall have preferably no joints and they shall be made mechanically and
electrically strong and effective. Bolted joints should only be used on test points or on bonds
to as existing metal. Generally jointing/connections/installations shall be as in Earthing
system.
6. EARTH TERMINATIONS
Suitable number of earth terminations shall be provided. The earth termination shall consist
of pipe/plate earth electrode as specified elsewhere in the Earthing Specification, and
generally conforming to IS : 3043. The earth terminations shall be complete in all respects
with chamber and cover, etc. as per the detailed specifications.
Before installing the lightning protection system, the contractor shall obtain approval from the
Engineer with respect to the locations of air terminations and the routes for the down
conductors.
7. TEST CLAMPS/LINKS
Test clamps/links shall be manufactured from phosphor bronze or approved equivalent with
four fixing holes. Tape conductors shall be fixed to flat roof surfaces by means of suitable
fixing arrangement as approved.
All fixing screws shall be brass.
8. TESTING
Suitable testing links be provided at required points as per the code of practice CP 326/IS
2309. The contractor shall carry out tests on completion of the installation and submit the
readings for approval.
206
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW TENSION CABLES

1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the technical requirements of supply, laying, testing and
commissioning of Heavy duty medium voltage cables upto 1100 Volts for power, control and
lighting application for efficient and trouble free operation.
The cable shall be properly packed for transportation, supply and delivery at site.
1. CODE AND STANDARDS
The materials covered by this specification shall unless otherwise stated as designed,
constructed, manufactured and tested in accordance with latest revisions of the relevant Indian
Standards.
IS 1554 (Part I)- 1988 : PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto
and including 1000 V.
IS 5831 - 1984 : PVC insulation & sheath of electric cables.
IS 8130 - 1984 : Conductors for insulated electrical cables.
IS 3961 (Part II) - 1977 : Recommended current ratings for PVC

insulated and PVC sheathed heavy duty cables.
2. RATING
The cable shall be rated for a voltage rating of 650/1100 Volts.
3. SELECTION OF CABLES:
Cables should be selected considering the conditions of maximum connected load, ambient
temperature, grouping factor, allowance for voltage drops. However it is the responsibility of the
contractor to recheck the sizes before cables are procured. He should submit the cable derating,
voltage drop and length calculation to Architects for approval before procuring cables.
4. INSULATION:
The conductor is insulated with suitably compounded PVC applied to the conductor by the
extrusion.
The PVC compound used for insulation shall have reduced flame propagation property. This
shall also have reduced emission of hydrogen-chloride gas fumes etc. when severely overheated
during fires.
5. CORE IDENTIFICATION:
The cores of the cables shall be provided with the colour scheme of PVC insulation as per IS for
any easy identification.
207
6. ARMOURING:
The armoring of multicore cable consists of either GI round steel wires or GI flat strips and in
case of single core cable armouring shall be of non-magnetic material such as hard drawn
aluminium or aluminium alloy wires or strips.
7. OUTER SHEATH:
The PVC compound used for outer sheath shall be resistant to termites, fungus and rodent
attacks and shall also have reduced flame propagation property as specified above.
8. IDENTIFICATION:
The manufacturer's name, voltage grade of cable, year of manufacture, nominal cross-sectional
area of conductor shall be embossed on the outer sheath of the cables throughout the length of
the cable at regular intervals.
9. PACKING, MARKING AND TRANSPORT:
The cables shall be supplied in strong, non-returnable wooden drums of heavy construction.
Each cable drum is marked with particulars of cable size, voltage class, length, direction of
rolling, position of outer gross weight, ISI certification marking etc.
10. STORING, LAYING, JOINTING AND TERMINATIONS:
10.1. STORING:
All the cables shall be supplied in drums, on receipt of cables at site, the cables shall be
inspected and stored in drums with flanges of the cable drum in vertical position.
Employer/Architects will inspect the cables before storing. Contractor shall take out
samples from the drums as per their instructions and send them to the manufacturers to
conduct the approval tests. After the receipt of the test analysis, the cable will be accepted
by the Employer.
10.2. LAYING:
Cables shall be laid as per the specification given below :
10.2.1. Cables in Outdoor Trenches:
Cables shall be laid in outdoor trenches wherever called for. The depth of the trenches shall not
be less than 75 cms. from the Formed Ground Level (FGL) which has to be ascertained from the
Architects. The width of the trenches shall not be less than 45 cms. A spacing of not less than
the cable diamter shall be allowed between the cables. The trenches shall be cut square with
vertical side walls and with uniform depth. Suitable shoring and propping may be done to avoid
caving in of trench walls. The floor of the trench shall be rammed level. Cable unreeling from
drums shall be done only with the help of cable drum rolling supports. The cables shall be laid in
trenches over the rollers placed inside the trench. The cable drum shall be rolled in the direction
of the arrow for rolling. Wherever cables are bent, the minimum bending radius shall not be less
than 12 times the diameter of the cable. 15 cms thick layer of sand cushioning to be provided full
of stones and pebbles. Cable shall be taken lifted and placed over this and cushion. The cable
shall then be covered with a 15 cms thick sand cushion, where cable is laid in rocky situation.
Extra thick cushioning of sand as may be required/decided by the Project Manager/Architects
shall be done without extra charge. Over this, a course of cable protection tiles or brick shall be
provided to cover the cables by 5 cms on either side. Unless otherwise specified, the cable shall
be protected by concrete tiles/stone slabs of minimum 25 mm thick placed on top of the trench
breadthwise for the full length of the cable. Trench shall be back filled with earth and
consolidated. Cables shall be laid in hume pipes at all road crossings and in GI pipes / PVC
208
pipes at the wall entries. Approved cable markers made of concrete blocks indicating the voltage
grade and the direction of run of the cables shall be installed at regular intervals of 25 Mtrs. The
depth of concrete blocks shall be atleast 300 mm below ground and 50 mm above ground.
10.2.2. Cables in Indoor Trenches:
10.2.3. Cables shall be laid in indoor trenches wherever specified. Suitable painted MS
base plate clamps, saddles, GI nuts/bolts or alternatively UV resistant tie wraps
shall be used for securing the cables in position at an interval not more than 450
mm. Spacing between the cables shall not be less than 15 mm center to center.
Wherever specified, trenches shall be filled with fine sand and covered with steel
chequered trench covers or RCC slabs.
10.2.4. All chases and passage if necessary for the laying of service cables at the entry or
of premises shall have to be cut and made good to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager/ Consultants.
10.2.5. All cables entries into the buildings/cable trenches/ducts, etc. shall be suitably
sealed as required by the Project Manager/Consultants without extra cost.
11. JOINTING AND END TERMINATIONS:

Cable jointing shall be done as per the recommendations of the cable manufacturer. Jointing
shall be done by qualified cable jointer under strict supervision. Sample crimping of different
size cables shall be subjected to contact resistance and heating tests in the presence of the
Architects.
Each termination shall be carried out using Electroplated Brass double compression glands
and copper cable sockets and approved jointing materials are to be used. Hydraulic
crimping tool shall be used for making the end terminations. Cable gland shall be
bonded to the earth by using suitable copper wire with earth tags. The cable armoring
is to be earthed properly so that the earth continuity is maintained. All outdoor
terminations shall be provided with PVC shrouds to make them water vermin proof.
12. TESTING:
12.1. Cables shall be tested at factory as per the regulations of IS:1554 Part I. The tests
shall incorporate routine tests, type tests and acceptance tests. Copy of such test
certificates shall be furnished to the Owner.
12.2. Cables shall be tested at site after installation and results shall be submitted to
Consultants/Engineers.
12.3. Insulation resistance between conductors and neutral and conductors and earth.
209
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHT FITTINGS AND

ACCESSORIES
1.0 SCOPE:
This Specification also covers the design, material specification, manufacture,

testing at works, inspection and delivery at site of light fittings and their associated
accessories.
2.0 STANDARDS:
The light fittings and their associated accessories such as lamps/tubes, reflector,
housings, ballasts etc. shall comply with the latest applicable standards.
All luminaries, lamps and accessories shall be of same make.
3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
Fittings shall be designed for continuous trouble-free operation under hot humid
o
atmospheric conditions, at an ambient of 45 C without reduction in lamp lift or
without deterioration of materials and internal wiring. Outdoor fittings shall be
weatherproof and waterproof type.
The fittings shall be designed so as to facilitate easy maintenance, including

cleaning, replacement of lamps/starters etc.
Connectors between different components shall be made in such a way that they
will not work loose by small vibration.
For each type of light fitting, the Manufacturer/Vendor shall supply the utilisation
factor to indicate the proportion of the light emitted by the bare lamp which falls on
the working plane.
The fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps.
The fittings and accessories shall be designed to have low temperature rise. The
temperature rise above the ambient temperature shall be as indicated in the
relevant Standards.
All Sodium vapour, Mercury vapour and Metal Halide fittings shall be completed
with accessories like lamps, ballasts, power factor improvement capacitors,
starters/ignitors wherever applicable etc. These shall be mounted as far as possible
in the fitting assembly only. If these cannot be accommodated inside, then a
separate metal enclosed box shall be included to accommodate the accessories
and in addition with a fuse and a terminal block suitable for loop-in, loop-out
connections by 1100V Grade PVC insulated wires upto 4 Sqmm.
Outdoor type fittings shall be provided with outdoor type Control gear box. The
fittings shall be power factor corrected to 0.95 (maximum)
Each fitting shall have a terminal block suitable for loop-in, loop-out T-off
connection. The internal wiring shall be completed by the manufacturer by means
of stranded Copper wire and terminated on the terminal block.
All hardware used in the liminaires, shall be Cadmium plated.
4.0 EARTHING:
Each light fitting shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for connection
to the earthing conductor.
210
All metal or metal-enclosed parts of the housing, shall be bonded to the earthing
terminal so as to ensure satisfactory earth continuity throughout the fixture.
5.0 PAINTING/FINISH:
All surfaces of the fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned and de-greased. The fittings
shall be free from scale, sharp edges and burns.
The housing shall be stove-enamelled/epoxy stove-enamelled/vitreous enamelled

powder-coated of anodised as indicated as indicated under various types of fitting.
The finish of the fitting shall be such that no bright spots are produced either by
direct light source or by reflection.
6.0 ACCESSORIES FOR LIGHT FITTINGS:
6.1 Reflectors:
The reflectors shall be made of CRCA sheet steel.Aluminium/Silvered glass as

indicated, for the above mentioned fittings.
The thickness of Steel/Aluminium, shall comply with relevant Standards.

Reflectors made of Steel, shall have stove-enamelled/Vitreous-enamelled/Epoxy-
coating finish.
Aluminium used for reflectors, shall be anodised/Epoxy Stove-enamelled/Mirror

polished.
Reflectors shall be free from scratches or blisters and shall have a smooth and
glossy surface having an optimum light reflecting co-efficient such as to ensure the
overall light output specified by the manufacturer.
Reflectors shall be readily removable from the housing for cleaning and
maintenance without disturbing the lamps and without the use of tools, they shall
be securely fixed to the housing by means of positive fastening device of captive
type.
6.2 LAMP/STARTER HOLDERS:
Lamp Holders shall comply with relevant Standards. They shall have low contact
resistance, shall be resistant to wear and shall be suitable for operation at the
specified temperature without deterioration in insulation value. They shall hold the
lamps in position under normal condition of shock and vibration met within normal
installation and use.
Lamp Holder for the fluorescent lamps shall be of the spring loaded bi-pin rotor
type. Live parts of the lamp holder shall not be exposed during insertion or
removal of the lamp or after lamp has been taken out. The lamp holder contacts
shall provide adequate pressure on the lamp cap pings when in working position.
Lamp Holder for incandescent, Mercury Vapour and Metal Halide lamps shall be of
bayonet type upto 100W and Edison Screw (E.S) type Haher Wattages.
Starter holders for fluorescent lamps shall conform to the relevant Standards. All
material used in the construction of the holder shall be suitable for tropical use.
The Starter Holder shall be so designed that they are mechanically robust and free
from any operational difficulties. They shall be capable of withstanding the shocks
met within normal transit, installation and use.
211
6.2 BALLASTS:
The ballasts shall be designed, manufactured and supplied in accordance with the
relevant Standards. The ballasts shall be designed to have a long service life and
low power loss.
Ballasts shall be mounted using sell locking, antivibration fixings and shall be easy
to remove without de-mounting the fittings. They shall be in dust-tight, non-
combustible enclosures.
The ballasts shall be of the inductive, heavy-duty type, filled with thermosetting
insulating, moisture-repellant, Polyester compound filled under vacuum. Ballasts
shall be provided with tapping to set the voltage within the range specified. End
connections and taps shall be brought out in a suitable terminal block, rigidly fixed
to the ballast enclosure. The ballast wiring shall be of Copper wire that shall be
free from hum. Ballasts which produce humming sound shall be replaced free of
cost by the Vendor.
Low loss Silicon steel lamination, shall be wounded with super enamelled Copper
wire with Class "F" insulation on glass filled Nylon bobbin.
High temperature-resistant interlayer Polyester film shall be used for inter layer
insulator glass-filled Polyester connector should withstand high voltage upto 5 KV.
Separate ballast for each lamp shall be provided in case of multi lamp fittings.
The ballast for each lamp shall be provided in case of multi lamp fittings.
The ballasts for Metal Halide lamps shall not be constant wattage type.
6.3 STARTERS:
Starters shall have bi-metal electrodes and high mechanical strength. Starters
shall be replaceable without disturbing the reflector or lamps and without the use
of any tool. Starters shall have brass contacts and radio interference capacitor.
The starters shall generally conform to the relevant Standards.
6.5 CAPACITORS:
The Capacitors shall have a constant value of capacitance and shall be connected
across the supply of individual lamp circuits.
The capacitors shall be suitable for operation at supply voltage as specified and
shall have a value of capacitance so as to correct the power factor of its
corresponding lamp circuit to the extent of 0.95 lag.
The capacitors shall be hermetically sealed preferably in a metal enclosure to

prevent seepage of impregnate and ingress of moisture.
6.6 LAMPS:
Incandescent (GLS) lamps shall be of "Clear" type unless otherwise specified. The
fluroscent lamps shall be "Cool Day Light" type unless otherwise specified and
shall be provided with features to avoid blackening of lamp ends. The fluroscent
lamps shall have a high lumen output of 3250 lumens. The lamp shall have triple
coil electrode with an anode ring and a triband Phospher coating.
212
Mercury Vapour lamps shall be of high pressure, colour corrected type, with a
luminous efficiency of 50 lumen/watt. The discharge tube shall be made of high
grade quartz.
Sodium Vapour Lamp are of high pressure type.
Metal Halide lamps shall be provided with internal diffuse coating and the average
lumen output shall be 19000 lumen for 250W and 32000 lumen and the lamp
voltage shall not exceed 100V for 250W and 128 V for 400W. The colour
rendering index of the lamp shall be 93. The lamp shall be suitable for universal
burning position and for use in open type luminaire. The lamps shall be suitable for
operating on a Sodium Vapour Controlgear.
The lamps shall be capable of withstanding small vibrations and the connections
at lead in wires and filaments/electrodes, shall not break under such
circumstances.
Lamps/Tubes shall conform to relevant Standards and shall be suitable for supply
voltage and frequency specified.
213
SPECIFICATION FOR CABLE TRAYS

1.0 SCOPE :
This specification covers the design, supply, fabrication fixing, aligning, and painting of cable
trays and other steel frame works at site as required.
The cable trays shall be designed and fabricated out of various sections such as M.S angles,
flats, channels etc. and got approved by Consultants.
Before fabrication the MS sections shall be properly straightened, aligned, cleaned properly to
remove rust if any.
All materials used for fabrication of cable trays shall conform to IS 226 and fabrication shall be
as per IS : 800.
After fabrication the cable trays, and accessories shall be free from sharp edges, corners,
burrs and unevenness, and a coat of cold phosphating chemical shall be applied followed by
a coat of red oxide primer.
The cable trays shall be welded to the mounting supports which in turn are either welded to
plate inserts or grouted to structural members.
Plate inserts for cable tray mounting supports shall be provided by Civil Contractor.
Cable trays shall either run in cable trenches or run overhead and supported from available
structure.
Minimum clearance between the top most tray tier and structural member shall be 300 mm.
The type and size of tray to be used shall be as required.
Each continuous length of cable tray shall be earthed at minimum two places.
All hardwares such as passivated bolts, nuts, washers, and other consumable required for
the fabrication and erection shall be included in the rate quoted by contractor. However, if any
grip/Anchor bolts or fasteners are required, the same shall be paid extra.
The cable trays, accessories, covers etc. shall be painted with two coats of red oxide primer
followed by two finishing synthetic enamel paint of approved shade. Where any cuts or holes
are made or welding is done on finished steel work, the same shall be sealed against
oxidation by red oxide primer followed by finished paint.
214
SPECIFICATION FOR EARTHING SYSTEM

1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
earthing systems. The work shall be carried out in accordance with relevant layout drawings,
typical drawings and installation notes etc. All metal conduits, cable sheathes, switchgear,
distribution boards, light fixtures, fan and all other metal parts forming part of the work shall be
bonded together and connected by two separate and distinct conductors to earth electrodes.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1 The earthing systems shall comply with all currently applicable standards, regulations and safety
codes of the locality where the installation is to be carried out. Nothing in this specification shall
be construed to relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.
2.2 The installation work shall conform to the latest applicable Electricity Rules, Relevant Indian
Standards and Codes of Practices as follows :
2.2.1 IS 3043 - Code of Practice for Earthing.
2.2.2 IS 732 - Electrical Wiring Installation.
2.2.3 IS 3975 - Galvanized round steel wire.
2.2.4 Indian Electricity Rules 32, 61, 67 and 68 of IER 1956.
3.0 EARTHING ELECTRODES
3.1 Earthing electrodes shall be designed as per the requirements of IS 3043. The resistance of
earth electrodes shall be as low as possible, the maximum allowable value being one Ohm.
Earth electrodes shall be as far as possible embedded below permanent moisture level. Earth
pits shall be further treated with salt and charcoal to improve the soil resistnity. In rocky areas
where the required earth resistance cannot be attained using the standard earth electrode.
Configuration then application of deep well earth pits should be examined.
3.2 PLATE ELECTRODE
Plate electrodes shall be made of copper plate of 3.15 mm thick and 600 x 600 mm size. The
plate shall be buried vertically in ground at a depth of not less than 2.5 Mtrs. to the top of the
plate, the plate being encased in powdered charcoal to a thickness of 15 Cms. alround. Salt and
river sand shall not be used. Earth leads to the electrode shall be laid in a medium grade GI
pipe and connected to the plate electrode with brass bolts, nuts and washers. The GI pipe of 19
mm dia. shall be placed vertically over the plate and terminated in a funnel of 5 Cms above the
ground. The funnel shall be enclosed in masonry precast chamber. The chamber shall be
provided with CI frame and CI cover. The earth station shall also be provided with a suitable
permanent identification label/tag.
3.3 PIPE ELECTRODE
Pipe electrode shall comprise of 50 mm dia. GI pipe with wall thickness 3.65 mm and not less
than 3.0 mtrs long buried vertically in a pit of 350x350 mm size and filled with alternate layers of
charcoal, salt and river sand and connected at the top to a medium grade GI pipe of 19 mm dia,
1 mtr long with a funnel at the other end, clamped to the pipe electrode with brass bolts, nuts
and washers. GI pipe electrodes shall be cut tapered at the bottom and provided with holes of
12 mm dia. drilled not less than 75mm from each other upto 2 Mtrs., length from bottom. The
top end of the pipe shall be threaded and provided with G.I cap. A hole shall be provided at 100
mm from the top end to receive a 13 mm bolt with double nuts and washers. The funnel and the
earth lead connections shall be enclosed in a masonry precast chamber/inspection pit. The
215
chamber shall be provided with C.I frame and C.I cover. A proper permanent identification
tag/label/earth cable marker shall be provided for each electrode.
4.0 EARTHING SYSTEM
4.1 GENERAL
Each installation shall have one common earth grid connected to atleast two groups of earth
electrodes.
The earth grid shall extend throughout the installation in the form of a ring circuit with branch
connections to the equipment and structures to be earthed.
4.2 EARTHING CABLES AND CONNECTIONS :
Earth systems shall be of solid copper/galvanized flats type, of cross-section specified on the
relevant design earth layout drawing.
Connections between earth electrodes and main ring earth conductors shall be executed in
accordance with Electrical Drawings and in such a way as to facilitate the inspection and testing
the earth resistance of each individual earth electrode group without disconnection of the earth
system main ring.
All uninsulated parts of earth conductors shall be suitably protected against direct contact with
the soil to prevent electrolytic corrosion. This may be achieved by lap wrapping bared sections
with green PVC adhesive tape.
All earthing terminations shall be made with compression type cable lugs. Interconnections
shall be directly clamped with compression type branch connectors as detailed in Electrical
Drawings.
Execution of earth cable branch connection by means of exothermic welding shall require the
approval of The Company Site Representative, who will take into account the suitability of the
welding equipment and the previous experience of the Contractors personnel.
The resistance between each earth electrode configuration and the general mass of earth shall
not exceed 5 ohms when isolated from the main earth grid.
Location of earth electrodes, earth conductors connections and earth cable routes shown on the
installation earth layout drawing shall be considered as diagramatic only, and site inspection
shall be necessary to determine earth connection onto equipments locations and conductor
routes prior to installation.
Within buildings, strips of high conductivity copper/GI, sized in accordance with the layout
earthing design drawing, should be utilized.
Where copper tape or cable is fixed to building structure it shall be by means of purpose made
saddles.
Fixings shall be made using purpose made lugs and clamps.
Fixings requiring drilling of holes through stripes shall be used, considering the effective cross-
section of the particular run is within relevant regulations.
Where tape or cable is run in the ground or fixed externally, and is liable to corrosion, it shall be
wrapped with corrosion-resistant material. Alternatively, PVC wrapped tape or cable may be
used.
Joints in copper tape shall be tinned before assembly, riveted with a minimum of two rivets, and
sweated solid.
216
Where holes are drilled in the earth tape for connection to items of equipment, effective cross-
sectional area of connections shall be not less than required to comply with the relevant
Regulations.
Bolts, nuts and washers for any fixings of earth tape shall be of high-tensible grade.
4.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Metallic enclosures of all electrical equipment shall be earthed at two ends by connection to the
common earth grid.
Cross-sectional area of the equipment earth connections shall be in accordance with the earth
layout design drawing.
4.4 NON-ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
All metallic equipment used for storage, processing, transportation or pumping flammable
liquids, vapours or gases, and their associated supporting structure or skid, shall be electrically
bonded to the installation main earth ring.
Electrical bonding of associated metal work, in handrails, walkways, etc., is not necessary if it is
demonstrated by testing that they are electrically continuous with the structure. However, the
same shall be bonded to earth at one point.
Piping which is not in electrical contact with its associated tank or vessel, such as an open
discharge line into a tank, shall be bonded to the tank.
In installations that do not contain electrical equipment, the resistance between each earth
electrode configuration and the general mass of earth shall not exceed 5 ohms when isolated
from the main earth grid.
4.5 BONDING
Metal sheaths and armour of all cables operating at low voltage, metal conduits, ducting,
trunking, and protective conductors associated with such cables, which might otherwise come
into contact with adjacent fixed metalwork, shall be effectively either segregated from, or
bonded to, adjacent metal work.
Metallic sheaths and / or non-magnetic armour of all single-core cables in the same circuit
normally shall be bonded together at one and end only of their run (solid bonding) unless
specified otherwise.
All interior metal, water and gas piping shall be bonded together and made electrically
continuous. Non-conductive coatings (such as paint, lacquer and enamel) on equipment to be
earthed shall be removed from threads and other contact surfaces to ensure good electrical
continuity.
217
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

(MCCBs)
1. The MCCB shall be complying with IS: 13947 Part II.
2. MCCBs shall be triple pole (TP) / four pole (FP) quick break and quick make type and
shall be trip free.
3. Short circuit withstanding capacity shall be as indicated in the respective drawings.
4. The insulating case of the MCCBs shall be made of high strength heat resistant,
flame retardant and thermosetting material so as to provide the following important
functions;
(a) Safety of operating pernonnel.

(b) Very high dielectric strength
(c) High withstanding capacity against thermal and mechanical stresses.
5. The contact system shall be maintanance free with arc extinguishing devices &
properties.
6. Terminations:
The following features shall be provided for terminals;
(a) Interchanging capability for line & load ends

(b) Extended terminals to connect Aluminium cables of required runs & sizes.
(c) Copper cable termination without extended termination accessories.
7. Visual indications:
The following visual indications shall be provided for the MCCBs;
(a) ON
(b) OFF
(c) TRIP
8. The MCCBs shall have adjustable/fixed thermal overload setting and adjustable/fixed
magnetic setting as per the drawings or specifications.
9. The MCCBs shall be of Microprocessor/Ordinary based and shall be of Manual /

Motorised type and if motorised type the motor shall be driven by either 240/415V
supply as per the requirements indicated in the drawings and specifications.
10. Minimum one No. (1 No.) NO / NC / Change Over auxillary contact shall be available
for ON, OFF, & TRIP positions.
11. For 4 pole MCCBs, the neutral contact shall make earlier than the phase but while
tripping, the neutral contact shall break later than the phase for safety purposes.
12. Positive indication of neutral shall be available.
13. Accessories:
The following accessories shall be a standard feature of the MCCB;

a. Shunt trip suitable for 220V / 415V AC.
b. Under Voltage trip suitable for 220V / 415V AC.
c. Auxillary Switches.
218
d. It should be possible to connect the earth fault module if indicated in the

drawings.
e. Rotary handle operating mechanism with locking arrangement as indicated in
the drawing & specifications.
(f) Any other accessory as indicated in the drawings.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR STREET LIGHT POLES AND POSTS

The street light poles/pathway light poles shall be of swaged type construction conforming to
IS 1239. The dimensional and other details shall be as specified in the enclosed Standard
Drawings.
The street light poles shall have M.S pipes of progressively reduced dimensions and post top
lanterns poles shall be of uniform cross section. The poles shall be treated with a rigorous rust
inhibition process and the outside surface of the pole shall be painted with two coats of paint
conforming to IS 2339.
Where portion of the pole is required to be embedded in concrete and below ground, the inner
circle shall be treated with two coats of bituminous paint.
The poles shall be complete with base plate of minimum size 300 x 300 mm and 10 mm thick,
and as indicated in the standard drawing.
The pole below the ground level shall be grouted in 1:2:4 concrete as per standard drawing.
The bottom portion of foundation shall be 800 x 800 mm.
Two nos. 50 dia. G.I pipes in arc with 600 mm radius shall be embedded in concrete pedestal
upto marshaling box for running of incoming and outgoing cables.
Earthing studs shall be provided on pole.
Each pole shall be provided with a junction box made of 2 mm thick sheet steel mounted on
supporting clamps welded to pole at +450 mm from ground level. The box shall be of
weatherproof and dust tight construction with neoprene gaskets and provided with hinged
front cover/door with key operated locking device. The box shall have overall dimension of
200 x 150 x 100 mm and shall be complete with the following : Alternatively, arrangement
shall be for an integral type junction box as shown in drawing.
i) 8 way 30 Amp. strip type terminals each terminal being suitable for termination of
loop in and loop out of Aluminium conductor cables upto 25 Sqmm.
ii) 10 Amps SPN (double pole) MCB.
iii) Internal wiring from box to lamp holder of light fitting at top by means of 2 runs of
1100 V grade PVC copper conductor wire of size 4 Sqmm and one run of 2.5 Sqmm
green earth wire.
The gate lights installation shall be with 600 mm long MS pipe out of which 300 mm is
embedded in compound/gate wall. The junction box shall be flush mounted in wall at +450
mm from ground level and with 19 mm dia. MS conduit interconnecting pole and junction box
for running wires. The light poles shall be numbered with neat letters in paint.
The rate shall include all items/works described as above and including civil works, reducers
suitable size foundation bolts as per standard drawing and any other items not specified but
necessary for completion of installation.
LIGHT FITTINGS
219
The light fittings shall be of specified type and complete with Polyester filled copper choke,
HPF condenser holder, ignition, control gear, lamp/bulb of appropriate wattage and type,
connectors, fuses etc. whether specified or not in the Bill of Quantities.
NOTE
1. The Contractor shall submit the drawings of the poles based on above specification and schedule
for approval before fabrication.
2. The civil foundation works of security and pathway lights have to be executed by the
contractor including supply of all materials. The price for erection in schedule of
quantities contain the cost of civil foundation.
220
SPECIFICATION FOR POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT SYSTEM
1. GENERAL
The Power Factor improvement system shall comprise of capacitors and

associated switchgear and control gear as per the requirements.
2. CAPACITORS
2.1 Power factor correction capacitors shall conform in all respects to IS: 2834-1981
(amended upto date) or BSS: 1650-1971 or VDE 0560 Part 4 or IEC:70:1967. The CPRI
test certificates of the capacitors shall be submitted. The capacitors shall be suitable for
3 phase 415V, at 50HZ frequency and shall be available in three phase units. The
capacitors shall be sutiable for indoor use upt amibent temperature of 50 Deg. C. The
permissible overloads shall be given below.
2.1.1 Voltage overload shall be 10% for continuous operation and 15% for 6 hours
for 24 hour cycle.
2.1.2 Current overload shall be 15% for continuous operation and 50% for 6 hours
in 24 hours cycle.
2.1.3 Overload of 30% continuously and 45% for 6 hours in a 24 hours cycle.
2.2 Capacitors (APP) shall be hermitically sealed in sturdy corrosion proof, CRCA sheet
steel containers. The capacitors shall be provided with suitable discharge devices to
reduce the residual voltage from crest value of the rated voltage to 50V or less with
in One Minute after capacitor is disconnected from the source of supply. The loss in
the capacitor shall be very low
2.3 Each capacitor shall be interconnected by tinned copper busbars with final
connections to capacitor terminals by means of copper flexibles to relieve insulator
from mechanical stresses.
2.4 The terminals shall be brought out through Epoxy resin bushings. The terminals
shall be provided with detachable covers on all terminals and live parts. The
capacitor unit shall have earthing studs.
2.5 Capacitors shall withstand power frequency test voltage of 2500V A.C. for one
minute. The insulation resistance between capacitors, terminals and containers
when a test voltage of 500V D.C is applied shall not be less than 50 mega ohms.
2.6 The copies of the following type tests shall be submitted along with routine test
certificates.
2.7 Test for Dielectric loss angle.
2.8 Test for Capacitors losses.
2.9 Thermal stability test.
2.9.1 Test Certificates from relevant authorities / Electricity Boards.
3. CAPACITOR CONTROL PANEL
221
3.1 The capacitor control panel shall generally comprise of following:
3.1.1 Main incoming switch fuse unit or ACB.
3.1.2 Power factor correction relay.
3.1.3 Step controller with reversing mechanism.
3.1.4 Time delay and no-volt relays.
3.1.5 Protection fuses.
3.1.6 Contactors and switch fuses for individual capacitor banks.
3.1.7 Change over switch for either manual or automatic operation.
3.1.8 Current transformers.
3.1.9 Power factor meter with protection fuses.
3.1.10 Indicator lamp and push buttons for each bank.
3.2 The capacitor control panel shall be of cubicle type and shall be fabricated out of 16 G
sheet steel suitably rust inhibited and stove enamelled. The panel shall have adequate
space for mounting the capacitors. The panel shall be of dust and vermine proof
construction. Panels shall be of dead front pattern and floor mounting type.
3.3 The technical specification and construction features of capacitor control panel
shall be same as that of medium voltage power / motor control centres, except the back
covers of the panel housing the capacitor banks. The capacitor banks shall be mounted
at the rear side of the cubicle panel in different tiers arrangement. The interconnection
between the switches / contactors and capacitor banks shall be by means of suitably
rated aluminium busbars and / or PVC armoured cables.
222
SPECIFICATION FOR UPS SYSTEM
1. RATING OF UPS : AS PER BOQ

TYPE : ON LINE
INPUT VOLTAGE : 415V + 10% to 25% (Three Phase or
Single Phase)
FREQUENCY : 50Hz + / -5%
OUTPUT: VOLTAGE : 240V + / -2% (True sine wave)(Three
Phase or Single Phase)
TRANSIENT : + / -5%
OVER LOAD CAPACITY : 110% for 30 Minutes
125% for 05 Minutes
150% for 01 Minutes
FREQUENCY : 50Hz + / - 1%
DC CHARACTERSTICS : DC ripple with battery connected = 1%
DC ripple with battery connected = 2%
OPERATING TEMPERATURE : 40 Degree centigrade maximum.
90% Humidity.
CABLE ENTRY : Cable entry provision to be given for
Both top and bottom entry.
BYPASS : Manual bypass to be provided.
OUTGOING MCB : AS PER BOQ / SCHEMATIC.
PROTECTIONS & INDICATIONS : Standard protections and indications to
be provided as required.
Harmonic Filters to be provided.
HARMONIC DISTORTION
(Allowed Total Voltage & Current HD) : Harmonic distortion shall be less than
8% as per IEC.
BATTERIES : Batteries to be sealed maintenancfree
complete with all the required mounting
accessories.
BACKUP TIME : 30 Minutes / 15 Minutes as per BOQ.
COOLING : Forced Air.
BATTERY CHARGING CURRENT : Shall be calculated for Unity Power
Factor.
BATTERY CAPACITY : To be indicated, Calculations to be
furnished.
DIMENSIONS OF UPS & BATTERY
223
OVERALL SPACE FOR MOUNTING

ALONG WITH ROOM SIZE. : Shall be furnished.
EARTHING : Dedicated earthing for
Secondary Input & Output side
Neutrals.
224
SPECIFICATION FOR INVERTER SYSTEM
1. RATING OF INVERTER : AS PER BOQ

TYPE : OFF LINE
INPUT:
VOLTAGE : 415V + 10% to 25% (Three Phase or
Single Phase)
FREQUENCY : 50Hz + / -5%
OUTPUT: VOLTAGE : 240V + / -2% (True sine wave) (Three
Phase or Single Phase)
TRANSIENT : + / -5%
OVER LOAD CAPACITY : 110% for 30 Minutes
125% for 05 Minutes
150% for 01 Minutes
FREQUENCY : 50Hz + / - 1%
DC CHARACTERSTICS : DC ripple with battery connected = 1%
DC ripple with battery connected = 2%
OPERATING TEMPERATURE : 40 Degree centigrade maximum.
90% Humidity.
CABLE ENTRY : Cable entry provision to be given for
Both top and bottom entry.
BYPASS : Manual bypass to be provided.
OUTGOING MCB : AS PER BOQ / SCHEMATIC.
PROTECTIONS & INDICATIONS : Standard protections and indications to
be provided as required.
Harmonic Filters to be provided.
HARMONIC DISTORTION
(Allowed Total Voltage & Current HD) : Harmonic distortion shall be less than
8% as per IEC.
BATTERIES : Batteries to be sealed maintenance free
complete with all the required mounting
accessories.
BACKUP TIME : 30 Minutes / 15 Minutes as per BOQ.
COOLING : Forced Air.
BATTERY CHARGING CURRENT : Shall be calculated for Unity Power
Factor.
BATTERY CAPACITY : To be indicated, Calculations to be
furnished.
DIMENSIONS OF UPS & BATTERY
OVERALL SPACE FOR MOUNTING
ALONG WITH ROOM SIZE. : Shall be furnished.
225
EARTHING : Dedicated earthing for Secondary Input &

Output side Neutrals.
1. All items of work mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities shall be read and executed strictly in
accordance with the description of the item in the Schedule of Quantities, equipment schedule/
Data sheet ,drawing and standard specifications read in conjunction with the appropriate IS and
conditions of contract.
otherwise include cost of:-
All materials, fixing materials, accessories, hardware, operations, tools, equipment,

consumables, civil works wherever involved and incidentals required in preparations for in the
full and entire execution and completion of the work called for the item and as per specifications
and drawings completely.
a) Wastage on materials and labour .
b) All taxes, duties. octroi, including works contract tax, sales tax, transit insurance, packing
and forwarding charges, loading , transportation, unloading handling , hoisting , to all levels
. setting and fixing in position , disposal of debris and all other labour necessary in
accordance with contracts documents , good practice and recognised principles.
c) Liabilities, obligations and risks arising out of conditions of contract.
d) Liaison service charges.
specifications and drawings are to be read as complimentary to and part of the schedule or
4. In the event of conflict between the bill of quantities and other documents , the most stringent
shall apply and interpretations of the Architect shall be final and binding.
5. The installation of price of switchboards, metering panels, DBs or any other items shall
include supply and fixing of supporting steel structures /MS channels grouting of the same
civil works etc. as required.
whatsoever.
taxes, octroi, insurance, packing and forwarding charges, transportation , unloading at site.
8. The successful contractors shall submit the Schematic diagrams, fabrication drawings with
details of equipment wiring diagrams etc. to Architects for approval prior to
supply/commencement of such works . The approval of these drawings will be general and will
not absolve to contractor of the responsibility of the correctness of these drawings. At least four
copies of the approved drawings supplied to Architects for their distribution to various agencies
at site at no cost to owner.
9. The tenderers must see the site conditions such as type of soil, locations etc. and take all
factors into consideration while quoting the rates as no extra cost will be allowed on any ground
arising out or relating to the site conditions.
10. Any error in description ir in quantity or omission of items from the contact shall not vitiate this
contract but shall be corrected and deemed to be a variation required by the Architect/Owners.
226
11. The Liason service charges shall include the following :
i) Follow up expenses with the Electricity Board from the drawing approval up to
servicing the installation and getting the safety certificate.
ii) Preparation of detailed drawings required by the Electrical Inspector.
iii) Obtaining Approval of drawings and Installation.
iv) Renewal of any temporary power supply connection during construction.
a) All incidental charges/expenses associated with the above work.
b) Provision of labour in assisting Electricity Board for installing DP Structure and

accessories.
Official deposits paid to the above agencies will be reimbursed separately at actuals by the
owners.
12. All testing and calibration charges for the meters shall be included in the installation price of the
Meter Board.
13. The tender shall take into account The expenses of pre-commissioning tests to be conducted
as per specification of the complete installation by licensed agencies.
NOTE: -
1. Please Tick () the make of material considered in tender.

2. Detail submittals in the form of catalogues specification sheets, and samples were called
for, shall be submitted one week from the date of order and approvals shall be obtained on
the type of accepted make before procurement are made.
3. Out of the approved makes of materials mentioned above, the make of materials to be used
on the work shall be as decided by the Consultant/Owner jointly.
4. In respect of materials for which approved makes are not specified above, these will be of
makes to be decided by the consultant and as per sample approved before procurement.
5. Equipments approved and supplied shall have local servicing facilities available in the
region.
227

Annexure F Tech Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Annexure F Tech Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL SPECFICATION

NAME OF WORK : CONSTRUCTION OF MEDICAL CENTRE

CLIENT : M/S.BANGALORE INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LIMITED

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CIVIL WORKS

GENERAL CIVIL WORK & SPECIAL ITEMS OF CIVIL WORKS

CHAPTER: 3 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT

CHAPTER: 4 PLAIN & REINFORCED CONCRETE

CHAPTER: 9 PRECAST CONCRETE BLOCK

CHAPTER: 12 WOOD WORK

CHAPTER: 13 STEEL WORK

CHAPTER: 14 FLOORING WORK

CHAPTER: 15 ROOFING WORK

CHAPTER: 16 FINISHING WORK

CHAPTER: 17 ALUMINUM WORK

CHAPTER: 18 ROAD WORK

CHAPTER: 19 MISCELLANEOUS & SPECIALIZED ITEMS

CHAPTER: 20 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

APPENDIX: A SCHEDULE OF WORKS.

APPENDIX: B LIST OF APPROVED MAKES & MOCKUP

THIS TECHINCAL SPECIFICATION SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH PARTICULAR

4.2 ENGINEER IN-CHARGE/ EIC:

5. INDIAN STANDARDS (IS):

9. TESTING OF MATERIALS, QUALITY CONTROL TESTS ETC.

11. SCHEDULE / SCOPE OF WORK

13. BRAND NAMES OF MATERIALS / EQUIVALENT:

CHAPTER : 2 EARTHWORK AND EXCAVATION

4. EXCAVATION AND PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR CONCRETING:

6. STACKING OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL:

during construction, either by construction equipment or otherwise, it should be

8.4 The excavation shall be kept free from water:

10. RATES TO INCLUDE

3. Dewatering as required and directed.

4. Excavation at all depths (unless otherwise specified in the schedule of Quantities)

5. Removal of muck left over by the piling Contractor.

CHAPTER : 3 PRE-CONSTRUCTIONAL ANTITERMITE TREATMENT

1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

CHEMICAL RELEVANT INDIAN CONCENTRATION BY

Chloropyrifos IS: 8944 1.0%

Lindane Emulsifiable IS: 632 1.0%

Chemical is available in concentrated form in the market and concentration is

6.2 TREATMENT ON TOP SURFACE OF PLINTH FILLING

6.3 TREATMENT AT JUNCTION OF WALL AND FLOOR

6.5 TREATMENT OF SOIL SURROUNDING PIPES AND CONDUITS

CHAPTER :4 PLAIN & REINFORCED CONCRETE

Part - 2 : Handling and Storage

Part - 1 : Specifications for Portland Cement Concrete

Part - 2 : Guideline Specifications for Pump-able Concrete

Part - 1 : Mixing and ready - mix concrete

Part - 2 : Transporting ready mix concrete

Part - 3 : Placing Concrete in Position

Part - 4 : Special requirements for placing concrete by Pumping methods

Part - 5 : Compacting and Curing of Concrete

Part - 6 : Concreting under extreme weather conditions

1.1 Materials covered under this section of specifications are:-

b) Portland Pozzolana Cement (Fly ash based)

Strength in Newton/Sq.mm not less than

Grade 30 Grade 33 Grade 43 Grade 53

a) Initial setting time: not less than 30 minutes

3.3 Limits of deleterious materials permissible in coarse aggregates, when tested in

Maximum allowable percentage

i) Coal and lignite 1.0

ii) Clay 1.0

vi) Mica NIL

vii) Total of all items (i) to (vi) 5.0